IntroductionWelcome| 00:01 | Hi and welcome to Microsoft Office Visio 2007.
| | 00:05 | I am David Rivers and I
am glad you could join me.
| | 00:08 | We're going to be covering the basic to
intermediate functions of Visio 2007 in this title.
| | 00:13 | If you've got the premium subscription
or you've got this title on CD, great,
| | 00:17 | you've got the Exercise Files that I
am going to be using so you can follow
| | 00:21 | along with me at your own pace.
| | 00:23 | Now if you don't have a premium
subscription or you don't have the CD, no
| | 00:27 | worries, you can still learn by
sitting back and just watching.
| | 00:30 | So let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting Started with VisioStarting Visio and exploring the user interface| 00:01 | All right, so it's time to
start learning on Visio 2007.
| | 00:05 | Now if you're new to the application,
you may not know that it's a really good
| | 00:09 | tool for diagramming solutions.
| | 00:12 | For example, if you wanted to
communicate some ideas graphically, you don't need
| | 00:16 | to be a professional artist, you don't
need to be a designer or an illustrator.
| | 00:19 | So what's really nice is that anyone
can use this program because it's easy
| | 00:23 | to use and it's smart.
| | 00:25 | You'll see what I mean when we get in here.
| | 00:27 | Now if you're not new to Visio there
are some changes that you're going to see
| | 00:30 | in 2007, jumping all the way from version 2003.
| | 00:35 | We will cover everything that's new in
this application, but before we can look
| | 00:38 | at anything, we need to launch the application.
| | 00:41 | So let's do that now.
| | 00:42 | We'll go down to our Start
button down here and give it a click.
| | 00:45 | Now if you've been using Visio, it's
already going to show up here on your
| | 00:49 | recently used applications, but a
great way to find programs is to skip over
| | 00:54 | this All Programs option that you
might be used to, I'm in Vista here so I
| | 00:58 | can come down to this Start Search
filed here, just click down there and I'm
| | 01:01 | going to type in visio.
| | 01:02 | So I type in visio and you can see I've got
a number of files and folders listed here.
| | 01:08 | Right above that I've got Favorites
and History and then right at the top is
| | 01:12 | where I see all the programs that have
the word Visio and there is only one,
| | 01:15 | Microsoft Office Visio 2007.
| | 01:16 | That's the one I'm going to
click to launch the application.
| | 01:20 | All right, now when I launch the
application you can see that the Getting
| | 01:24 | Started with Microsoft
Office Visio screen appears.
| | 01:28 | This is the first thing that you'll
see and it's split into three parts.
| | 01:31 | Over here you've got your
templates and categories.
| | 01:34 | Down the middle here you've
got recently used templates.
| | 01:37 | Now if this is your first time
running Visio 2007, you're not going to see
| | 01:42 | anything here, but you will see down below
this Office Online, What's new in Visio 2007?
| | 01:48 | And some more Office Online options down here.
| | 01:50 | These are links to Training
Templates and Downloads of the Internet.
| | 01:54 | Obviously, you need to be
connected to the Internet to use that.
| | 01:58 | The third portion of our screen over
here is Recent Documents, so if you've been
| | 02:02 | working with Visio already, you'll see
any documents or diagrams, for example,
| | 02:07 | that you've created and saved
over here on the right hand side.
| | 02:10 | So if you need to go quickly back to
something you've working on, it's a
| | 02:13 | great way to get it.
| | 02:14 | You just give it a click and there you go.
| | 02:16 | Now for us, we're starting fresh and
we're going to be talking about the
| | 02:19 | various parts of your User Interface before we
start creating and opening existing diagrams.
| | 02:25 | So what I'm going to do is just come up
to the right hand corner here and click
| | 02:28 | on the Close button to close up our
Getting Started screen and here we are
| | 02:32 | starting brand new with Visio
2007 with a fresh screen. All right.
| | 02:38 | The first thing I want to show you is
that we've got our title bar where we're
| | 02:41 | used to seeing it up here at the top
and you can see it says Microsoft Visio,
| | 02:45 | the name of your diagrams, when you
start to create them and save them will also
| | 02:49 | show up here on the title bar,
just like you've always seen.
| | 02:52 | So the very far right on the title bar
you've got your Minimize, you've got your
| | 02:56 | Restore and Maximize buttons
depending on your current view right now.
| | 03:00 | Our window is maximized so
this is a Restore Down button.
| | 03:04 | Then here's where we close the entire
application, our Close button in the
| | 03:08 | top-right corner where we're used to seeing it.
| | 03:10 | Down below that we've got our menu bar
and you can see that it's got File, Edit,
| | 03:14 | View all the way across to Help, very
familiar if you've used any of the Office
| | 03:19 | programs in the past.
| | 03:21 | Now what you'll notice that with Visio
2007 if you've started to get familiar
| | 03:25 | with some of the other Office
applications like Word and PowerPoint, for
| | 03:29 | example, that this User Interface has not
changed drastically like those other have.
| | 03:34 | In other words, you don't see the
ribbon here like you do in Word, like you do
| | 03:39 | in PowerPoint, like you would in
Excel and Outlook, for example.
| | 03:43 | So this is going to be really familiar
to people who have already used Visio and
| | 03:47 | any of the other Office
applications prior to version 2007.
| | 03:51 | Now, of course, when we click on a menu
like File, we're going to see File options.
| | 03:56 | So, for example, if I want to create a
new file, open an existing file, there is
| | 04:01 | my Save options that we're going to
talk about a little later for saving files.
| | 04:05 | All of these options deal with File, so
they're context-sensitive to the word File.
| | 04:11 | If I move up to the Edit menu and
look at that dropdown, right now there's
| | 04:14 | nothing to edit but I can see them grayed out.
| | 04:16 | This all has to do with editing my diagram.
| | 04:18 | It's like undoing and cutting and copying
and pasting and find and replace etcetera.
| | 04:25 | Under the View tab, same thing.
| | 04:27 | So each of these menu items have
their own pulldown, which you will notice
| | 04:31 | though is that some of the pulldowns
have menu items that have little black
| | 04:35 | triangles next to them.
| | 04:36 | That means there is a sub menu.
| | 04:38 | So from the Insert menu, if I go down
to Picture, you can see there is a little
| | 04:42 | black arrow and to the right, I
see that I can insert Clip Art.
| | 04:46 | I can insert pictures from files,
charts, data maps and so on. All right.
| | 04:52 | If we're done looking at the menus we
just click anywhere in the blank space to
| | 04:55 | deselect our selected menu.
| | 04:58 | Now below the menu bar we've got our toolbars.
| | 05:01 | This first Standard toolbar, you can
see has some shortcuts to things that
| | 05:05 | we've already seen up in the menu bar, for
example, the New button we saw under the File menu.
| | 05:10 | Same thing goes for Open and
Save and emailing or sending.
| | 05:15 | Printing is also part of the File menu.
| | 05:18 | There is our Print Preview button.
| | 05:19 | Then we've got some options here
and there is a little separator here.
| | 05:22 | You can see we've got our spell checker.
| | 05:23 | We've got our Research button.
| | 05:25 | These fall under different menu
headings, but they are shortcuts.
| | 05:30 | Cut, Copy and Paste fall under the Edit menu.
| | 05:33 | So these are going to be commands that
you're going to use more often than not.
| | 05:37 | That's why they're here
on this particular toolbar.
| | 05:40 | Now just so you know and we will talk
about this later, we can edit toolbars.
| | 05:45 | We don't have to have the buttons you
see here on the toolbar, we can create our
| | 05:48 | own toolbars, show toolbars that we
want to use and hide the ones we don't.
| | 05:53 | We will talk about that a
little bit later on in this title.
| | 05:56 | As you hove over these, you can see
there is a little popup too, just in case
| | 05:59 | you're not sure what the icon represents,
you can see the popup tells me this is
| | 06:03 | my Shapes button, for example.
| | 06:05 | Now below that I've got
Formatting toolbar as well.
| | 06:08 | So this is going to come in handy when
I'm formatting text, for example, in a
| | 06:12 | diagram and I'll be able to
choose fonts and font sizes.
| | 06:15 | I'll be able to format the text once
it's selected, for example, like Bolding,
| | 06:20 | Italics and Underlining.
| | 06:21 | There is my Alignment buttons.
| | 06:23 | You can see I've got Text Direction buttons.
| | 06:26 | Then I've got the way my paragraphs are
going to flow, Left to Right, Right to
| | 06:29 | Left, all kinds of things like Bullets
and Indenting and so on, all of this on
| | 06:33 | the Formatting toolbar.
| | 06:35 | Now down below that we've
got our Stencil toolbar.
| | 06:37 | Now if that's not showing for you, or
there is a toolbar that you want up here.
| | 06:42 | There is plenty of toolbars to choose
from, and if we just got to a blank space
| | 06:46 | here, outside of any of the buttons on
the toolbar, and right click, you'll see
| | 06:50 | the ones that are selected, because
they've got check marks like Standard,
| | 06:53 | Formatting and there Stencil.
| | 06:55 | Now if your Stencil toolbar is not showing,
for example, it means it's not selected here.
| | 07:00 | Because mine is showing, if I
click on it, I'll be hiding it.
| | 07:05 | So that's how you hide a toolbar, to
show it, we just right click and then we
| | 07:09 | select the toolbar we want to show.
| | 07:12 | Now where they're located is also an
option and we will like I say, get into
| | 07:17 | your toolbars and manipulating them
and rechecking them to represent exactly
| | 07:22 | what you need on your screen. All right.
| | 07:25 | So that's enough up here.
| | 07:26 | We've got just to recap.
| | 07:27 | We've got our title bar, we've got
our menu bar and we've got our Standard
| | 07:30 | toolbar, Formatting toolbar, and here
we've got the Stencil toolbar showing.
| | 07:34 | Now we've got our work area down here,
nothing happening here, not until we
| | 07:37 | start creating or working with diagrams.
| | 07:41 | Because we don't have anything open
on their screen right now, at the very
| | 07:44 | bottom on what we call our
Status bar, there is nothing to show.
| | 07:48 | So there is no statuses.
| | 07:49 | For example, when we start working with
diagrams we're going to see information
| | 07:53 | down below, for example, the size of
the diagram that we're working with and
| | 07:57 | other information about the particular diagram.
| | 08:01 | So keep an eye down there once we start
working with diagrams, like we're going
| | 08:05 | to do in the next lesson. All right.
| | 08:09 | So that covers launching Microsoft Visio 2007.
| | 08:13 | That's a brief overview of the User
Interface like I said we've going to
| | 08:16 | manipulate this and format it to be
exactly what you need it to be, but we'll
| | 08:20 | cover that a little bit later.
| | 08:22 | Next, we're going to look at
working with some sample drawings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing sample drawings| 00:01 | All right, in the last lesson when we
launched Visio from the Start button
| | 00:05 | we saw that Getting Started screen and it
was broken up into three areas if you recall.
| | 00:10 | Now if you've skipped to this lesson,
no problem, we'll just do a quick review.
| | 00:13 | But the Getting Started pane that
shows up when we first launch Visio has
| | 00:17 | something called Sample Drawings in there.
| | 00:19 | Now samples which went missing in
version 2003 and are back again in 2007, are
| | 00:25 | different from templates.
| | 00:26 | Samples are actual drawings that have
been created and include the data that
| | 00:31 | feeds into those drawings,
and you've got access to them.
| | 00:34 | But if you've skipped by the Getting
Started screen and now you're here in
| | 00:37 | Visio and you've got this blank screen in front
of you, how do you get to those samples again?
| | 00:42 | Well, here's a way.
| | 00:43 | Let's go up to the File menu,
and you give it a click.
| | 00:46 | Now if you come down to New, you'll
notice it does have one of those little
| | 00:49 | black arrows next to it, and over
to the right is Getting Started.
| | 00:53 | Now we also have those templates down below.
| | 00:55 | We can create new drawings, new
drawings from the template, and then we can
| | 00:59 | access from various categories, a
number of templates are built into those
| | 01:03 | categories, for example, under
Business you can see we've got Audit Diagrams
| | 01:07 | and Flowcharts and Brainstorming Diagrams
etcetera, it's kind of related to business.
| | 01:11 | We've got an Engineering category,
Flowchart all the way down to Software and Database.
| | 01:16 | But to get those samples I was talking
about we need to go back up to Getting
| | 01:20 | Started and click there.
| | 01:21 | So this is what we see when we
launch Visio for the first time.
| | 01:25 | So if we were to close this up right
now and start it up again, this is the
| | 01:29 | screen we see Getting Started
with Microsoft Office Visio.
| | 01:33 | What I wanted to show you is
what's over here on the left-hand side.
| | 01:37 | Now above all of those template
categories we just saw, we've also got Samples,
| | 01:42 | and if I click on Samples, you'll see
over here that I've got different kinds of
| | 01:45 | sample diagrams, I've got IT Asset
Management, Process Improvement, Project
| | 01:51 | Management, a Sales
Summary and a Project Timeline.
| | 01:55 | Each of these samples has data that
feeds into those diagrams to make them
| | 02:00 | look the way they do.
| | 02:01 | So for example, with IT Asset
Management selected over here, we get a brief
| | 02:05 | overview on the right-hand side of what
this is, so we use it to track network
| | 02:09 | health and statistics using up-to-date
information in an Excel spreadsheet.
| | 02:15 | So there is information in a
spreadsheet that feeds this diagram to make it
| | 02:18 | look the way it does.
| | 02:20 | Now I have some options down below,
first of all, the units I want to work in,
| | 02:24 | US units like inches, feet, yards,
etcetera, or I can go Metric if I prefer
| | 02:29 | millimeters, centimeters
and meters, for example.
| | 02:32 | My two buttons down below are to open
the Sample Data and open the Diagram.
| | 02:36 | Now when we open a diagram, we're
going to see that sample data as well.
| | 02:40 | But if just want to work on the
data, I could do that through here.
| | 02:43 | As I click on the other samples here
like Process Improvement for example, I
| | 02:47 | also get a description on the right-hand
side and those same options for opening
| | 02:52 | the diagram and the sample data.
| | 02:55 | Same goes for Project Management, a
Project Timeline, and a Sales Summary, and
| | 03:02 | you can see this is going to use
something called a Pivot Diagram.
| | 03:05 | We will get into pivot
diagrams a little bit later.
| | 03:07 | It looks like the Sales Summary is
using a pivot diagram to evaluate the sales
| | 03:12 | pipeline and current sales right at a glance.
| | 03:15 | If I go to Project Management, this
is also going to make use of a Pivot
| | 03:18 | Diagram, but it's a different sample.
| | 03:20 | So I am going to go over
here to Project Timeline.
| | 03:24 | I am going to make sure US units is
selected, and I am going to click Open Diagram.
| | 03:28 | So you'll see what actually
opens here is the diagram itself.
| | 03:31 | Now it's kind of hard to read
because we're zoomed so far out.
| | 03:34 | And it's small because the bottom half
of this part of the screen also includes
| | 03:38 | the sampled data and this
is just like a spreadsheet.
| | 03:41 | It's my movies column so
you can read what's in them.
| | 03:44 | You can see I've got data in
here under the Task Name column.
| | 03:48 | The Duration, when it starts when it finishes,
all the information I need in a good Timeline.
| | 03:54 | All right, on the left-hand side, I
have also got under the Shapes heading here
| | 04:00 | a number of stencils.
| | 04:01 | So backgrounds, borders and titles, and
then Timeline shapes appear down here,
| | 04:06 | all of those shapes I might want
to use when creating a Timeline.
| | 04:09 | So if I wanted to update this, I've
got all of the shapes down here including
| | 04:13 | dividers and milestones and so on.
| | 04:15 | Okay, now these borders can be adjusted.
| | 04:19 | I am just going to come down
here until I see the double arrow.
| | 04:22 | I'll just click-and-drag this down,
I don't need to see that much.
| | 04:25 | You can see this starts to grow a
little bit as I create more space for it.
| | 04:29 | Of course, we've got zoom levels and so
on that we can use to look at the data,
| | 04:33 | but that's not the purpose
of this particular lesson.
| | 04:36 | I just wanted you to know that there
are sample diagrams in there with sample
| | 04:40 | data if you wanted to grab a head-start.
| | 04:43 | So if you're going to be creating a
Timeline for the first time ever, you might
| | 04:46 | want to grab this sample, just come in
here, edit the data, for example, so the
| | 04:51 | task names would change for you.
| | 04:53 | So you would edit those, change their
durations, if you wanted start and finish
| | 04:57 | times like you need in the
Timeline you could edit those.
| | 05:00 | If there is information you didn't
need, you can take out columns and
| | 05:04 | remove information.
| | 05:05 | So it's just a great way to get a
head-start in creating a diagram in
| | 05:10 | Microsoft Office Visio.
| | 05:12 | When we're done with our diagram, we
can simply close it by coming up to this
| | 05:16 | small x underneath the Close
button that will close the application.
| | 05:21 | This is the one that closes our diagram,
and that brings us back to where we started.
| | 05:26 | So just so you know all those samples
are back, we've got them in Visio 2007,
| | 05:29 | and if you need a head-start, don't
forget to go in there, under Getting Started
| | 05:34 | click that Samples folder and grab
the sample you need to get you going.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Task pane| 00:01 | All right, just before we start working
with actual drawings in Visio 2007 here
| | 00:06 | or creating your own drawings, we are
going to continue on the theme of just
| | 00:10 | getting you familiarized with your surroundings.
| | 00:12 | Something I would like to talk to
you about now is called the Task Pane.
| | 00:15 | And the Task Pane is kind of context
sensitive, it's going to show up over here
| | 00:19 | on the right hand side of your screen
but depending on what you are doing with a
| | 00:23 | drawing, the Task Pane is going
to show you different options.
| | 00:26 | Now to have the Task Pane appear
on your screen, there is a couple of
| | 00:29 | different ways to do that.
| | 00:31 | You can do it manually by going up to
the View menu and then clicking on Task
| | 00:35 | Pane or by the keyboard holding down Ctrl
and pressing function key 1 (F1). That's one way.
| | 00:41 | I am not going to turn it on quite yet, so I
will just click out here in the gray space.
| | 00:45 | Another way is, it will automatically
launch depending on what you are doing.
| | 00:49 | For example, if you are working on an
org chart and you want to have a nice
| | 00:53 | color combination or a theme as we
would call it, you might go up to the Theme
| | 00:57 | button up here on the Formatting
toolbar and then the Task Pane shows up with
| | 01:01 | some options for you.
| | 01:03 | So before we launch this Task Pane I
am talking about, let's just go up to
| | 01:06 | the very first button on your Standard
toolbar here, the New button, and give it a click.
| | 01:11 | So whatever the default is, it shows
up here, we have got a blank drawing
| | 01:14 | about to be created here.
| | 01:16 | Now if I want the Task Pane to show up,
like I said, I could start working on
| | 01:20 | various parts of my drawing and it may show
up by default or I can go up to the View menu.
| | 01:25 | Let's do it now, click View, and
then we will click on Task Pane.
| | 01:29 | So you can see it squeezes my drawing
over here to the left and now by default
| | 01:34 | for me, I am looking at Theme - Colors
and down below you can see I have got
| | 01:38 | built-in color schemes, basically.
| | 01:40 | So if I was working on a diagram, I
could simply click on one of these themes to
| | 01:45 | have those colors applied to my
drawing, a really nice shortcut.
| | 01:49 | I have also got Theme Effects
down here if I wanted to use that.
| | 01:53 | So different effects like
shadows and borders and so on.
| | 01:57 | Now I have also got a dropdown up
here where it says now Theme - Effects.
| | 02:00 | I can click that dropdown, there is
Colors, I have got Data Graphics, I have got
| | 02:05 | the Reviewing Task Pane.
| | 02:07 | So if I click on Reviewing, for example,
this is where if I was marking up a
| | 02:11 | diagram and sending it off to
somebody with feedback or requesting their
| | 02:15 | feedback and they would go
in and add their two cents.
| | 02:18 | I would get it back all marked up and
this is the Reviewing Task Pane that I
| | 02:22 | would use to show those markups and
either accept them or reject them and so on.
| | 02:26 | If I go to this dropdown you will see
there is some other choices, there is
| | 02:30 | a Clip Art Task Pane.
| | 02:32 | Research, if I am going to be working
with, for example, the Speller, Thesaurus,
| | 02:37 | I want to look up words, that kind of thing.
| | 02:40 | If I am managing documents and I have
got an outside source, for example, I have
| | 02:45 | got Document Management system, I
have got Document Management, Updates and
| | 02:49 | Conflicts here as well.
| | 02:51 | So these will sometimes just show up by
default depending on what we are doing
| | 02:55 | in our diagram, but it's good to know
that you can always close it when you
| | 02:58 | don't want it by clicking the Close
button and if you do want it and it's not
| | 03:02 | there, you can always go to View and
click on Task Pane or from the keyboard,
| | 03:07 | remember, you have got Ctrl+F1 as well.
| | 03:09 | All right, I am just going to close up
my Task Pane, I am going to close this
| | 03:14 | diagram that I have started.
| | 03:17 | I haven't actually done anything so it
doesn't ask me to save anything and I am
| | 03:20 | back where I started at
the beginning of this lesson.
| | 03:23 | Next, we are going to look at
manipulating your toolbars and your menus to be
| | 03:27 | exactly the way you need them to
be to work efficiently in Visio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Manipulating toolbars and menus| 00:01 | All right folks, we are really close
now to actually opening up a Visio diagram
| | 00:05 | and viewing it, but just before we do
that, I want to spend a little bit more
| | 00:09 | time talking about your toolbars and
even the menubar that we see up here at
| | 00:13 | the top of the screen.
| | 00:14 | What you need to know is that you have
full control over what shows up here on
| | 00:18 | your User Interface.
| | 00:20 | In other words, you can customize it to be
exactly what you need to work most efficiently.
| | 00:26 | So, for example, if you don't do a lot
of routing and that kind of stuff, you
| | 00:30 | wouldn't need the routing toolbar.
| | 00:32 | If you do a lot of formatting, you
want that one showing, but maybe there are
| | 00:36 | buttons that are missing
that you wish were on there.
| | 00:38 | I am going to give you an example.
| | 00:40 | On the Standard toolbar here I have got New,
Open, I have got Save, E-mail and Print.
| | 00:45 | Well, maybe I like to use Save As on a
regular basis so I can save my diagrams
| | 00:49 | in different formats.
| | 00:51 | Well, I would have to go to File and
choose Save As from the menu, but I could
| | 00:55 | add a button right here next to the Save button
if I wanted to for saving as. Let's try that.
| | 01:00 | Before we do though, you all remember
the very beginning of this lesson, right
| | 01:05 | clicking out here off to the right of
any one of these toolbars allows you to
| | 01:09 | see a popup and any toolbar that has a
check mark next to it is a toolbar that's
| | 01:14 | being shown currently.
| | 01:15 | So I do see the Stencil toolbar, the
Formatting toolbar and the Standard toolbar.
| | 01:20 | I don't see any of these other ones.
| | 01:21 | They are currently hidden
because they are not checked off.
| | 01:24 | Now if I work with a lot of pictures,
for example, I put clip art and photos
| | 01:29 | and stuff into my work, I might want this
toolbar showing up all the time, so I click on Picture.
| | 01:34 | So you can see where it shows up, it's kind
of floating here in the middle of my screen.
| | 01:38 | But I can move that up and as soon as I
move it up to the top of my screen, you
| | 01:41 | can see how it kind of snaps in
and becomes an actual toolbar.
| | 01:45 | And I can move it next to other
toolbars on top of other toolbars.
| | 01:49 | So once I have got it where I wanted,
just let go, and I have got that
| | 01:51 | toolbar sitting there now.
| | 01:53 | It will stay there until I hide it.
| | 01:55 | How do we hide them?
| | 01:56 | Well, we just simply deselect them.
| | 01:58 | So I will go up here, again on a
blank space where there is no toolbar or
| | 02:02 | toolbar buttons, right
click, go down to Picture.
| | 02:06 | We will click on it to hide it again.
| | 02:08 | It's still there whenever we need it.
| | 02:10 | But that's how you show
and hide various toolbars.
| | 02:13 | Now you may have noticed that just to
right of each of these toolbars we've got
| | 02:17 | little dropdown buttons that
allow us to do some modifications.
| | 02:20 | In other words, we are going to
work with the Toolbar Options.
| | 02:23 | So I am going to go up here to my
Standard toolbar, click this little
| | 02:26 | dropdown and you can see I have got
the first option here which is Show
| | 02:29 | Buttons on One Row.
| | 02:31 | Watch what happens when I click this.
| | 02:33 | All of my Standard and Formatting
toolbar buttons just show up here combined
| | 02:38 | into one toolbar at the top row.
| | 02:40 | Now I may not see everything but
you can see that I have got a little
| | 02:43 | dropdown here, and when I click that,
there is those other buttons that I
| | 02:46 | might be missing, okay.
| | 02:50 | Now if I want to actually show these on
two rows, because there are too many to
| | 02:54 | fit on one row, I go back
to Show Buttons on Two Rows.
| | 02:57 | That's where I was a moment ago.
| | 02:59 | All right, let's go back to that
dropdown because the other option is to add
| | 03:03 | and remove buttons from the toolbar itself,
remember, we want to add the Save As button.
| | 03:08 | If I go down to Add or Remove
Buttons, Standard is showing up.
| | 03:12 | That's my Standard toolbar, and you can
see that everything with a check mark is
| | 03:16 | currently on my Standard toolbar,
anything that's missing a check mark is not.
| | 03:22 | So quite a few, but I don't see
Save As, I only see Save As Web Page.
| | 03:27 | So I may then need to come over to Customize.
| | 03:30 | When I click on Customize, I get the
Customize dialog box showing and now you
| | 03:34 | can see I have got access to every command.
| | 03:36 | So I got all of the File commands from the
Edit menu, from the View menu, the Insert view.
| | 03:41 | All of these are at my fingertips now and I
know that Save As falls under the File menu.
| | 03:46 | So I come up here, you can see there is
New Drawings, there is Getting Started,
| | 03:51 | there is Save As right there.
| | 03:53 | So I click on Save As and if I want
to bring it up on to the toolbar, I do
| | 03:57 | exactly what I just said.
| | 03:58 | I bring it up there by clicking and
dragging it up to the toolbar and letting go
| | 04:04 | where I think it belongs.
| | 04:05 | You can see there is a little
separator following me, I think right between
| | 04:08 | Save and E-mail is where it should go, I let
go, and I have got a new button on my toolbar.
| | 04:14 | All right, maybe there is up
one here that I will never use.
| | 04:17 | Lets say, up here where I see this one,
I am going to hover over this button and
| | 04:22 | you can see now it's selected.
| | 04:24 | Now I don't actually use the command
when the Customize dialog box is open, when
| | 04:29 | I click a button I am not
actually going to use it.
| | 04:32 | So if I don't need the Drawing Tool here, I
can just click and drag it off and it's gone.
| | 04:39 | So any of these that I don't use, click,
drag it off, and you can see they are
| | 04:45 | disappearing from my toolbar.
| | 04:46 | Now the danger in that is you may not
know where to find them to get them back.
| | 04:50 | But you will also notice that
quite often we have got a Reset option.
| | 04:54 | So if I go to toolbars here in the
Customize window and with the Standard
| | 04:58 | selected here I can click Reset.
| | 05:02 | Are you sure you want to reset
the changes made? I click OK.
| | 05:06 | And you can see what just happened, I have
lost my Save As but my other buttons are back.
| | 05:11 | So maybe the other option is to create
your own toolbar and put all the buttons
| | 05:16 | you use most often on that toolbar
and that's what we are going to do now.
| | 05:20 | So with the Toolbars tab selected here
under Customize, we click on the New button.
| | 05:24 | We call it whatever we want, you can
type in your own name, I am going to call
| | 05:31 | it Dave's Toolbar and click OK.
| | 05:32 | So right now my toolbar doesn't have
anything in it, and this is where I go back
| | 05:37 | to my commands and I start
dragging buttons on to the toolbar.
| | 05:42 | So I am going to choose Open,
I like Close, I like Save.
| | 05:47 | You can see how it's growing now to
accommodate all the buttons I am adding
| | 05:52 | to it, Save As, maybe as I scroll down here
printing is an option that I like to have.
| | 05:57 | So I scroll down to where
I see Print, there we go.
| | 06:01 | And maybe I use some other things
from some of the other toolbars.
| | 06:04 | So I am going to go over here to Tools,
for example, and put Spelling in there.
| | 06:08 | Maybe I will go to Format Text, because
I do a lot of bolding, italics and
| | 06:16 | underlining, for example.
| | 06:17 | Okay, now I can rearrange these just by
moving them around, if I think it should
| | 06:22 | be bold, underlined and then italics,
maybe it should be Save As then Save.
| | 06:27 | I am going to just drag them around on
the toolbar, as long as this Customize
| | 06:31 | dialog box is open, I can edit this toolbar.
| | 06:34 | All right, when I am done, I click Close.
| | 06:38 | Right now it's floating so it can be
anywhere on my screen, but I can move it up
| | 06:42 | here with the others.
| | 06:43 | All right, I can move it up next to there,
right in between the two if I wanted.
| | 06:48 | Just drag it over and you can see now I
have got one, two, three toolbars plus
| | 06:54 | this one down here for Stencils, four toolbars.
| | 06:57 | If I right click now, you will notice
that Dave's Toolbar does have a little
| | 07:01 | check mark next to it.
| | 07:02 | If I don't want to show
Dave's Toolbar, I just click here.
| | 07:06 | So how do I remove a toolbar now
that I have created? Glad, you asked.
| | 07:09 | Well, right click up here and
we will go down to Customize.
| | 07:12 | There is our Customize dialog.
| | 07:14 | Go back to Toolbars and on our list of
Toolbars now we should have one called, ah!
| | 07:19 | Down at the bottom, Dave's Toolbar.
| | 07:22 | If I click on it, the Delete button
becomes available, I click Delete, I need to
| | 07:27 | confirm I meant to do that.
| | 07:29 | Click OK and it's gone.
| | 07:30 | All right, we also have an Options
tab up here and you can see we can under
| | 07:36 | the Personalized menus and Toolbars, Show
Standard and Formatting toolbars on two rows.
| | 07:42 | That's what we currently
selected up here when we right clicked.
| | 07:44 | And always show full menus, so every
time we click on a menu up here, you
| | 07:48 | will notice it's not just a few commands
that show up, it's every command on that menu.
| | 07:53 | That's something that
actually drove me quite coo-coo.
| | 07:56 | As in some of the other applications
when you click on File, for example,
| | 08:00 | you would only see three options and
there would be a delay until the rest
| | 08:03 | of the menu showed up.
| | 08:04 | So you could either wait for that delay
or you go down to the bottom and click a
| | 08:08 | dropdown button that showed just give
me the entire menu, and that's because,
| | 08:12 | Always full menus is now
selected here by default.
| | 08:15 | There are some other options like
large icons, if you find these difficult to
| | 08:19 | look at, clicking large icons makes a
lot easier to look at, but creates a lot
| | 08:24 | less space down below in your work area.
| | 08:27 | So I am going to turn mine off.
| | 08:30 | List font names in their font, so
when we are working with fonts, you would
| | 08:33 | actually see the font names
as you're working with them.
| | 08:36 | ScreenTips also show up
as we hover over buttons.
| | 08:39 | That's all stuff that is under the Options tab.
| | 08:43 | So under Commands, you can see here
there is all of our commands showing up
| | 08:47 | under the different menus.
| | 08:49 | We can grab buttons and put them up on existing
toolbars, create our own and put them in there.
| | 08:54 | And then the Toolbars tab, you can
see here is where we got all of our
| | 08:57 | toolbars, we can select which ones
are going to show from here as well and
| | 09:02 | which ones should not.
| | 09:03 | The menubar is considered one of these
toolbars and if we don't want the menubar
| | 09:08 | at all, we can come right here and you
will notice if I try to turn that off I
| | 09:13 | don't have the option.
| | 09:15 | So I click on Close and back to where I started.
| | 09:19 | So knowing what you know about toolbars
and how you create your own and edit the
| | 09:24 | existing ones, move them around, hide
them, show them, you should be able to set
| | 09:29 | up a User Interface that
suits you and how you work.
| | 09:32 | Once you have got it you just keep it,
keep it that way until you need to change
| | 09:36 | something, but at least you
know exactly how to do it now.
| | 09:40 | We are ready to actually open up a
diagram in the next lesson and view it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening and viewing Visio documents | 00:01 | It's time now to open our first diagram
in Visio and look at the different ways
| | 00:06 | we can view that diagram.
| | 00:07 | So with a blank screen here, we will go
up to one of three options, we can go to
| | 00:13 | the Open button up here on our standard toolbar.
| | 00:16 | We can go up to the File menu and you
will notice when we click File, Open
| | 00:20 | appears down here and the third
option is to use the keyboard and keyboard
| | 00:25 | shortcut for opening a diagram is Ctrl+O.
So since we have it here, we will just
| | 00:29 | click Open and what we will do next is
navigate to the Lesson1 folder of your
| | 00:35 | Exercise Files for Visio, and in here
you can see we have got four diagrams, we
| | 00:40 | are going to open up this
one here, BasicDiagram1a.
| | 00:43 | So we give that a click and then down
below you will notice we have an Open button.
| | 00:47 | Before you click Open, there is a
dropdown to the right of the word Open on this
| | 00:51 | button and when you click on it, you can
see we have the option which is to open
| | 00:55 | it, Open Original, Open
as Copy and Open Read-Only.
| | 01:01 | So these options are different
ways to open up your diagram.
| | 01:04 | Now Open and Open Original are very
similar, in that you are opening the
| | 01:08 | original version of this diagram.
| | 01:11 | Now if there is only one version
out but these two are the same.
| | 01:14 | If you start working with copies of
the diagram, in other words, you want to
| | 01:18 | keep the original and work on a copy so
that you can make changes and have two
| | 01:22 | versions then this would make a difference.
| | 01:24 | So Open Original and Open as Copy is
how we create a copy from an original.
| | 01:29 | So if I was to choose right now Open as
Copy, I get a copy of my BasicDiagram1a
| | 01:35 | and then I have to give it a new name
and once I have got that that would be a
| | 01:38 | copy of my original.
| | 01:41 | Open Read-Only means, I can
open it up and protect it from any
| | 01:44 | inadvertent change.
| | 01:46 | In other words, I want to view this
diagram and by clicking Open Read-Only, I
| | 01:50 | won't be able to make changes to it.
| | 01:53 | I could, if I wanted to create a new
diagram from it, in other words give it
| | 01:58 | some different name or save it in a different
location, but my original would be protected.
| | 02:03 | So those are your options, we are just
going to click Open right here and our
| | 02:07 | diagram opens up on our screen.
| | 02:09 | All right, so we are viewing the entire
page, in other words we can see all four
| | 02:15 | corners of the entire page including
what's on the page, our diagram and we have
| | 02:19 | got a little title up at the top.
| | 02:21 | You will also notice on the left-hand
side under the Shapes heading here, we
| | 02:25 | have got various groups of what looks
like shapes, but really what these are
| | 02:30 | called stencils and in each stencil we
have got down below a number of shapes.
| | 02:35 | In this case, in the background stencil,
we have got different backgrounds that
| | 02:38 | can be applied to our diagram.
| | 02:40 | You will see down below though we have
also got borders and titles and if we
| | 02:44 | click that, there are number of
borders and titles to choose from and you can
| | 02:49 | see there is a description right below
that we just need to simply drag this on
| | 02:52 | to the page to create this
new border if we wanted to.
| | 02:56 | Same thing goes, down here
we have got blocks raised.
| | 03:00 | Now these are shapes that are
specifically blocks and you can see that they are
| | 03:04 | 3-dimensional or raised and this is a
separate stencil containing many shapes.
| | 03:09 | Down at the bottom, we have got just
the regular blocks, you can see they are
| | 03:12 | not raised, so these are shapes that
are being used and now anything that we
| | 03:16 | have used in our actual document or our
diagram here such as the rectangle, the
| | 03:22 | arrows that you see, the circles etcetera.
| | 03:24 | They are collected on a separate
stencil called the document stencil, if I
| | 03:28 | click that you will see everything
that has been or is being used in this
| | 03:33 | particular diagram.
| | 03:36 | So all of these at one point have been
used and down below you can see there is
| | 03:41 | my connectors, you can see there is my
title block, there are circles, there is
| | 03:46 | the diamond that we see here in a box.
| | 03:49 | So we will talk more about stencils a
little bit later on, but when we open up a
| | 03:53 | diagram in Visio, we get all of the
various stencils that apply to this type of
| | 03:58 | diagram showing up as well
as the document stencils.
| | 04:01 | You also notice that we have got a
ruler across the top for measuring and down
| | 04:05 | the left for vertical measurements and
then down below here you can see we have
| | 04:09 | got some arrows to move from page to page.
| | 04:11 | I have only got one page and the background.
| | 04:14 | So I don't really have multiple pages in
this particular document, but if I did,
| | 04:18 | here is how I can navigate through those pages.
| | 04:21 | So left to right going through the pages.
| | 04:24 | Now on the status bar, I
actually have some information.
| | 04:26 | Down here in the bottom right
corner, I can see them on Page 1 of 1.
| | 04:31 | Now currently because I am viewing
the entire page, if we look up at the
| | 04:34 | standard toolbar, we have got a Zoom
dropdown and currently the figure that
| | 04:38 | shows up here is 50%.
| | 04:39 | 50% is what allows me to
see everything on the page.
| | 04:43 | But it's very difficult to
read what's inside those shapes.
| | 04:46 | So if I click this dropdown on the Zoom
button, I can then zoom into actual size
| | 04:52 | at 100% and I have got some
other presets to choose from as well.
| | 04:56 | I am going to go to 100%.
| | 04:58 | Now while I can zoom in and see what's
inside some of these shapes now, I can't
| | 05:02 | see the diagram in its entirety.
| | 05:05 | So in this case I would need to use
scrollbars which appear on the right to move
| | 05:08 | up and down and down at the
bottom to move left to right.
| | 05:16 | At any time, I can change the Zoom level,
of course I can do it from toolbar, I
| | 05:20 | could go up to the View menu as well,
and if I click on View, you can see we
| | 05:25 | have got way down here at the bottom a
Zoom option and right above it is Full
| | 05:30 | Screen and you can see that
F5 is the option for that.
| | 05:34 | So under Zoom, we have got all of those
presets, we have also got Zoom down here
| | 05:39 | at the bottom where we can open up the
dialog, where we can select those presets
| | 05:44 | or actually type in a
percentage that's maybe not on the list.
| | 05:47 | For example, may be 125% or maybe a
little less 85%, neither of those show up on
| | 05:54 | my list, so I can just type them in here.
| | 05:56 | I am going to type in 85 and click OK.
| | 05:58 | You can see, I have zoomed back a
little bit, at least now I can see the full
| | 06:03 | width, and I can just scroll up
and down to see the entire diagram.
| | 06:09 | Okay, so a couple of different ways to zoom.
| | 06:12 | Let's go back to the View menu now
for a second, we will click on View.
| | 06:15 | We will go down to Full Screen.
| | 06:18 | So when we are done working with the
diagram, we want to preview it, we can
| | 06:21 | click Full Screen and you can see
now everything disappears, I am just
| | 06:25 | looking at my diagram.
| | 06:27 | This gives me a nice little preview of
what the diagram looks like without all
| | 06:30 | of those surroundings.
| | 06:31 | Okay, so there it is, all we have to do
is hit Esc now on the keyboard to return
| | 06:36 | back to the previous view.
| | 06:39 | Also from the View menu, go back up
here, you can see all the things that do
| | 06:44 | show up like the rulers, the rulers
that we saw across the top and the bottom,
| | 06:49 | there is a grid that
allows us to move things around.
| | 06:52 | Now we see a background on our
particular diagram so the grid is not all that
| | 06:56 | visible right now, there are
guides and connection points.
| | 07:00 | So you can see all these
little points around the outside.
| | 07:02 | If we like to see those that's good, we
know exactly where things are connected
| | 07:06 | or if they are connected or not.
| | 07:08 | All of these may be turned on for you,
some may not, but by default they should
| | 07:12 | all be turned on, gives us an
opportunity to work with our diagram and see a lot
| | 07:17 | of information as we are doing it.
| | 07:18 | All right, also at the top, we have got
various windows that can be shown like
| | 07:26 | the Shapes window that we
see over here on the left.
| | 07:28 | Now that's a default when we
start working with such a diagram.
| | 07:31 | But there is also the Pan & Zoom Window
and if we click on that you will see by
| | 07:35 | default, it shows us over here on the
right-hand side and this is a great way
| | 07:39 | for us to move around our diagrams.
| | 07:41 | If I just drag this little red
bordered box on the Pan & Zoom Window, you can
| | 07:48 | see it's moving inside my diagram.
| | 07:51 | So I got a quick glimpse of a thumbnail of
the entire thing that I can move this around.
| | 07:55 | Now there is a slider here that
allows me to zoom in and out as well.
| | 07:59 | So as I move it up, you can see I am
zooming into my document, I can see less of
| | 08:04 | it over here, I can still see the entire
thing here and I can move my little box
| | 08:08 | to zoom to a specific location.
| | 08:12 | I can use the little buttons at
the bottom to zoom out and zoom in.
| | 08:17 | If I want this to stay there, you
can see there is little push pin, this
| | 08:21 | is called Auto Hide.
| | 08:22 | So right now the push pin is in, which
means as I move around my document, this
| | 08:26 | windows stays there.
| | 08:28 | But if I only want it to show up when
I need it, I can Auto Hide it, so keep
| | 08:32 | it there, but when I take out the push
pin by clicking on it, you can see now
| | 08:36 | when I click on my diagram, it just kind of
flips inside the title bar here called Pan & Zoom.
| | 08:42 | When I need it, I hover it, use it,
go back to my diagram, it hides itself.
| | 08:49 | Kind of a neat feature.
| | 08:50 | When I am done with it, I click the
Close button right here, so if we go back
| | 08:54 | to the View menu, we have got lots of
those, we have got Pan & Zoom, we have
| | 08:58 | got Shape Data Window.
| | 08:59 | So if your shapes and your diagram are
attached to actual data, then we might
| | 09:04 | want that window open, Size & Position
Window for sizing and positioning the
| | 09:09 | various shapes in our diagram,
if we need precision for example.
| | 09:13 | The Drawing Explorer Window, External
Data Window as well for link to data
| | 09:19 | outside of Visio for example Microsoft Excel.
| | 09:22 | So lots of options here on the
View menu for you to explore.
| | 09:26 | Mainly though, we need to understand
how to zoom in and out to see the entire
| | 09:30 | diagram, to zoom into specific areas
and you do have the Zoom option down here
| | 09:35 | as well as on your standard toolbar
right up here, right from this dropdown, I
| | 09:39 | am going to go down to Page, allows me
to see the entire page and that's where
| | 09:44 | we started when we opened up this diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching for files| 00:01 | In the previous lesson, we just went
ahead and opened up this diagram that you
| | 00:05 | can see here on my screen.
| | 00:06 | Don't worry, if you skipped to this
lesson, you haven't opened this diagram, no
| | 00:09 | problem, we are just going to look now
at another way to open the document or
| | 00:14 | diagram as it's sometimes called in
Visio and that's by searching for files and
| | 00:19 | there is a few different ways that you
can search through your files to find the
| | 00:23 | one you are looking for to open and it
all happens from the Open dialog box.
| | 00:27 | So we will go up to the Open button up
here on the standard toolbar or file and
| | 00:32 | open it's up to you, give it a click
and navigate to the Lesson1 folder of your
| | 00:37 | exercise Files for Visio.
| | 00:39 | Now, we have only got four diagrams in
here, but by the way we are looking at
| | 00:44 | them right now which is
the default view called List.
| | 00:47 | We are not getting a lot of information
about each of these besides their name.
| | 00:51 | You can see that they are
Visio diagrams from their icon.
| | 00:54 | But all we see now is their title
or the name of the actual diagram.
| | 01:00 | Well, there is some different views that
will help us find what we are looking for.
| | 01:03 | So if we go up here inside the Option
dialog box and click the Views dropdown,
| | 01:08 | you can see we have got options
like Small Icons, List, Details, Tiles.
| | 01:13 | Let's go down to Details
and we will start there.
| | 01:16 | As soon as we do, we have now got all
of our diagram names showing up like we
| | 01:21 | did before, but now we can also see
the dates that they were modified.
| | 01:25 | Over to the right now, you can see the
type and we have got more off here to the
| | 01:30 | right, but our dialog box isn't big enough.
| | 01:32 | So let's stretch it out, we will just
go to the border here on the right side,
| | 01:35 | when you see the double arrow, we will
click and drag it out and you can see
| | 01:39 | there are some more columns here and we
can actually separate these columns and
| | 01:42 | stretch them out to by going to the
borders, so that we know that we are seeing
| | 01:46 | all of the information in each column.
| | 01:48 | So right now, there is a little
arrow showing up at the top of Name here,
| | 01:52 | because we are looking at an
alphabetical listing of our diagrams by Name.
| | 01:56 | If we wanted them sorted by Date, we can
click on Date Modified and now you can see
| | 02:01 | the most recent down to the
oldest document down here.
| | 02:05 | We can change the order by clicking the
button again, so now I see a list of my
| | 02:11 | diagrams, but in the reverse order.
| | 02:13 | I can also sort them by Type.
| | 02:15 | They are all Microsoft Office Visio
drawings but I can also see their sizes here
| | 02:19 | and again, I can sort them by their
sizes either going up or going down in size.
| | 02:26 | Let's go back to Name, we will click
on Name and you will notice that each of
| | 02:29 | these also has a dropdown.
| | 02:30 | If we click the dropdown, you can
see that we can sort them, we can group
| | 02:34 | them, we can choose just to see
groups of our diagrams by, you can see
| | 02:41 | alphabetically by A-H, I-P.
| | 02:45 | We can stack them by name, all kinds
of different options here as well.
| | 02:48 | But again, this would work better if you
had tons and tons of files or documents
| | 02:53 | or diagrams in this folder.
| | 02:55 | Now, what if we needed to find one of
these that we know has our process in it
| | 03:01 | or something that wasn't
given away by the title.
| | 03:03 | We can actually get a little bit of a
thumbnail view of the diagram by changing
| | 03:08 | the view to something other than details.
| | 03:10 | So let's go back in here and
let's go to Small Icons to start.
| | 03:14 | Well, that doesn't really help us.
| | 03:15 | All we are seeing now our
little icons next to the name.
| | 03:19 | So we will go up here and we will change
it now to Medium icons, ah, look at that.
| | 03:23 | So the icons are changing to show us a little
bit of what's inside each of these diagrams.
| | 03:29 | Still very hard to see, but our basic
diagram that we have open already you can
| | 03:33 | see that's the diagram
itself showing up on the icon.
| | 03:37 | So let's change it now to large icons.
| | 03:40 | Now we can also use this scrollbar to
change the size, you can see in the dialog
| | 03:45 | box, the size changing in front of your eyes.
| | 03:48 | So that's large and this is somewhere
between large and extra large right here.
| | 03:52 | That gives me a good idea of what I am
looking at and if this was the process I
| | 03:57 | was looking for then I have actually
got a preview of it before I click on it
| | 04:01 | and click open to open it up.
| | 04:03 | Now one other way to search for some of
your files and again this would really
| | 04:08 | work better if you had many, many
files and many, many diagrams to search
| | 04:12 | through is to use the Search field up here.
| | 04:15 | So for example, if I want to see all of
my diagrams that start with P, I could
| | 04:19 | start typing in the letter P and see now
it is switched back to the Details view
| | 04:24 | here and I am going to keep typing, I
am going to type in R and look at that,
| | 04:28 | there is only one that
starts with Pr, it's my process1.
| | 04:33 | So if I was to click on that, I don't
even have to click on it, but change the
| | 04:36 | view to Large Icons.
| | 04:38 | You can see, I am only seeing that
one and sure enough that's the one I
| | 04:42 | want, again may be just to be sure I
can go to Extra Large Icon, oh yeah
| | 04:46 | that's the one I want.
| | 04:47 | I would click on it and make sure it's
selected and click Open to open it up.
| | 04:51 | So many ways to find what it is you are
looking for, of course you can navigate
| | 04:55 | through the folders, but once you get
to a folder that has many, many diagrams
| | 04:59 | in it either use your Search field up
here, I am going to take those out now to
| | 05:03 | see all of my diagrams and then
remember that you have got many views here that
| | 05:06 | will help you sort things out, get
organized inside the Open dialog box and even
| | 05:12 | get a little preview of
what's inside each of the diagrams.
| | 05:15 | I am going to click Cancel.
| | 05:17 | I am going to close anything that I have
open on my screen right now by clicking
| | 05:21 | this Close button up here
in the top right corner.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving Visio documents| 00:01 | All right just before we jump in to
creating your own diagrams in Visio.
| | 00:06 | You will need to understand a
little bit of saving your work.
| | 00:09 | Obviously when you start creating a
diagram, you are going to need to save that
| | 00:12 | work so that you can go back to it
to work on it so you can share it with
| | 00:17 | others, print it etcetera.
| | 00:19 | So if you don't want to lose your
work, you need to know how to save it.
| | 00:21 | But there is also the option of saving
it under different format, not everybody
| | 00:26 | has Visio installed on their computers.
| | 00:28 | So if you wanted to send a diagram to
someone who didn't have Visio, you want to
| | 00:32 | save it to a format that they
would be able to open it up.
| | 00:35 | So that's what we are going to
talk about here saving and saving as.
| | 00:38 | Of course we are going
to need something to save.
| | 00:41 | So let's go to our Open button up here
click Open and you will navigate to the
| | 00:47 | Lesson 1 folder of your exercise files here.
| | 00:50 | Now depending on if you followed along
with us in the previous lesson or not
| | 00:53 | your view maybe different.
| | 00:55 | Let's get all on the same page, we
will go to Views here click the drop down
| | 00:59 | and let's go to List.
| | 01:00 | I will click on List.
| | 01:02 | All right we will go back to our
BasicDiagram1a give that a click and click Open.
| | 01:07 | All right so we have got our BasicDiagram open.
| | 01:10 | Let's say we have been working on this
and we make a couple of changes like.
| | 01:14 | We change upto some colors or something.
| | 01:16 | I am going to click on this box right up
here and I am going to come up here and
| | 01:19 | change the border color.
| | 01:20 | I am going to change it to Black. Okay
so I click over here and I can see I have
| | 01:26 | got a darker border here.
| | 01:28 | Now I would want to save that change or
if I to close this up without saving and
| | 01:32 | I would lose that change and I
have to do it again the next time.
| | 01:35 | So the easiest way to save is just
to hit your Save button right here.
| | 01:38 | Notice that as I hover over that it
says in bracket Ctrl+S keyboard shortcut
| | 01:43 | is our other way to save this quickly Ctrl+S
on the keyboard is the shortcut for saving.
| | 01:48 | And when we save this way all we do
is we update our changes and continue
| | 01:52 | working on the diagram.
| | 01:53 | Now like I said earlier we may want to
share this with somebody who doesn't have
| | 01:58 | Visio, and in that case we
would want to use Save As.
| | 02:01 | Another scenario might be we want to
save it to a different location because
| | 02:04 | when we hit the Save button here, all
we are doing is updating our changes,
| | 02:09 | keeping the same name BasicDiagram1a and
it's staying in the same location where
| | 02:14 | we saved it the first time.
| | 02:15 | So if we want to change any of that
change the name, the location the format we
| | 02:20 | need Save As and we need to go
to the File menu to get there.
| | 02:23 | So we click File and we come down to Save As.
| | 02:26 | So we click Save As you can see we have
got the Save As dialog box, the current
| | 02:32 | name is BasicDiagram1a and if I is to
hit Save right now, it would ask me, do I
| | 02:36 | want to replace the old version with
the new and the answer would be Yes, but
| | 02:40 | here is where I can change it to for
example BasicDiagram1b and since I do that
| | 02:45 | I will have the second version of the diagram.
| | 02:49 | Down below you can see I
have got a Save As type as well.
| | 02:52 | So the Save as type is set to Drawing.
| | 02:54 | This is a Visio drawing and
if I click this drop down wow.
| | 02:57 | I have got all kinds of options here.
| | 02:59 | I could save this as stencil, a
template so I could use it over and over again.
| | 03:04 | An XML drawing or stencil or template.
| | 03:07 | There is Visio but older versions of Visio.
| | 03:10 | So, if I was giving this to someone who
doesn't have the latest version of Visio.
| | 03:14 | I could save it to old version like 2002
here and they would be able to open it.
| | 03:18 | You can see I can save it to a Vector
Graphic Scalable SVG, AutoCAD Drawings to
| | 03:25 | a web page if I want it to.
| | 03:27 | I can even save it as a graphic image.
| | 03:29 | So down here you can see we have got
enhanced metafiles we have got GIFs,
| | 03:33 | graphics interchange format you are
getting the full length version here of some
| | 03:37 | of the things you probably
heard before like GIFs and JPEG.
| | 03:40 | There is JPEG right down there.
| | 03:42 | Windows Bitmap is another graphic format.
| | 03:44 | So all kinds of choices to save this
to a different format if I wanted to, to
| | 03:49 | share it with someone else.
| | 03:51 | Or maybe I just want to save it as a
picture and know that no one is going to
| | 03:55 | be able to edit this.
| | 03:56 | It's going to be called BasicDiagram
1b with the .JPG on the end for JPEG.
| | 04:02 | The other option would be
to save it somewhere else.
| | 04:05 | Now by default we are still in the
Lesson 1 folder of our exercise files but
| | 04:09 | if I want to Save it somewhere else like
my desktop I could click Desktop right here.
| | 04:13 | Or to my Pictures folder I click right
here and I would save it in my Pictures
| | 04:19 | folder and of course if I want to save
it somewhere else totally different I can
| | 04:22 | click on More and I can go to
various Searches, go to the Public folder.
| | 04:27 | I can come down here.
| | 04:29 | I can go to Organize if I want to
and create a New Folder to Save it in.
| | 04:33 | I can come up here and move
through the various folders.
| | 04:36 | Right now I am in pictures.
| | 04:37 | I want to go back one I can click it
use the backarrow to go back to Pictures
| | 04:41 | where I was and this is where I am
going to save it then I am going to call it
| | 04:44 | something different
BasicDiagram1b, a new format, a JPEG format.
| | 04:48 | So I had lots to choose from and a
new location right here called Pictures.
| | 04:53 | So when I hit Save, the changes will be
made when I make a few selections from
| | 04:59 | my JPEG Output Options dialog.
| | 05:02 | I can take all of the defaults here,
but you can see there is a number of
| | 05:05 | defaults that can be changed
like Color Format, any Rotation.
| | 05:10 | The resolution for Screen, Print, or
Custom Resolution, if I wanted to.
| | 05:15 | Is the Size going to be suitable for
viewing on a Screen or to be printed out or
| | 05:20 | do I want something Custom here as well.
| | 05:22 | So selecting a radial button changes that.
| | 05:25 | Background color, you can
see is set to white by default.
| | 05:28 | I can flip it, once I have got all of
those selections made I click OK and I
| | 05:32 | have actually now saved my
diagram as a different format.
| | 05:36 | So I have got that picture down,
sitting in my Pictures folder.
| | 05:40 | So when I go up to File and Open or
to click the Open button and I go to
| | 05:44 | Pictures, you will notice I don't
see anything, why, it's looking for
| | 05:48 | Visio files right now.
| | 05:50 | I click on the drop down here and
you can see I have got lots of choices
| | 05:54 | including JPEG and I click there,
there is my BasicDiagram and I could bring
| | 05:59 | that into a drawing for example, if I wanted to.
| | 06:01 | So a drawing within a drawing.
| | 06:03 | I am going to hit Cancel and hopefully
that gives you good idea of now the
| | 06:07 | difference between Save and Save As,
first of all and when you would use Save As.
| | 06:12 | We use Save As here to Save it to a
different format to a different location
| | 06:16 | with a different name.
| | 06:17 | You may or may not need to adjust all
three of those options but Save As is the
| | 06:22 | way to go to change any one or all of them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating new drawings| 00:02 | All right, you should be feeling and
comfortable now in your Visio surroundings
| | 00:06 | fully acquainted now with the user
interface and it's time to start creating.
| | 00:11 | So what we are going to do is create
some new diagrams and new documents as they
| | 00:15 | are labeled, using a number of
different methods and the method you choose
| | 00:20 | depends on how much you want
done for you or how little.
| | 00:24 | So let's go up to the File menu up here
and we will click on File and you will
| | 00:29 | see that right at the top we have got New.
| | 00:32 | Now New has a sub-menu and over on the
right-hand side here you can see we have
| | 00:36 | got Getting Started we
talked about that earlier.
| | 00:38 | Getting Started is going to bring up
the screen with samples, with templates,
| | 00:44 | recently used templates,
recently used files even.
| | 00:47 | So we can create something new
based on something that already exists.
| | 00:52 | New Drawing is the same as clicking
the New button on the Toolbar or holding
| | 00:56 | down Control while you press the letter
N on the keyboard that's your shortcut
| | 01:00 | will give you a new blank
document with nothing, no help.
| | 01:05 | You are starting from scratch.
| | 01:07 | Same thing for New Drawing
but with Metric measurements.
| | 01:10 | You can create New Drawings from a Template.
| | 01:12 | Now you can use the wizard here
or you can actually select from the
| | 01:16 | different categories of templates
down below and you can see as I move from
| | 01:19 | category to category there is a
number of different templates showing up in
| | 01:24 | the sub menus next to them.
| | 01:27 | So there is a few ways to create
something new, but I am not going to choose
| | 01:31 | anything here, I am just going to click
in a blank space to close up the menu,
| | 01:34 | because there is a faster way.
| | 01:35 | We have got the New button.
| | 01:37 | Now I am not going to
click right on the New button.
| | 01:38 | I am going to click next to it here
because there is a drop down and look at
| | 01:41 | that, we can access Getting Started from there.
| | 01:44 | We can also access those various
categories of template by coming down here
| | 01:49 | and hovering over the category heading,
and if I wanted to for example do an
| | 01:54 | office floor plan I might come down
the Maps and Floor Plans and come down
| | 01:58 | here and find something for
example a Site Plan if I wanted to create
| | 02:02 | something using a template.
| | 02:04 | Now a template does give me a clean
slate to work with but it also provides me
| | 02:08 | with all of the stencils and the
shapes and connectors and all kinds of cool
| | 02:12 | things that I would use
when creating a Site Plan.
| | 02:15 | So let's look at these three options
including a new blank document and that's
| | 02:20 | where we are going to right now.
| | 02:22 | I am going to click the New button
which as I said is equivalent of hitting
| | 02:26 | Ctrl+N on the keyboard or
selecting new blank document using U.S.
| | 02:30 | measurement from the drop down.
| | 02:32 | So we give it a click, look at that
we have got a clean slate here nothing
| | 02:37 | on our actual workspace and if I look over
here to the left, I have got no help whatsoever.
| | 02:43 | I have got no shapes, I have got no
stencils nothing to choose from, but I do
| | 02:48 | have here under the Shapes heading, an
opportunity the Search for Shapes that I
| | 02:52 | might want to use and there is a drop down.
| | 02:54 | So I am really starting from scratch here.
| | 02:57 | So I am going to close this up without
saving anything, I haven't done anything
| | 03:01 | and I am going to go to my next
option which is using a template.
| | 03:05 | I am going to go up to my File menu
this time I will go down to New because I
| | 03:09 | can create a new diagram from any of
these templates that show up down here but
| | 03:13 | I can also go to New Drawing from
Template here and when I click that I am going
| | 03:18 | to get the dialog box that shows up
and you can see here is where I can go
| | 03:21 | browsing for my own Template.
| | 03:22 | Now, down below template is selected, so
anything that's getting listed here and
| | 03:28 | I don't see anything but
folders would templates for Visio.
| | 03:32 | So I am going to hit Cancel here and
instead I am going to go to the drop down
| | 03:38 | and I am going to go down to an
actual category for template like Business,
| | 03:42 | Engineering, Flowchart let's go down to
Maps and Floor Plans and you can see we
| | 03:48 | have got Directional Maps.
| | 03:49 | That's not what I am looking for, let's say I
wanted to create a an actual Floor Plan.
| | 03:53 | I am going to come down
here to Floor Plan US units.
| | 03:57 | Look at what happens when I click here,
again I go to slate a blank page to
| | 04:02 | work with, but it's very different over here
on the left, I have got all kinds of stencils.
| | 04:07 | Some of them filled with shapes
for examples under Walls, Shell and
| | 04:11 | Structure, you can see I have got
Rooms, different shaped room different
| | 04:15 | shape spaces and as I scroll down.
| | 04:17 | I have got Walls I am
going to see Doors in here.
| | 04:20 | All kinds of stuff to choose from and I simply
drag them on to my page over here on the right.
| | 04:25 | I have got Points of Interest, if I
wanted to, like You are here, Telephone,
| | 04:31 | Printers if I move up here now I have
got Electrical and Telecoms, Drawing
| | 04:37 | Tools, Dimensioning all kinds of
stuff because of the template I selected
| | 04:42 | which was a Floor Plan.
| | 04:43 | I am going to close this up.
| | 04:46 | Nothing to save there and I am going to look
at another option which is Getting Started.
| | 04:51 | So we know we can access
that from this New drop down.
| | 04:54 | We will click on Getting Started.
| | 04:55 | We covered this a little bit earlier.
| | 04:57 | We know that we have Samples but we can
also access all of those templates that
| | 05:01 | we just saw right from here.
| | 05:03 | The recently used templates, there
is our Floor Plan by the way could be
| | 05:07 | selected right from the screen or any of
the diagrams that we may have drawn already.
| | 05:12 | Now if you have nothing here is because
I haven't drawn anything yet but Visio
| | 05:16 | remembers when you draw things and they
get listed here under Recent Documents.
| | 05:21 | So I could create something new based
on a previous drawing, but even better is
| | 05:27 | those Samples, we talked about them a
little bit earlier when I choose a Sample.
| | 05:31 | I am actually going to
have data that goes with it.
| | 05:33 | So for example, if I choose process
improvement here I click on that I get a
| | 05:37 | brief description, U.S units.
| | 05:40 | I click on Open Diagram and I have
created a new drawing just like that.
| | 05:44 | Now obviously the drawing is
not going to be what I want.
| | 05:47 | You can see it's got our
make believe label up here.
| | 05:50 | I am going to have to change that.
| | 05:51 | I am probably going to have to change
some of this data down below, doesn't
| | 05:54 | really apply to my organization for example.
| | 05:58 | These numbers are probably way off, but
at least I have got something here to edit.
| | 06:02 | So I have got huge head start, I can
move these shapes around, delete stuff I
| | 06:06 | don't need add stuff that I do because
I have also got over here on the left,
| | 06:12 | all of those stencils and the shapes
that come with them ready to be brought
| | 06:15 | over into my drawing.
| | 06:17 | So a great way if you are new
to Visio, get yourself started.
| | 06:21 | So I am going to close that up and without
saving anything and return to my blank screen.
| | 06:27 | All right, so different ways
to create new drawings in Visio.
| | 06:31 | Next we are going to look at how
we can spice them up with themes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using themes| 00:01 | Before we get too deep into the
creation process and working with elaborate
| | 00:06 | diagrams, I want to talk to you about
Themes because once you have got a drawing
| | 00:10 | on your page and you want it to stand out.
| | 00:12 | So you want to add some
excitement to it for example.
| | 00:15 | You can use themes or you
can do things to yourself.
| | 00:18 | Now if you have got a 100 boxes on a page for
example that are all connected to one another.
| | 00:22 | If you wanted to change
the color of those boxes.
| | 00:25 | You could do each of them individually
or group them etcetera, do all of that
| | 00:29 | yourself or you can save a
lot of time using themes.
| | 00:32 | Themes allow you to do two
things add color schemes and effects.
| | 00:36 | So that's what we are going to do now.
| | 00:37 | We are going to get that out of the way
and then we start creating our drawings
| | 00:40 | and working with some of the
drawings that are provided here for you.
| | 00:43 | We can look at those themes a little bit
later on and see how quickly get really
| | 00:47 | change the look in the effect of our diagram.
| | 00:50 | So what we need to do first is just open
up a diagram, we will go up to the Open
| | 00:55 | box or Open button here, give it a
click and from the Open dialog box, we are
| | 01:00 | going to select
BasicDiagram1a right here and Open it up.
| | 01:05 | We have seen this before.
| | 01:06 | So it's very basic diagram, we have got
a flow here going with some arrows and
| | 01:10 | you can see that the colors that are
being used here are okay, but might
| | 01:15 | bother some people.
| | 01:16 | So what we are going to do now is apply a
theme to this we don't need to select any shapes.
| | 01:20 | We don't have to work with the
background or any particular shape or connector.
| | 01:25 | All we need to do is come up here to
the formatting Tool bar and click on Theme
| | 01:30 | and what that does is it opens up the
Task pane on the right hand side and you
| | 01:34 | can see that Theme-Colors
is selected by default.
| | 01:38 | So the first thing we will do is play
around with the color scheme and you can
| | 01:41 | see up here that None is an option but
right next to that is Monochrome and if I
| | 01:45 | click on that I am going to see the
end result, so I got a black and white
| | 01:49 | Monochrome theme going here and as I
click on these, you can see them change
| | 01:54 | right before your eyes,
until you see one that you like.
| | 01:57 | So if I come down here,
that's pretty good right there.
| | 02:01 | So all I have done as I have worked
with some of the built in color schemes.
| | 02:05 | You can see there is a quite few to choose from.
| | 02:07 | Now some of them have darker background,
so if we go to one of these for example.
| | 02:11 | You can see how it stands out it may
not be applicable to what you are wanting
| | 02:15 | to do but I kind of like this one
right here, it's called Foundry-Dark.
| | 02:18 | So I am going to leave that one selected as is.
| | 02:22 | Now you will notice that this diagram
when it was created has some shadows in
| | 02:25 | the background here and there are kind
of all set a little bit up and to the
| | 02:30 | left but we can also go over here to
Theme Effects, give that a click and you
| | 02:35 | can see that based on the color
schemes we have used we have got a number of
| | 02:38 | Effects to choose from now and
all of them keep the color schemes.
| | 02:42 | So some of them have boxes
that are rounded on the corners.
| | 02:45 | So if I click on that you can see what
happens to my boxes they get rounded.
| | 02:49 | I don't want to actually change
anything to do with the color scheme but I
| | 02:52 | do change the look.
| | 02:53 | Here is the one that's got a bit of
darker border around the right hand side and
| | 02:57 | as I scroll down some of them have shadows too.
| | 03:00 | I like this one down here, it's called
Oblique and if I click on it you can see
| | 03:04 | that the shadow actually goes back,
it's almost like a perspective.
| | 03:08 | So that's working with
Color Themes and Themes Effects.
| | 03:12 | Notice down at the bottom of this task
pane here that we can create New Theme
| | 03:16 | Effects, if we wanted too, but what's
really important is down here this little
| | 03:20 | check box any new shapes that I add now
this drawing will also take on a theme
| | 03:26 | that I have selected.
| | 03:27 | The colors and the effects,
only if that's selected.
| | 03:30 | Now, if you want to bring in shapes
that wouldn't be consistent with the theme
| | 03:34 | you have selected, if that was
something you really wanted to do, you could
| | 03:38 | deselect this check box by doing that.
| | 03:40 | Now any shapes that you work with
anything you create new does not take on the
| | 03:45 | theme that you have selected.
| | 03:46 | So we will leave that selected right there.
| | 03:48 | All right when we are done working
with the task pane working with the Themes
| | 03:52 | Effects and Theme Color we just close
it up here and you can see this diagram
| | 03:56 | looks a whole lot different.
| | 03:57 | Now, we do have some adjusting to do.
| | 03:59 | I can see I might have to
change the font size here.
| | 04:01 | So to fit properly, part of the
theme is the font and the font size.
| | 04:06 | So you have to watch out for those things.
| | 04:08 | You may have some editing to do or just
go back to a theme that works and allows
| | 04:13 | you to see all of your text and so on
fitting on the right box. So that's themes.
| | 04:17 | Now that we know about themes that we
can work with colors and affects as we go
| | 04:21 | forward now working with the stencils
and working with our drawings and working
| | 04:25 | with things like text and shapes and
so on, keep in the back of your mind you
| | 04:30 | have always got these themes that will
color coordinate things for you and allow
| | 04:34 | you to add some cool effects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Working with StencilsUsing the Stencil toolbar| 00:01 | This entire section is
going to be devoted to Stencils.
| | 00:04 | Now, I want you to get to think back to
your schooldays when you probably had a
| | 00:07 | pencil case or something and that
contained one of these stencils.
| | 00:10 | Probably, a piece of plastic with
various shapes cut out in the plastic so that
| | 00:14 | you could trace some on paper,
we called those stencils.
| | 00:17 | Well, now in Visio, when you are
working on drawings, you will have stencils at
| | 00:21 | your fingertips, loaded up with shapes
and all kinds of things that will help
| | 00:24 | you with your diagram.
| | 00:26 | So that could be arrows, that could be
shapes, that could be backgrounds, and so on.
| | 00:30 | Now depending on the type of diagram,
you are working on, various different
| | 00:33 | stencils will show up by default, but
you can create your own, you can edit
| | 00:38 | existing ones, and even open and
close stencils as you need them.
| | 00:42 | So I want to talk all about that stuff in
this section starting with the Stencil Toolbar.
| | 00:47 | Now you can see on my screen up here
underneath the Formatting Toolbar, I do
| | 00:51 | have the Stencil Toolbar showing up.
| | 00:53 | So if I right-click over here in am
empty space under a tool bar, you will see
| | 00:57 | that there is a check mark next to Stencil.
| | 00:59 | So if you don't have a check mark,
click on Stencil, and you will have it up on
| | 01:02 | your screen like I do right now.
| | 01:04 | Now, the Stencil Toolbar is not going
to make a lot of sense unless we open up
| | 01:07 | something, so let's go to the Open
button here and we will navigate to the
| | 01:12 | Lesson2 folder of your exercise files,
and we will start with this one here
| | 01:16 | OfficeLayout2, give that
one a click and click Open.
| | 01:20 | Now when this opens up, you will see
that it's a simple drawing, it's a layout
| | 01:24 | for what looks like a home office here,
and over on the left hand side, under
| | 01:28 | the Shapes heading here, you can
see I have got numerous stencils.
| | 01:32 | I have Cubicles, Office Accessories,
Equipment, Furniture, and I can scroll
| | 01:37 | through, right now Office Furniture
selected through a number of office
| | 01:41 | furniture shapes, that I
can drag onto my drawing.
| | 01:45 | So if I wanted to look at Office
Equipment, for example, I just give it a
| | 01:49 | click, look at that, furnitures moved
down to the bottom here along with Walls,
| | 01:53 | Doors, and Windows.
| | 01:54 | And now I can simply click and drag any
of these that I want to use in my drawing.
| | 01:58 | Now the Stencil Toolbar up here, has a
number of buttons and you can see the
| | 02:02 | last one is selected which is Icons and Details.
| | 02:06 | And this is just adjusting the
view that you see down below.
| | 02:09 | So I am seeing the icon of a
Telephone and the details next to it.
| | 02:13 | Now I can change that view by selecting
one of a number of other buttons here on
| | 02:17 | the Stencil Toolbar.
| | 02:19 | If I just want the names only, I can
click this button, so you can see, I
| | 02:22 | don't really have an icon that shows
me what it's going to look like, I have
| | 02:25 | got a Telephone, a PC Monitor but I can see
more, I don't need to scroll through the list.
| | 02:29 | Another option is to simply
show the icons without the text.
| | 02:34 | That's a little less helpful but you do
get an idea of what you are looking at
| | 02:38 | when you hover over any of these.
| | 02:40 | So there is a Tower PC, for
example, here is a Terminal.
| | 02:43 | Another option right here is Names Under Icons.
| | 02:46 | Just a different way to look at it
that's helpful, and then I have also
| | 02:50 | got Icons and Names.
| | 02:52 | So a little bit different than over
here where I have got Icons and Details, so
| | 02:56 | I get the icon, the name, and the
little bit of information, really the
| | 03:00 | information is not all that helpful,
just drag the shape on to the drawing page,
| | 03:04 | so I don't need to have this view.
| | 03:06 | Probably this is a good
one here, Icons and Names.
| | 03:09 | It allows me to see all of
them here in one little area.
| | 03:12 | Now the other two buttons on the
Stencil Toolbar over here are for creating New
| | 03:16 | Stencils, and over here to
Show The Document Stencil.
| | 03:20 | Now, the document stencil is a stencil
that's created as you do your drawing.
| | 03:25 | In other words, over here in my diagram,
my view is a desk, a stool, a chair,
| | 03:30 | there is a PC Monitor, there is
another kind of chair, and so on.
| | 03:34 | Each of these goes into what's called
the document stencil so if I wanted to
| | 03:37 | look at that document stencil, I could
just by coming up here and we will click
| | 03:42 | on Show Document Stencil and there is
everything I am using in my drawing, which
| | 03:47 | is really helpful because if I wanted
another chair, I have got easy access to
| | 03:51 | it, I don't have to go filtering
through each of these different stencils to
| | 03:54 | find the piece of furniture that I needed.
| | 03:56 | So right here, if it's a duplicate or
something that's already in my drawing.
| | 04:00 | So this also gives me an overview of
all of the different shapes and so on that
| | 04:04 | I have used in this diagram.
| | 04:05 | All right, so that covers the Stencil
Toolbar, we are going to look at creating
| | 04:10 | your own Stencil, next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a new stencil| 00:01 | At some point, when you get used to
working with Stencils you may realize that
| | 00:05 | it would be more efficient to work from
one stencil containing all of the shapes
| | 00:09 | etcetera, that you would
use most often in a project.
| | 00:13 | Here's an example or a scenario,
maybe I have got a business on the side
| | 00:16 | designing home offices for people.
| | 00:18 | So here you can see, I have got my
OfficeLayout2 opened up from the previous
| | 00:22 | lesson, you can go ahead and open that
from your exercise files if you want to
| | 00:25 | follow along and because I opened up
this office plan, I have got all of these
| | 00:29 | stencils showing up on the left hand
side, so Cubicles, Office Accessories,
| | 00:33 | Equipment, Furniture, etcetera.
| | 00:35 | Now if I am designing home offices, I am
not going to really need Cubicles, I am
| | 00:39 | going to need maybe a few Office
Accessories, some Equipment, not all Equipment,
| | 00:43 | some Office Furniture but not all again.
| | 00:46 | So it might be good and efficient for
me to have one stencil called Home Office
| | 00:50 | and borrow shapes from these various
stencils to put into that one and then I
| | 00:54 | have it at my fingertips whenever I need it.
| | 00:56 | So to create a new stencil is very
simple, I can go to the Stencil Toolbar, the
| | 01:00 | very first button up here on the
Stencil Toolbar is for creating a new stencil.
| | 01:05 | So as I hover over that you can see New Stencil.
| | 01:08 | Another way is to go up to the File
menu here, come down to Shapes and you can
| | 01:13 | see I have got next to My Shapes, all
of the different categories containing
| | 01:18 | stencils that go with those categories,
but down at the bottom you can see I
| | 01:22 | have got New Stencil.
| | 01:23 | And I create a New Stencil using US
units or Metric units, so I am going to
| | 01:27 | click on New Stencil (US units).
| | 01:29 | That's the same as clicking the New
Stencil button on the Stencil Toolbar.
| | 01:34 | Give that a click, and you can
see it's just numbered by default.
| | 01:37 | So it's called Stencil20.
| | 01:38 | That's because it hasn't been saved yet
and you can see it opens up, it's empty.
| | 01:42 | So let's say, I don't need any
cubicles but I do want to borrow some office
| | 01:46 | accessories from this stencil.
| | 01:48 | So to switch to this stencil, I just
click on the title and you can see I
| | 01:51 | have got some Office Accessories here like
Plants and Table Lamps and that kind of stuff.
| | 01:56 | So I do want to take a Small Plant, a
Large Plant, now to select a multiple
| | 02:00 | shapes, I hold down my Shift key, I
click on the Large Plant maybe I am going to
| | 02:05 | have a Round Waste Can and a Paper Tray.
| | 02:09 | So those are the four that
I want to borrow from there.
| | 02:11 | So now, all I do is click and drag and
you can see all four shapes are selected
| | 02:16 | down to Stencil20, I just wait here for
a second and it opens up and I release.
| | 02:20 | You see the plus sign next to my mouse player.
| | 02:22 | That means I am adding them.
| | 02:23 | I am not moving them from one to another.
| | 02:25 | I am adding them to this one
and it's a copy from the Office
| | 02:29 | Accessories stencil.
| | 02:30 | So now I go to Office Equipment and I
know for sure I want a Telephone, I will
| | 02:34 | hold down Shift, put in Tower PC, a
Scanner, PC Monitors, you got the idea, so I
| | 02:41 | have got these four selected.
| | 02:42 | Now I click and drag down to the
Stencil20 down here and I release to add copies
| | 02:48 | of those, so you have got the idea.
| | 02:50 | So once I have got my stencil created,
I will need to save the stencil and give
| | 02:54 | it a name and you can see there is
little Save button here, next to Stencil20,
| | 02:58 | and that only shows up
because it has not been saved yet.
| | 03:01 | So I click Save and I give it a name,
Stencil20 is highlighted right now but
| | 03:06 | I am going to give it a name and
then you can see it falls under the My
| | 03:08 | Shapes folder here.
| | 03:09 | I am going to called it Home Office and
when I click Save, I have now got a new
| | 03:16 | stencil called Home office, and you can
see that the save button is disappeared.
| | 03:20 | Now if I wanted to go over to Office
Furniture, for example, and pull in a
| | 03:25 | Desk and maybe a Swivel Tilt Chair and I
will hold down Shift and maybe a Stool as well.
| | 03:33 | So with those three selected, I am
going to drag it down to what's now called
| | 03:36 | Home Office and when I release, you
can see it gets added and the Save button
| | 03:40 | reappears because I have made changes
to this stencil, I want to save those
| | 03:44 | changes, I click the Save button and
it just saves up my changes keeping the
| | 03:48 | same name Home Office.
| | 03:50 | So that's all there is to
creating your own stencil.
| | 03:52 | Now Home Office is available to you
any time you need it, so you could be
| | 03:55 | working on an office plan, you could be
working on any project, any diagram, and
| | 04:00 | if you need the Home Office Stencil,
you will need to know how to open it and
| | 04:04 | that's what we are going to do next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening a stencil| 00:01 | So far working with stencils, we've looked at the stencils that
appear for us by default when we choose to create a certain
| | 00:07 | type to diagram for example of this office plan we created
earlier on shows up with the stencil full of shapes that relate
| | 00:14 | to office planning. We know how to create our own
stencil now from the last lesson where we created our home office
| | 00:21 | stencil, but let's say we create a new project and we want
to access stencils that don't show up by default for example.
| | 00:27 | How do we open them up? How do we
open up the ones we created earlier?
| | 00:31 | Well that's what we're going to do now. We're going to start by
closing up anything that might be on your screen.
| | 00:35 | So go ahead and close any diagrams that may be open, I'm
not going to save that, until you get to this blank screen.
| | 00:41 | Now we're going to create a new diagram, a new file by going
up to the New button here and give it a click and you can see
| | 00:47 | by default no shapes and no stencils show up here on the
left hand side. So in other words, Visio doesn't know what
| | 00:53 | we're about to create. So if we're about to create an office plan,
we might want to go and get our home office stencil that we
| | 00:59 | created in the last lesson.
| | 01:01 | Now you will of had to followed along in the last
lesson and created a home office stencil to do what I'm doing
| | 01:07 | here so you may want to go back and
do that if you like to follow along.
| | 01:10 | So I want to open up a stencil, I'm going to go up to
the File menu to do this, and I'm going to come down to shapes
| | 01:16 | and over on the right here you can see I've got the option
down below to open a stencil, so when I click open stencil I'm going
| | 01:23 | see the ones that I created. If I want to get one that
already exist in Visio, I wouldn't go to Open Stencil, I would just
| | 01:29 | select it from the list, but
there's my home office, so I give it a click
| | 01:33 | and I click open. So now I
got one stencil open here.
| | 01:37 | Let's do that again, but select one
that already exist, we go up to File,
| | 01:41 | we go down to Shapes,
| | 01:43 | and over to any of the stencils that we want, for example, under
maps and floor plans, we go to building plan, and maybe
| | 01:50 | we want the furniture one right here, so we click on it
and it's now opened up as well on the left-hand side.
| | 01:57 | So keep that in mind, if you need to access a stencil that
already exist, you just select it from a list from the File menu,
| | 02:03 | if you want to open one up that you've created, it won't appear on
the list, you need to choose Open Stencil, find it, and open it up.
| | 02:10 | So that's all there is now to opening up a stencil, what happens
when you want to make changes to a stencil and you need to
| | 02:16 | edit it and of course save
those changes, we'll do that next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing and saving a stencil| 00:01 | In the last few lessons, you've got
comfortable working with stencils, in other
| | 00:04 | words, the existing stencils that you
have at your fingertips when you choose
| | 00:08 | to create a drawing.
| | 00:09 | We now know how to create our own
stencils, and even open up stencils that don't
| | 00:13 | appear automatically for us.
| | 00:15 | Well, what happens if you need
to make changes to a Stencil?
| | 00:19 | In other words, let's say we want to
take our Home Office Stencil here that we
| | 00:22 | created, and maybe add a couple more
shapes to it, and even remove shapes from
| | 00:26 | the existing stencil, we need
to be able to edit the stencil.
| | 00:30 | Now if you skip to this lesson, and
you haven't created your own stencil yet,
| | 00:33 | you might want to go back a couple of
lessons and create your own stencil, and
| | 00:37 | once you've got your own stencil,
you need to know how to open it up.
| | 00:39 | That's from the File menu.
| | 00:41 | Just to recap, we click File, come down
to Shapes, Open Stencil, right from the
| | 00:46 | My Shapes folder, you will see your
Home Office and you will open that up to
| | 00:51 | have what I have on my screen.
| | 00:53 | So let's say I want to remove a shape.
| | 00:54 | I don't use this Stool shape here at
all when I am working with Home Office's.
| | 00:59 | So I should be able to just click on it
here, with it selected hit my Delete key
| | 01:03 | on the keyboard, right?
| | 01:05 | Wrong, I can hit Delete all I want,
but I am not going to remove that shape
| | 01:09 | unless I am editing the stencil.
| | 01:11 | So what we actually need to do is go
up to the Title Bar, where it says Home
| | 01:14 | Office, right-click and choose Edit Stencil.
| | 01:18 | All right, now that we are in Edit Mode,
if I was to click on Stool, I can hit
| | 01:23 | the Delete key on my keyboard to remove it.
| | 01:26 | Notice as soon as I did that, the
Save icon showed up over here to the
| | 01:30 | right-hand side next to Home Office.
| | 01:32 | So I need to save my changes.
| | 01:33 | I am going to do that right
now by clicking the Save button.
| | 01:36 | Next I would like to add some.
| | 01:38 | So I can go and open up some other stencils.
| | 01:40 | I am going to do that, I am going to go
up to File here, I am going to come down
| | 01:43 | to Shapes, and I am going to go to an
existing one here under Maps and Floor
| | 01:47 | Plans, go to Building Plan, and I am
going to go to Cabinets here (US units).
| | 01:53 | Okay, because I do want to be able to
add some cabinets to my Home Office.
| | 01:57 | So let's say I wanted to add a Base corner.
| | 02:01 | I am going to click on it, I am going
to hold down Ctrl and just select Base
| | 02:04 | 1 and 2, actually Shift, sorry -- while I
select Base 1 and 2 so all three are highlighted.
| | 02:10 | I am going to drag them up to Home
Office, when Home Office opens up I am going
| | 02:13 | to release, and there we go.
| | 02:16 | Again the Save icon shows up, so
I need to save what I have done.
| | 02:20 | I am going to hit Save to save my Stencil.
| | 02:22 | And now I am still in Edit Mode.
| | 02:23 | That's important to know.
| | 02:24 | So I could come in here, and let's say,
Base 2 is something I am not going to use.
| | 02:28 | I could delete that by hitting
the Delete key on my keyboard.
| | 02:31 | I am going to save that change as well.
| | 02:33 | Now if I don't want to accidentally
delete anything, I have to exit Edit Mode.
| | 02:38 | So I am going to go back up to
the Title Bar here right-click.
| | 02:40 | Edit Stencil is still selected.
| | 02:42 | That's why we see the little star here.
| | 02:44 | I am going to click on Edit
Stencil and I am no longer in Edit Mode.
| | 02:47 | So you can see my Home Office icon no
longer has that little star on it to
| | 02:51 | indicate that I am safe.
| | 02:52 | If I came up here and hit Delete on my
keyboard by accident, nothing is going to happen.
| | 02:57 | I don't delete any of my shapes.
| | 02:59 | So that's how we either open up and
edit, or edit an existing stencil.
| | 03:04 | We have to go into Edit Mode first.
| | 03:06 | We can add and remove shapes, all we want.
| | 03:08 | It's important that you save,
and then exit Edit Mode at the end.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Closing a stencil| 00:01 | The last topic we need to discuss when
it comes to working with stencils is what
| | 00:05 | to do when we no longer need
the stencil open up on our screen.
| | 00:09 | A few lessons ago, for example, we
created our own stencil called Home Office,
| | 00:13 | and then we opened up a couple of
other stencils and borrowed shapes.
| | 00:15 | For example, the Furniture Stencil and
the Cabinets Stencil had some shapes we
| | 00:20 | wanted to add to our Home Office, so
we edited the Home Office Stencil, added
| | 00:24 | those shapes, and now really we don't
need to have the Furniture and the Cabinet
| | 00:29 | Stencils open anymore.
| | 00:30 | How do we close them?
| | 00:31 | Well, if you are jumping to this lesson,
you will probably need to open up a
| | 00:34 | stencil, so you can close it.
| | 00:35 | All I need to do is go up to the File
menu up here, click File, come down to
| | 00:39 | Shapes and go down to Maps and Floor
Plans, Building Plan, here's one that we
| | 00:44 | have open called Furniture.
| | 00:45 | You can give that a click to open it up.
| | 00:48 | Now with the Stencil opened here on
the left-hand side, we click on its Title
| | 00:51 | Bar, and clicking right on Furniture
to display its contents, and this is
| | 00:56 | definitely a stencil I no longer need
opened, because I have taken all the
| | 00:59 | shapes I want, and put them
into my own called Home Office.
| | 01:02 | So all I need to do is come up to the
Title Bar here where it says Furniture,
| | 01:06 | right-click, look at that, very easy.
| | 01:08 | I click Close to close up that stencil.
| | 01:11 | That automatically displays the
contents of the stencil that appeared below
| | 01:15 | it called Cabinets.
| | 01:16 | I am going to do the same thing here,
I am going to go up to Cabinets, I am
| | 01:19 | going to right-click and
select Close, there we go.
| | 01:23 | All I am left with is my own custom
stencil that I created a couple of lessons
| | 01:27 | ago called Home Office.
| | 01:29 | I have got all of the shapes that I
need, borrowed from these various other
| | 01:32 | stencils, so they are showing up here.
| | 01:34 | I don't need those other stencils opened.
| | 01:36 | Now you know how to close them up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Working with ShapesAdding and editing shapes on the drawing page| 00:01 | All right, it's time to start creating
our drawings by pulling shapes out of the
| | 00:04 | stencils and onto the drawing page.
| | 00:06 | And really, that's all there is to
adding shapes to the drawing page,
| | 00:11 | clicking-and-dragging them.
| | 00:12 | So you have to have the right stencils
open to select the shapes, click-and-drag
| | 00:16 | them onto the page, and then, we will
look at manipulating those shapes, so we
| | 00:19 | can rearrange them, size them,
rotate them, etcetera, so it looks right.
| | 00:24 | So what we are going to do is just
together go up to this New button drop-down
| | 00:27 | right up here, give it a click, and we
will go down the Maps and Floor Plans,
| | 00:31 | let's do an Office Layout.
| | 00:32 | So come down here to Office Layout,
and we will choose US units as well.
| | 00:36 | Now depending on the actual template we
choose, for example, in this case, the
| | 00:41 | Office Layout, you can see the ruler
is going to change up here, because we
| | 00:45 | chose US units to about 22 feet here.
| | 00:47 | Up and down you can see
we have got almost 18 feet.
| | 00:50 | So 17-- actually 17x22 feet.
| | 00:55 | So that's the default size of our drawing page.
| | 00:57 | We can manipulate all of that,
but we will talk about that later.
| | 01:00 | Right now, we want to concentrate on
getting shapes over onto the drawing page.
| | 01:04 | Now because we chose Office Layout,
these are the stencils we get, Cubicles,
| | 01:08 | Office Accessories, Equipment,
Furniture and then, the one that's open is
| | 01:11 | Walls, Doors, and Windows.
| | 01:13 | So let's choose "T" Room right here.
| | 01:15 | I am going to click, hold my mouse button down,
drag it on to the drawing page and release.
| | 01:20 | When I release, I get the default, and
you can see its 10 feet across, 5 feet, 3
| | 01:25 | feet, 3 feet, 4, and so on.
| | 01:27 | Now I have also got a number of sizing
handles all the way around the outside of this.
| | 01:31 | When I touch a sizing handle with my mouse you
can see I get the diagonal double arrow here.
| | 01:36 | When I come midway across the bottom,
I get a double arrow vertically.
| | 01:40 | There is a diagonal there.
| | 01:42 | On the left and right sides I get
double arrows, but they are horizontal, and
| | 01:46 | this is for resizing my shape.
| | 01:47 | So if I want to drag it across, and
let's say it's a 12 feet room, I will drag
| | 01:51 | it across until I see 12 feet.
| | 01:53 | When I see 12 feet up here, but I
also see it down here on my Status Bar.
| | 01:57 | So pay attention down here to your widths,
and your heights, and even your angles.
| | 02:01 | All right, let's change our height now.
| | 02:04 | Now by default, the total is 8,
so we've got 5 here plus 3 here.
| | 02:08 | I am going to click-and-drag with the double
arrow here until I get down to 12 feet as well.
| | 02:13 | Go all the way down to 12 and release. Great!
| | 02:17 | Now that may not be the exact shape
that I want, so you will notice that I have
| | 02:21 | also got these diamonds, these
yellow diamonds midway through the various
| | 02:25 | points on the wall, and this is for reshaping,
so not necessarily resizing, but reshaping.
| | 02:31 | So let's say I come into my room from
here, I am going to be putting a door
| | 02:35 | right in here later.
| | 02:36 | I am going to just move this over a
little bit, and when I get the four-sided
| | 02:39 | arrow, you can see I am able to reshape.
| | 02:42 | And if I want it to, I could widen this
here, just by clicking-and-dragging it,
| | 02:47 | and I am going to drag this up, so it's
leveled with the other size. So there we go.
| | 02:52 | It's kind of like two
little rooms within a room.
| | 02:55 | Now it's just a matter of
adding doors, and windows, and so on.
| | 02:59 | And you can see over here under Walls,
Doors and Windows, I have got all of
| | 03:02 | those to choose from.
| | 03:03 | So I am going to add a Door, I am going
to go over and grab this one, it's not a
| | 03:06 | double door, it's just a single.
| | 03:08 | And I bring it over here, and I am
going to have it swing open, like so.
| | 03:13 | Okay, so automatically, you can
see these little red connectors.
| | 03:17 | It connects to the wall, creates an
opening, and you can see the size of the
| | 03:21 | door here, and the angle that it's opened to.
| | 03:23 | It's a 2 feet 6 inch door.
| | 03:25 | Now of course, I can adjust those, and I
can even adjust this little angle here,
| | 03:29 | so I want to leave my door partially open.
| | 03:31 | So you can play around
with the sizing handles there.
| | 03:34 | Now we are going to start adding some furniture.
| | 03:37 | So we change to our Office
Furniture Stencil by clicking it.
| | 03:40 | You can see we have got lots to choose from.
| | 03:42 | So I am going to put in -- I
am going to start with a desk.
| | 03:45 | Now as I go through all of these, you
can see I have got seats, I have got
| | 03:48 | chairs, I have got some file cabinets,
here's some more surfaces right here, and
| | 03:53 | then, I have got some tables as well.
| | 03:55 | There is a desk right up here, so I am
going to just click-and-drag the desk in.
| | 03:59 | I am going to put it right
there, but I need to rotate that.
| | 04:03 | So there is one more handle you need
to know about, and it's outside of the
| | 04:06 | sizing handles here.
| | 04:08 | Right up here is our Rotate handle
and you can see I use this to rotate the
| | 04:12 | shape, and it's going to rotate on the
axis right here which is in the middle,
| | 04:16 | but I can move that if I want it to,
just by clicking-and-dragging it.
| | 04:19 | So right now, if I used to rotate
this, it would rotate on that point.
| | 04:23 | Good, right there is perfect.
| | 04:27 | Now I just need to move this desk.
| | 04:29 | I want to move it back here a little bit.
| | 04:31 | So all I need to do is avoid those
sizing handles, and go anywhere on the border.
| | 04:35 | When I see the four-sided arrow, I
can click-and-drag this to move it.
| | 04:40 | That might be right where I
want it there, so I let go.
| | 04:43 | And you can see because of the grid
lines on my drawing page here, there is a
| | 04:47 | little bit of snap action.
| | 04:48 | So as I drag it, you can see how it kind of
snaps half way through each of those squares.
| | 04:54 | So this helps me when it comes to
aligning shapes, and we will spend a whole
| | 04:57 | lesson on aligning our shapes and
ordering them and getting them to line up
| | 05:01 | perfectly a little bit later on.
| | 05:03 | All right, so let's add a little bit
more, let's add a desk chair, so come down
| | 05:07 | here, click-and-drag, obviously that
chair is facing the wrong direction, we go
| | 05:12 | to its rotate handle here.
| | 05:14 | We'll just rotate it around,
so we've got it where we want.
| | 05:17 | When we see the four-sided arrow we know
we can move, I am just going to move it.
| | 05:21 | And I am going to move it right in here.
| | 05:23 | Now you can see right now it
looks like it's on top of the desk.
| | 05:27 | So we would actually want
the desk on top of the chair.
| | 05:30 | If the chair is sliding underneath it,
we are going to talk about that too a
| | 05:33 | little bit later on when we start
ordering and layering our shapes.
| | 05:38 | So that's all there is to
getting shapes onto the drawing page.
| | 05:41 | We are going to go into greater detail
working with our shapes as we move on
| | 05:45 | through the lessons in this section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding text to a shape| 00:01 | In the last lesson we learned about
adding shapes to the drawing page, and
| | 00:05 | that's why you see what you see right
here, we have got our office walls, we
| | 00:09 | have a door that we added, and then
we added a desk and a chair so far.
| | 00:13 | Now if you are skipping to this lesson
and you want to get it all caught up with
| | 00:15 | us, no problem, just go up to your Open
button here and navigate to the Lesson
| | 00:20 | 03 folder of your Exercise Files, there
you will find OfficePlan3b, we can give
| | 00:25 | it a click and click Open
and you will be all caught up.
| | 00:28 | All right, now we are going to talk
about labeling or adding text to a shape,
| | 00:32 | and to do that, it's very simple.
| | 00:34 | But just before we do that, I would like to
add a couple of more shapes to our office.
| | 00:37 | For example, we have got our desk
and our chair, let's add a bookshelf.
| | 00:40 | So come over here and make sure that
the Office Furniture Stencil is selected.
| | 00:44 | You will see bookshelf right here.
| | 00:46 | We'll click-and-drag and we'll bring
it over into this area of the office.
| | 00:49 | And I am going to rotate it now.
| | 00:51 | This is all review from the last lesson.
| | 00:53 | I am going to size it, a little bit
bigger, and I am going to move it right
| | 00:58 | down here, excellent!
| | 01:01 | Now I am going to have a little sitting
area here where I can sit and read some
| | 01:04 | of the books from that bookshelf.
| | 01:05 | So I am going to add a couple of chairs.
| | 01:07 | I am going to go over here to take in
a -- how about this one here, a side
| | 01:11 | chair without arms.
| | 01:14 | Click, drag, and we'll rotate that
just on an angle, maybe move it back
| | 01:21 | slightly, good, and we are going to add
another one of these, but I am going to duplicate it.
| | 01:25 | So with it already selected, hold down
Ctrl, press the letter D as in Duplicate
| | 01:30 | and you've got a duplicate.
| | 01:32 | I am just going to rotate that both, so it's
kind of kitty corner, moving into position.
| | 01:37 | Let's move it back against the wall
so there is room to get through, great!
| | 01:42 | So now we have got a couple of
more pieces of furniture in there.
| | 01:45 | I am going to go up to Office Equipment now,
and add a couple of pieces of equipment.
| | 01:50 | For example, we might want a computer.
| | 01:53 | So I am going to go to the Tower PC
right here, I am going to click-and-drag it
| | 01:56 | in, and I am going to rotate it, good.
| | 01:59 | I will have it right against the desk
here, and maybe we should put in a monitor
| | 02:05 | as well, so I am going to drag the PC
monitor on to the desk and I am going to
| | 02:10 | rotate it too, just like so.
| | 02:15 | Okay, so there is the makings -- the
beginnings at least of our home office.
| | 02:21 | So now to label some of these things,
to add text to them, it's really simple.
| | 02:25 | We just click on the object or the shape
that we want to add text to, and start typing.
| | 02:30 | So this is our bookshelf, I am going
to type Bookshelf, it's now labeled.
| | 02:35 | How about our desk?
| | 02:37 | Click on it, type the word Desk,
goes right inside, perfect!
| | 02:42 | Depending on the shape, you will see
that the text shows up in different places.
| | 02:46 | We already know what the others are.
| | 02:47 | This is going to be our PC.
| | 02:48 | I am going to type PC right there.
| | 02:51 | No room for it on the inside, so it
goes off to the left, and notice how it
| | 02:54 | rotates accordingly.
| | 02:57 | So that looks great.
| | 02:58 | Now we have added some text to our
various shapes, and if we want to edit that
| | 03:02 | text, it's just a matter of double-clicking it.
| | 03:05 | So here we have got Desk, I double-click
on Desk, it zooms me in so I can
| | 03:08 | see what I am typing.
| | 03:09 | I am not going to remove the word Desk,
but I am going to type-in Main Desk
| | 03:14 | because I may add another.
| | 03:16 | And I will just de-select by clicking
outside of the text, outside of the shape,
| | 03:20 | and you can see I zoomed back
out so I can see the whole picture.
| | 03:24 | So not much to adding text
to a shape or to a diagram.
| | 03:29 | Next, we are going to move on to
creating our own shapes by merging
| | 03:33 | multiple shapes into one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Merging shapes to create new shapes | 00:01 | So far as we have been working with
diagrams in Visio such as this office plan
| | 00:06 | from the previous lesson, we have been
using the shapes that come with Visio in
| | 00:10 | the various stencils.
| | 00:11 | Now when we choose a template like an
office plan, certain stencils open up
| | 00:15 | for us, like these ones here,
Cubicles, Office Accessories, Equipment,
| | 00:19 | Furniture, even Walls, Doors and Windows.
| | 00:22 | Now inside these
stencils we have various shapes.
| | 00:25 | Now we cannot remove
these shapes from the stencil.
| | 00:28 | We cannot add our own shapes to these stencils;
| | 00:30 | we cannot edit them at all.
| | 00:32 | For example, if I right-click here
on Office Furniture, you can see Edit
| | 00:35 | Stencil is not an option.
| | 00:37 | But earlier we learned how to create our
own stencils, your own custom stencils,
| | 00:42 | and there is also one that you
can edit and it's called Favorites.
| | 00:45 | So if we wanted to create our own shape, we
would have to add it to one of those stencils.
| | 00:50 | Now here's a scenario.
| | 00:51 | Let's say we create a certain
workstation for an office plan that we are going
| | 00:55 | to want to use over and over and over.
| | 00:57 | It's a standard workstation and we have
got a hundred cubicles on our floor plan
| | 01:01 | and each of them is going to
have that same workstation.
| | 01:03 | Well, we wouldn't want to
have to build it each time.
| | 01:05 | For example, a desk, a chair,
a PC monitoring, a keyboard.
| | 01:09 | So what we would do is create all of
those and save them as a shape, but to save
| | 01:13 | them as a shape we have to put them into
one of those stencils that we can edit.
| | 01:17 | So here's what I'd like you to do.
| | 01:18 | First of all, let's go up to the Open
button and from your Lesson3 folder of
| | 01:23 | your Exercise Files, we are going to
go in here and open up OfficePlan3c.
| | 01:26 | So give that one a click and click Open.
| | 01:30 | All right, so here's an empty office.
| | 01:33 | Now let's say there is a standard
workstation that we want to build here, and
| | 01:37 | from the Office Furniture Stencil we
are going to grab a corner surface.
| | 01:41 | We will drag it in over here.
| | 01:42 | Just to get right in there
we'll grab a chair as well.
| | 01:46 | So I am going to grab this chair,
and I am going to rotate it.
| | 01:50 | The specific chair that we use in our
organization, just move it nice and close to the desk.
| | 01:55 | Now I want to grab some office
equipments so I am going to click the
| | 01:58 | Office Equipment Stencil.
| | 01:59 | I am going to start with the Keyboard.
| | 02:00 | I am going to pop it right down in here,
rotate it and just move it into position.
| | 02:08 | And then I also want a PC
monitor so I am going to grab that too.
| | 02:11 | I am going to rotate it and
move it into position as well.
| | 02:16 | Okay, so there is our standard workstation.
| | 02:18 | Now we want to create a shape out of
this, so we can just pull the entire
| | 02:21 | workstation into future plans.
| | 02:24 | Well, all we need to do is open up
one of those stencils that we can edit.
| | 02:28 | So we will go up to the File menu
here and we will go down to Shapes.
| | 02:32 | Now earlier on we created our own
stencil called -- and if we click Open
| | 02:37 | Stencil, Home Office.
| | 02:39 | But you will notice that
Favorites is also an option.
| | 02:41 | I am going to choose Home Office
here, the one I created earlier.
| | 02:44 | Now if you don't have it you will need to go
back to that lesson to create your own stencil.
| | 02:49 | I am going to click Open to open it up
and there are some of the shapes that I
| | 02:54 | borrowed from other stencils and
put into my Home Office Stencil.
| | 02:58 | Well, now I want to create
a shape out of all of this.
| | 03:00 | So I am going to select everything.
| | 03:02 | Now I can hold down -- as I click on
these on my keyboard, hold down the Ctrl key.
| | 03:07 | But another option is just to marquee-select.
| | 03:10 | So I want this whole area selected.
| | 03:12 | I just click-and-drag my mouse until I
have enveloped all of those shapes and
| | 03:16 | release and you can see
they are all selected now.
| | 03:19 | And it's really simple to create a new
symbol or a new shape out of this, is
| | 03:23 | just to click-and-drag it
over into my Home Office.
| | 03:26 | Now before I do that I am
going to come back here.
| | 03:30 | I want to make sure I am editing my stencil.
| | 03:32 | So I am going to go up to Home Office, I am
going to right-click and I can edit this stencil.
| | 03:37 | I click Edit Stencil, and if I
wanted to I could right-click and I could
| | 03:40 | create a New Master.
| | 03:42 | Now you have to understand that Master
is what we call these shapes here because
| | 03:46 | as we drag them into our drawings, the
Master remains in the stencil and we just
| | 03:52 | take a copy or what we call
an instance of that Master.
| | 03:55 | So what we are doing here is not just
creating a shape or creating a Master
| | 03:59 | that's going to appear in the stencil.
| | 04:01 | So it has to be in Edit Mode, we
have to a see that little star up there.
| | 04:04 | With everything selected I click-and-
drag and when I get over here I am going to
| | 04:08 | release, but I don't want to remove it
from my drawing, I want to actually copy
| | 04:12 | it over to the stencil.
| | 04:13 | So hold down your Ctrl key before you
let go of the mouse, and you can see it's
| | 04:18 | automatically named Master and
then you see a number next to it.
| | 04:21 | The actual shapes stay over here in my
drawing, but I am going to click over
| | 04:25 | here where it says Master.
| | 04:27 | That gets me in so I can edit
the label and I am going to call it
| | 04:30 | WorkStation, just like so.
| | 04:34 | I will click outside of it and I now
got a new shape called WorkStation.
| | 04:38 | So that means if I wanted to add
another one to my drawing I could just by
| | 04:41 | clicking, dragging, and
now it's one single shape.
| | 04:45 | In other words, I can rotate the whole
thing so it fits nicely in this corner
| | 04:50 | over here, just like that.
| | 04:53 | So keep in mind that you can create your
own shapes, but to do that they need to
| | 04:58 | be added as masters to an
actual stencil that can be edited.
| | 05:03 | So one you've created a custom stencil like
we did here for Home Office or your Favorites.
| | 05:08 | Now once you've done that
you've made changes to the stencil.
| | 05:11 | You need to save those changes.
| | 05:12 | There is our Save icon, I give
it a click, I save my changes.
| | 05:16 | Now to get out of Edit Mode I can
right-click, choose Edit Stencil.
| | 05:20 | You see the little star disappears,
I am no longer editing the stencil.
| | 05:24 | And I can just grab as many of
these workstations as I need.
| | 05:27 | So that's going to save me
a lot of time down the road.
| | 05:32 | So that's all there is to creating
your own shapes and taking multiple shapes
| | 05:37 | and merging them into one
shape and adding them to a stencil.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Ordering shapes| 00:01 | Continuing on our theme now, of have
working with shapes there is a whole lot
| | 00:05 | more that we can do, and we are
going to dig a little bit deeper.
| | 00:08 | Beginning with ordering, when we
have shapes that overlap one another.
| | 00:12 | So we have added multiple shapes for
example to a drawing and we want them to
| | 00:16 | kind of overlap each other.
| | 00:17 | It's important that we either drag
them on to the drawing page in the right
| | 00:21 | order, or if we don't then we
know how to reorder them later.
| | 00:25 | So there is a Toolbar that's going to
help us with reordering and then a whole
| | 00:29 | bunch of other things like aligning,
flipping, formatting, and so on.
| | 00:34 | So what we are going to do is
open up a diagram first of all.
| | 00:37 | We'll go to the Open button up here,
give it a click, navigate to your Lesson3
| | 00:42 | folder of your Exercise Files because
OfficePlan3d is the one we want to click
| | 00:47 | before we click the Open button.
| | 00:48 | So here is our good old Home Office plan
and we created this earlier and you can
| | 00:52 | see we've got the desk here
and its labeled Main Desk.
| | 00:56 | But the chair seems to overlap the desk
when really the desk should overlap the chair.
| | 01:01 | Now there is a whole menu for shapes
and we can go up to the Shape menu and see
| | 01:05 | that we have got Grouping options,
Ordering options, there is Rotate and Flip,
| | 01:10 | and a whole bunch of other things.
| | 01:12 | Now another shortcut though that I
want you to know about is something called
| | 01:15 | the Action Toolbar, and we can open
that up just by coming up to our toolbars
| | 01:19 | area here, making sure we are not
overlapping any one of the toolbars when we
| | 01:23 | right-click and turn on the Action Toolbar.
| | 01:26 | So that shows up over here and you can
see as I hover these buttons I've got my
| | 01:30 | align options, distribute, there is
connecting, laying out shapes, I've got
| | 01:35 | flipping and rotating options.
| | 01:37 | Then I've got over here Bring to Front
and Sent to Back, and you can see they've
| | 01:41 | got shortcuts for using the keyboard as well.
| | 01:44 | I have got some grouping options too, and
all of those show up here under the Shape menu.
| | 01:49 | All right, so let's look at our
layout here with our desk and our chair.
| | 01:54 | Now we have some options.
| | 01:55 | We can move these up one level at a time.
| | 01:57 | For example, if I click on the Desk
here and I want to move it up, I can go up
| | 02:02 | to the Shape menu and I can go down to
Order and you can see I've got options.
| | 02:06 | Bring it right to the front, send
it right to the back so if I had ten
| | 02:10 | things lined up one on top of the
other, sending it right to the back would
| | 02:13 | make it item number 10.
| | 02:15 | sending it to the front by clicking
Bring to Front would make it item number 1,
| | 02:20 | or I can go through the various levels
bringing them forward one at a time or
| | 02:24 | sending this particular shape backward
once through each of the various levels
| | 02:30 | of my pecking order.
| | 02:32 | Well, with the desk, I
actually want to bring it forward.
| | 02:35 | So I click Bring Forward, and you can
see actually it's over the chair but it's
| | 02:39 | still under the monitor.
| | 02:41 | If I've gone over to my toolbar here
and I've chosen Bring to Front, I am just
| | 02:46 | going to give a click.
| | 02:47 | You can see that I brought it right to
the top, so it's overlapping the chair,
| | 02:50 | but it's also overlapping my PC monitor.
| | 02:53 | If I come back up here to choose Send
to Back you can see what happens, the
| | 02:58 | chair is back on top.
| | 03:00 | So I've got multiple options here.
| | 03:01 | I can move it one step through the order
at a time or I could click on the chair
| | 03:06 | and send it right to the back, and come
up to my Action Toolbar, click Send to
| | 03:10 | Back and that works.
| | 03:12 | So as I de-select by clicking anywhere
on my blank page over here on the right
| | 03:18 | you can see that the order is now correct.
| | 03:21 | So I can use the Action
Toolbar or the Shape menu to do that.
| | 03:24 | It's important to understand how items
are layered one on top of the other in
| | 03:28 | the order that they were brought on to
the drawing page, but it's also important
| | 03:32 | to know you can reorder these items later on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Grouping and ungrouping shapes| 00:01 | I want to talk to you now about
grouping and ungrouping shapes on the drawing
| | 00:06 | page and why it's important.
| | 00:08 | For example, we're looking here at
OfficePlan3d from the previous lesson where
| | 00:12 | we've got our desk, our chair, PC,
monitor etcetera, and maybe we want to move
| | 00:17 | the entire group around in our office.
| | 00:20 | If we were to go over here and just
click on the chair, for example, you see how
| | 00:23 | only the chair moves.
| | 00:24 | So I could do a Ctrl+Z or click the
Undo button to move it back, I could group
| | 00:29 | all of these together by
marquee-selecting them and moving them.
| | 00:33 | But if I wanted to treat the whole thing
like one shape, I could group them altogether.
| | 00:38 | So the easiest way to do that
is using the Action Toolbar.
| | 00:41 | Now if you're skipping to this lesson,
you may not have the Action Toolbar open,
| | 00:45 | and you may not have this setup.
| | 00:46 | So you can go to the Open button, and
from the Lesson3 folder of your Exercise
| | 00:51 | Files open up OfficePlan3e.
| | 00:54 | Click the Open button, you'll be
caught up with us there, and then make sure
| | 00:57 | that you've got the Action
Toolbar showing up as well.
| | 01:00 | You can right-click and make
sure that Action is checked off.
| | 01:03 | All right, so from the Action Toolbar,
maybe we'd like to group this whole
| | 01:08 | series of shapes here
that make up our workstation.
| | 01:12 | So the first thing we need to do is
select it, just like we did earlier, and now
| | 01:15 | marquee-select the entire area and
you can see everything is selected.
| | 01:20 | I can tell by the little pink borders
around each thing, and then I've got my
| | 01:23 | sizing handles around the outside.
| | 01:25 | I've got all of those shapes.
| | 01:26 | Now I can go to my Action Toolbar and
I've got two grouping buttons, one for
| | 01:30 | grouping and one of ungrouping, and you can
see there are keyboard shortcuts for each.
| | 01:35 | Ctrl+Shift+G for Group, and then
we've got Ctrl+Shift+U for Ungroup.
| | 01:42 | Well, I want to group those together.
| | 01:44 | As soon as I click the
Group button, look what happens.
| | 01:46 | Those little pink borders disappear
and this is treated as one shape, which
| | 01:50 | means now when I come over here and
click on the desk, the entire group of
| | 01:54 | shapes is selected so I can move it around.
| | 01:57 | So I move it around and then I realize,
hey, this PC monitor should be sticking
| | 02:01 | off the edge of the desk, I want to move it.
| | 02:03 | That means I would need to ungroup these.
| | 02:06 | So I can go up to my Action Toolbar
and Ungroup, and by the way if you don't
| | 02:09 | like using the toolbar, you can always
go to your Shape menu and you can see
| | 02:13 | we've got a grouping option right here.
| | 02:16 | So if you want to ungroup, go ahead.
| | 02:18 | Now just click on the PC monitor itself
and just position it into place, maybe
| | 02:24 | that's where it belongs, and
maybe not, back a little bit.
| | 02:27 | There is a good spot right there,
and now we want to regroup again, we
| | 02:31 | marquee-select the entire group of
shapes and we go up to our Group button to
| | 02:36 | put them all back together.
| | 02:38 | So that means now when I come over to
the chair or the desk, whatever, the
| | 02:41 | entire group of shapes is
selected so I can move it into place.
| | 02:45 | I de-select by clicking
anywhere outside of that shape.
| | 02:49 | So that's all there is to
grouping and ungrouping shapes.
| | 02:52 | You can see how it could be a big time-saver
when you need to manipulate those
| | 02:55 | shapes later on and it's best to
treat a group of shapes as one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Aligning and distributing shapes| 00:02 | All right, continuing our work with
shapes we are going to talk now about
| | 00:04 | aligning shapes and distributing them.
| | 00:07 | So in other words, getting various
shapes to line-up with one another and then
| | 00:11 | distributing them evenly
between the furthest two points.
| | 00:15 | I'll show you what I mean in a second.
| | 00:17 | First we need to open up a diagram, so
we'll go to the Open button, navigate to
| | 00:22 | the Lesson3 folder of your
Exercise Files and open up OfficePlan3f.
| | 00:27 | So we will give it a click and then open.
| | 00:29 | Now this particular office plan is
kind of a boardroom, projector room, and
| | 00:35 | you can see we've got a screen and a projector
back here, and then we've got a number of seats.
| | 00:39 | And for this exercise we want to get
these seats lined up, not only together but
| | 00:44 | distributed evenly across the room.
| | 00:46 | So here's the first thing we are going
to do, and we are going to do it 4x4.
| | 00:50 | These four seats need to be lined up
together and distributed evenly, and what I
| | 00:54 | was saying earlier about between the
furthest points I am going to move this
| | 00:58 | chair down, close to the wall, and
this one I am going to move down away from
| | 01:02 | the wall a little bit.
| | 01:04 | And then I am going to select the
four chairs that I want lined up and
| | 01:07 | distributed in between these two extremities.
| | 01:10 | So holding down my Ctrl key on the
keyboard I select the other three chairs, and
| | 01:15 | now if I've got the Action Toolbar
open, this is the quickest way to do it.
| | 01:19 | If you don't, just right-click
and make sure Action is checked off.
| | 01:23 | Is to come over here to the very first
button, you can see it's Align Shapes,
| | 01:28 | and there is a drop-down, so when we
click it, we can align their fronts, align
| | 01:32 | them down in the center, align their
backs, and then you can see we've also got
| | 01:37 | options for aligning tops, middles and bottoms.
| | 01:40 | Now these we can either align their backs
or their fronts, they are all the same shape.
| | 01:45 | So it doesn't matter which one of these we
select, except for where they will be lined up.
| | 01:50 | So if we want them lined up with the front
of this first one that's what we'll select.
| | 01:54 | If we want them lined up across the
middle, we will select that one or the
| | 01:58 | back of this chair.
| | 02:00 | And I am thinking, this is as far
back as I want it to go, so I am going to
| | 02:03 | line up their backs.
| | 02:04 | So I am going to come back over here to
my drop-down for the Align button and I
| | 02:08 | am going to go over here and Align Right.
| | 02:10 | When I give that a click, you can see
how every other one is aligned with the
| | 02:14 | right side of my first selected shape.
| | 02:17 | The only thing is they are kind of
overlapping each other and they are
| | 02:20 | not distributed evenly.
| | 02:22 | You can see that when I de-select especially.
| | 02:25 | So we will re-select them and I
am just going to marquee-select by
| | 02:28 | clicking-and-dragging my mouse around
the outside of all four shapes, and I am
| | 02:32 | going to go the Next button now
which also has a drop-down on my Action
| | 02:36 | Toolbar, Distribute Shapes.
| | 02:38 | And I can distribute them, you can see
as I hover over this one horizontally,
| | 02:42 | this is distributing them by their
centers, and then over here you can see we've
| | 02:46 | got Vertical Spacing, and because we
are spacing them vertically, we want to
| | 02:50 | distribute them that way.
| | 02:52 | We can also distribute by the middle.
| | 02:54 | Well, this one here, Distribute
Vertical Spacing is going to take my top shape
| | 02:58 | and my bottom shape and
distribute everything evenly in between.
| | 03:02 | That's the one that I want.
| | 03:03 | So I give it a click, you can see
the chairs are slightly adjusted.
| | 03:08 | If I de-select, you can see they are
perfectly spaced and perfectly lined up.
| | 03:13 | So we can try that again with the back row.
| | 03:15 | Again, I would want this
one lined up with this one.
| | 03:19 | So what the first thing I am going to do is,
select both of these and align their tops.
| | 03:24 | So I come up here and I go to
align their tops right here.
| | 03:28 | You can see what happened, because I
selected this one first, this one moved down.
| | 03:33 | So it's really important that
you select in the right order.
| | 03:36 | So I am going to undo, de-select,
click this one first, now hold down Ctrl,
| | 03:41 | click the second one and you can
see it's got the darker border.
| | 03:44 | That's very important.
| | 03:46 | Now when I come over here and
align their tops, look what happens.
| | 03:49 | The back one gets moved up.
| | 03:51 | So I am going to do the same thing down here.
| | 03:53 | I am going to click this one first,
hold down Ctrl, click this one and
| | 03:57 | align their bottoms.
| | 03:59 | So I am going to go over here, choose
Align Bottoms and now that I know they are
| | 04:04 | perfectly aligned up with the top and
bottom chairs, I just need the other ones
| | 04:09 | lined up equally as well.
| | 04:11 | So I am going to click, Ctrl+Click,
Ctrl+Click, and Ctrl+Click to get all four
| | 04:17 | selected, and now I am
going to align up their backs.
| | 04:21 | So I am going to come over here to my
Align Shapes drop-down and align their backs.
| | 04:27 | And now I want to distribute them as well.
| | 04:29 | So I am going to distribute them here
vertically, using equal spacing, there we go.
| | 04:35 | I de-select to see the
finished product. Looks great.
| | 04:39 | So that covers aligning and distributing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Laying out shapes and drawings| 00:01 | So far we have been doing a lot of
work with shapes, but we've really been
| | 00:05 | focused on floor plans, like this office
floor plan that you see in front of me.
| | 00:09 | Now when we work with floor plans and
office plans, etcetera, the kinds of
| | 00:14 | shapes that we are working on are a
little bit different from other diagrams.
| | 00:17 | For example, we are working with furniture.
| | 00:20 | We are working with equipment and
accessories like this projector screen for example.
| | 00:24 | Now if you are working on a different
diagram like a process flowchart, an
| | 00:29 | organizational chart or a block
diagram for example, the shapes, we'd be
| | 00:34 | working with would be much different and it's
very likely they'd be connected to one another.
| | 00:39 | So when we work with shapes that are
connected like that, there is a better
| | 00:42 | tool for aligning our shapes and
laying them out on the page, and I want to
| | 00:46 | show you that next.
| | 00:47 | So let's open up a diagram, we'll go
to the Open button, give it a click.
| | 00:51 | From the Lesson3 folder of your
Exercise Files, you will click on Process3g,
| | 00:56 | double-click it to open it up or
one-click and then click the Open button.
| | 01:00 | All right, so here's a diagram and you
can see it is indeed a flowchart where
| | 01:05 | we've got shapes that
flow from one to the other.
| | 01:08 | So here you can see Course Design
flows into a Needs Analysis, and this is a
| | 01:12 | preparation symbol that goes down to
the Content symbol, which in this case the
| | 01:17 | shape represents documentation,
down to Delivery and Evaluation.
| | 01:22 | Now it's not perfectly lined up but each of
these shapes are connected one to the other.
| | 01:27 | So we are going to use a different
tool for lining things up nicely.
| | 01:31 | First thing is, if you don't have the
Action Toolbar showing up on your screen
| | 01:34 | right now, you can right-click anywhere
outside of the toolbars in the toolbar
| | 01:38 | area to make sure Action has a check
mark, if it doesn't, give it a click.
| | 01:43 | Mine is turned on, and I want to
show you this fourth button in over here
| | 01:47 | called Lay Out Shapes.
| | 01:49 | Now the Lay Out Shapes button is
actually going to open up a dialog box where we
| | 01:52 | can make some decisions.
| | 01:54 | But without selecting any of the boxes
or shapes here on my screen, I can also
| | 01:59 | go up to the Shape menu and see
Configure Layout there, and you can see it's the
| | 02:04 | same symbol I saw on the Action Toolbar.
| | 02:06 | So that's the Configure Layout button.
| | 02:08 | That's going to bring up the dialog,
but if I don't need to make any choices,
| | 02:12 | I can just come down here to Re-layout
Shapes and when I click on it, watch what happens.
| | 02:17 | Everything just gets lined up nicely for me.
| | 02:20 | So I have no say in the
matter how that happened.
| | 02:22 | So if I want it to, and I am just going
to undo what we did there, by clicking
| | 02:27 | the Undo button up here.
| | 02:28 | I could go to this button or go up
to Shape and choose Configure Layout.
| | 02:33 | They are the exact same thing.
| | 02:35 | So I'll click it here on the Action Toolbar,
and you can see that the style is flowchart.
| | 02:40 | That's for the placement and there is a
quick look at what that looks like when
| | 02:45 | we choose Flowchart, Top to Bottom.
| | 02:48 | Now the other choices here include Radial,
you can see where it can just go from
| | 02:52 | the center out kind of thing.
| | 02:54 | We've got Circular, Compact Tree, and
Hierarchy as well which would be good for org charts.
| | 03:00 | I am going to go back to Flowchart
here and if I didn't want to go in Top to
| | 03:04 | Bottom I could go Bottom to Top, Left to
Right, Right to Left, it's totally up to me.
| | 03:09 | Now because of the size of my
drawing page Top to Bottom works best.
| | 03:14 | Now I can adjust the Spacing as
well in between each of those shapes.
| | 03:18 | Right now it's set to half-an-inch.
| | 03:18 | I am going to bump it up to 0.6.
| | 03:21 | The Connectors are also using the
Flowchart style, but we could also use some
| | 03:25 | of these other ones.
| | 03:27 | You can see this would really apply to
an organization chart and then we've got
| | 03:31 | some simple ones down here as well.
| | 03:32 | But I am going to leave it at Flowchart,
and the Appearance is Straight, the
| | 03:36 | other option would be
Curved if I want them curved.
| | 03:39 | It's not going to really make a
difference when my shapes go straight up and
| | 03:42 | down here, so I will leave Straight selected.
| | 03:44 | All right, if I click Apply, I
am going to see the end result.
| | 03:48 | All right, I am going to move the
dialog box slightly out of the way, and
| | 03:52 | there it is, very similar to what I
had before, but the spacing now is just a
| | 03:56 | little bit greater in between each of
these shapes, very good, I click OK to
| | 04:01 | accept those changes.
| | 04:03 | And the last thing I want to tell
you about now is centering the entire
| | 04:06 | drawing on your page.
| | 04:07 | You can see it's kind of up near the top
and there is some empty space down below.
| | 04:11 | The easiest way to center your entire
drawing is to go back up to the Shape
| | 04:16 | drop-down and from this
menu click, Center Drawing.
| | 04:20 | So everything gets adjusted at centered,
vertically, and horizontally on the
| | 04:25 | page according to the widest item
here which is my title and then from top
| | 04:30 | to bottom from the top shape which is
the title down to the bottom which is
| | 04:33 | this evaluation box.
| | 04:35 | So I have equal amounts of space at
the top and bottom and the left and
| | 04:38 | the right.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting shapes| 00:02 | So now that you are comfortable with
how to get Shapes on to your drawing page
| | 00:05 | and how to put them in the right order,
alignment etcetera, it's time to talk
| | 00:10 | about making them look good with formatting.
| | 00:12 | In a number of lessons ago, we talked about
using Themes and we'll explore that again now.
| | 00:16 | But there is a whole lot of other
formatting we can do when it comes to Shapes.
| | 00:20 | So let's open up a different diagram.
| | 00:22 | We'll go to the Open button up here and
give it a click, navigate to your lesson
| | 00:26 | 3 folder of your exercise files and
we'll open up this one here Flowchart 3h.
| | 00:30 | So give that one a click and open.
| | 00:33 | Basically the same data, it's just laid
out a little bit differently from left
| | 00:36 | to right here on a landscape page.
| | 00:38 | But what we're going to do is do a
little bit of formatting of this entire
| | 00:41 | diagram and then we'll focus on the
individual shape and even the connectors in
| | 00:45 | between those Shapes.
| | 00:46 | All right first we'll go up to our
Formatting tool bar and click on the Theme
| | 00:50 | button that displays on our Task
pane over here by default Theme Colors.
| | 00:54 | So if we are to click on some of these
different Theme colors you can see, we
| | 00:59 | see those results over
here on the left hand side.
| | 01:01 | So I am going to go over here to this
dark background and you can see that my
| | 01:05 | Shapes are little bit layered.
| | 01:06 | Now if I have to use that obviously I
want to have a darker text on a lighter
| | 01:11 | object and you can see my borders are light.
| | 01:13 | If I go to one that has a light
background you can see my Borders are
| | 01:16 | automatically darker, and I've got
dark text on the light object again.
| | 01:21 | So all of that's done for us.
| | 01:23 | We can do that ourselves if we
want to change it up a little bit.
| | 01:26 | So let's start with our Shapes and what
we're going to do to select all of these
| | 01:30 | Shapes on a diagram is to Marquee
select by going to off to the left and higher
| | 01:35 | than the first Shape.
| | 01:36 | Click and drag diagonally pass
the last Shape and down below it.
| | 01:40 | And when we release you can see
how the entire thing is selected.
| | 01:43 | So now we're going to back up to
our Formatting tool bar and we've got
| | 01:47 | some options up here.
| | 01:48 | First of all we've got the Fill button
here and you can see if I click the Fill
| | 01:51 | drop down the one that's
selected right now is this light pink.
| | 01:55 | But if I wanted to go to something
little darker maybe and give it a click, you
| | 01:59 | can see how everything changes but
what doesn't happen is the Borders don't
| | 02:04 | automatically change to match what I've
selected and even the text and the Font
| | 02:09 | color doesn't change to
match what I've selected.
| | 02:12 | So for example if I go back up here to
the Fill and I choose something very dark.
| | 02:16 | Let's go down to this dark blue here.
| | 02:19 | You can see I can barely read the text which
means now I have to format the actual Font.
| | 02:24 | Well, we can do that to right from the
Formatting tool bar we will go up here to
| | 02:27 | the Text color which is currently set to Black.
| | 02:30 | We can see it's selected here and we'll
just go to White and give that a click.
| | 02:34 | You can see how much easier it is to read.
| | 02:36 | Now we can also adjust the
border around our Shapes.
| | 02:39 | So over here in between our text are Font
color and our Fill color is our Line color.
| | 02:44 | So if we click that one you can see
right now it's kind of a dark burgundy color.
| | 02:49 | Well to go with our dark blue
let's choose a light blue over here.
| | 02:53 | I am going to go to the
second last one on the first row.
| | 02:55 | I'll give it a click and it's very
hard to see when everything is selected.
| | 02:59 | So other thing we can do is
make those Borders thicker.
| | 03:02 | So we'll skip over the Theme button here.
| | 03:04 | We will move over to the next
one which is our Line weight.
| | 03:06 | And when we click the drop down you
can see a very thin line is selected Line
| | 03:10 | weight number 1 at the top.
| | 03:12 | I am going to go down a few down to Line
weight 13 and see what that looks like?
| | 03:16 | Like you see it's much thicker and
to really see the effect I am going to
| | 03:19 | Deselect my selected Shapes just by
clicking anywhere outside of my selection.
| | 03:25 | So it affected the lines around the
outside of my Shapes and you could see even
| | 03:29 | the connectors are thicker
and a different color as well.
| | 03:33 | So all of that is affected because
we selected the entire flowchart here
| | 03:38 | including each shape and each connector.
| | 03:40 | All right some other options
include how we view this border right now.
| | 03:44 | We have chosen a thick line weight
and a color but we can also change
| | 03:47 | the appearance of that.
| | 03:48 | We'll go to the next one but only
after we selected one of our Shapes.
| | 03:52 | So we could select them all but I
just to want to work with one shape now.
| | 03:55 | So I click on the Shape itself.
| | 03:57 | Now whatever I do will
only affect that One Shape.
| | 03:59 | And I am going to go up to the Line
Pattern drop down here and I am going to
| | 04:02 | choose a dotted line here.
| | 04:04 | So Line Pattern 23 and I give that a
click and I Deselect you can see how I get
| | 04:09 | that dashed or dotted line around the outside.
| | 04:12 | Now the other thing we can do is make
it feel like it's coming off the page a
| | 04:16 | little bit by adding a shadow.
| | 04:18 | So for that I want to select everything again.
| | 04:20 | I am going to Marquee select from the
top left to the bottom right so that I get
| | 04:25 | everything selected.
| | 04:26 | And now I want to add a shadow to that.
| | 04:28 | So we could also have some options
Formatting options up on menu bar.
| | 04:33 | If we go to the Format menu for
example, you can see there is our text, our
| | 04:37 | line, our fill, there is shadow as well.
| | 04:40 | Something we didn't see
on the Formatting Tool bar.
| | 04:43 | We've also got the Theme button here
just as we saw on the Formatting tool bar.
| | 04:47 | But we are going to go back up here to Shadow.
| | 04:49 | We'll give that a click it
opens up the Shadow dialog box.
| | 04:52 | You can see currently
the Style selected is none.
| | 04:56 | So we can choose the Style, we
can choose Color, even the Pattern.
| | 04:59 | And then we can adjust Transparency.
| | 05:01 | Over here is a quick preview.
| | 05:03 | So what we're going to do is choose a Style.
| | 05:05 | And you can see there is little
samples of the various Offsets.
| | 05:09 | For example, lower right will give us
a lower right Offset for our Shadow.
| | 05:14 | Here's one lower left and
we've got some upper ones.
| | 05:17 | Now we've got some reduced ones which
make it feel as our Shape is coming in
| | 05:21 | further off the page.
| | 05:22 | And we've got some cool perspective ones
here called Oblique and you can see how
| | 05:26 | it's like they're standing up on edge.
| | 05:27 | So what I am going to do is come up
here to the Offset upper right, number four
| | 05:32 | here and give it a click.
| | 05:34 | So here's my preview now.
| | 05:35 | What that's going to look like?
| | 05:37 | And by default, the color
selected is fairly dark Grey.
| | 05:40 | I am going to change that
color to a little bit lighter.
| | 05:43 | So I am going to go to a
lighter Grey here, Shade 35%.
| | 05:47 | You can see the Preview reflects my change.
| | 05:50 | The other thing I am going to
do is adjust the Transparency.
| | 05:52 | Right now there is zero Transparency.
| | 05:54 | So anything in the background
you'll not see through the Shadow.
| | 05:57 | To add realism to a Shadow we make it
some more Transparent because we can
| | 06:01 | usually see through a Shadow.
| | 06:03 | So here you see in our sample we can
see the grid that shows up in behind.
| | 06:07 | More transparency we're going to see
more of that grid through the shadow.
| | 06:11 | So I am going to go all the way up here to 55%.
| | 06:12 | I am going to click Apply to see my
changes right here on my drawing page.
| | 06:19 | So you can see because I've
selected everything Shapes and Connectors.
| | 06:23 | Everything appears to come off the page.
| | 06:25 | Now I can also adjust the Size and
Position manually here for the X and Y
| | 06:29 | Offsets, if I wanted to.
| | 06:31 | And you can see from the one that I
chose Offset upper right number four here I
| | 06:36 | get 0.125 inches for my X and my Y Offset.
| | 06:40 | If I wanted to I could adjust those
by typing in numbers, I could use a
| | 06:44 | little Arrow buttons.
| | 06:46 | I can use these Arrow buttons to move my shadow.
| | 06:48 | You can see I'll move it over
a little bit to the other side.
| | 06:51 | If I click Apply, I am going to see
that change and you could see that the
| | 06:55 | numbers change for the X and the Y
if I want to go up and down as well I
| | 07:00 | can adjust that too.
| | 07:01 | So if I click Apply, I have totally
reversed what I had selected instead of
| | 07:05 | upper right it's now on lower left.
| | 07:07 | And of course, if I don't like
these numbers, I can adjust them.
| | 07:10 | I can also adjust the
Magnification which is currently set to a 100%.
| | 07:13 | So as I move this down you can see that my
shadow, if I click Apply is just a little bit less.
| | 07:20 | If I move it to the right, I
am increasing the Magnification.
| | 07:23 | If I click Apply down below you
can see that the shadow is magnified.
| | 07:27 | So I am going to move it
back to 100% click Apply.
| | 07:32 | That looks good, I click OK.
| | 07:34 | And I've got my shadow effect.
| | 07:36 | To really see it I'll deselect
what's selected and now it appears as my
| | 07:40 | flowchart is coming off the page.
| | 07:43 | All right, the only other formatting I
would like to show you deals with the font.
| | 07:46 | So again I am going to select
everything with a Marquee select.
| | 07:50 | I went a little bit too far there so I am
going to scroll back, so we could see it all.
| | 07:54 | And now I am going to go up to my Font
button so up here is where we got our
| | 07:57 | Font color or our Text color.
| | 07:59 | There is our Line color and our Fill color.
| | 08:01 | But what about the text itself?
| | 08:03 | Well the text itself as you can see over
here, the Formatting tool bar is set to
| | 08:07 | Arial and 12 points.
| | 08:09 | But if we click the Bold for example.
| | 08:10 | You can see how everything got
just a little bit brighter here.
| | 08:14 | It's a little easier to read.
| | 08:15 | So we can adjust the font that we are using.
| | 08:17 | There is quite a few fonts to choose from.
| | 08:20 | I am going to choose Verdana and I
just typed the letter V on my keyboard.
| | 08:23 | It took me right to this part of my
font list where I can select Verdana.
| | 08:28 | That looks a little bit different.
| | 08:29 | You can see now that everything
is fitting all in the Shape here.
| | 08:32 | That's just wrapping around a little bit.
| | 08:34 | So may be I'll knock the size
down just slightly to 10 points.
| | 08:37 | If that's down too much I want 11, no
problem I can type 11 right in here.
| | 08:42 | And I'll hit my tab key or
Enter to make that change.
| | 08:45 | All right so I've got Bold, Italic,
Underline, even the Alignment within there.
| | 08:50 | I can create Bullets but we're going to
talk more about text a little bit later on.
| | 08:54 | Right now we're just dealing with the
text that shows up inside our Shapes.
| | 08:57 | We'll deselect to see the
finished product and we're done.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with shape data| 00:01 | Now is a good time to
talk to you about Shape Data.
| | 00:04 | The shapes that we worked with in a
diagram can have data assigned to it.
| | 00:08 | In other words, some shapes when we use
them, will have data assigned to them,
| | 00:12 | other shapes like the ones we
see right now on my screen may not.
| | 00:16 | Well, we can always go and add data to
a shape and then if we needed to we can
| | 00:21 | also edit Shape Data.
| | 00:22 | Let me show you what I'm talking about.
| | 00:24 | First of all, we're going to
open up a different diagram here.
| | 00:26 | So you can go to your Open button,
navigate to the Lesson3 folder of your
| | 00:30 | exercise files and we're
going to open up our OfficePlan3h.
| | 00:35 | So double-click that one or one click and
then Open will bring that up on your screen.
| | 00:40 | All right.
| | 00:42 | So this should look familiar
from a couple of lessons ago.
| | 00:44 | I wanted to use this one because we've
got examples here of shapes that will
| | 00:48 | have data assigned to it already and other
shapes that will need to give data or add data to.
| | 00:54 | So let's start with our
chairs here, for example.
| | 00:57 | The chairs in our little theatre, if we
click on the chair to select the shape,
| | 01:01 | to look at the Shape Data there is a
couple of ways we can get there, but let's
| | 01:05 | go up to the Data menu and click on Shape Data.
| | 01:09 | So if we click on that you can see
there is some data in here, for example, the
| | 01:13 | Width and the Depth is set to
30 inches in both directions.
| | 01:17 | So if I click these dropdowns, you can
see I can change the size if I wanted to,
| | 01:21 | at least the data that goes with the
actual shape by selecting a different size.
| | 01:25 | So if was to choose 24 inches and 24
inches, I click OK, you can see I've got a
| | 01:31 | much smaller chair here and this is just
going because it's a piece of furniture
| | 01:35 | by some of standard sizes
out there for chairs like this.
| | 01:39 | So I'm going to click Undo to
bring that back to regular size.
| | 01:44 | Now you may have noticed that there are
some other fields in here that we can fill in.
| | 01:47 | let's go back up with our chair
still selected to Data and Shape Data.
| | 01:52 | You can see we can give this an ID, a
Name, a Department and then can you see
| | 01:58 | what's happening here, we can add this
to an inventory and what's really cool,
| | 02:03 | later on you're going to see this one
we work with external data, in other
| | 02:06 | words, linking shapes to a
database or to a spreadsheet of data.
| | 02:10 | We're going to do this especially when we
work with Pivot Diagrams a little later on.
| | 02:14 | But this will give you a good
introduction to working with Shape Data.
| | 02:17 | So I can give ID numbers, Name,
Department, look at this a Serial number if I
| | 02:22 | wanted to, description, the
date it was purchased and so on.
| | 02:26 | If I click on the Define button, check
it out, I can define, in this case, my
| | 02:31 | Label is the Width to different types
and languages and formats, there is the
| | 02:36 | value that's in there right now.
| | 02:38 | I can add prompts, all kinds of cool things.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to click Cancel and
I'm going to click Cancel again.
| | 02:45 | Now we're going to go to a shape that has data.
| | 02:48 | This actual room is made up of walls
and a door, so if we click anywhere on the
| | 02:53 | walls, and then we go up to our Data
menu and click on Shape Data, you can see
| | 02:59 | this is a lot different.
| | 03:00 | This wouldn't be something that we would have
an inventory, so we don't see all those fields.
| | 03:04 | But it definitely does
have a width and a length.
| | 03:07 | You can see its' 19 feet by 13
feet, it looks like 2.4 inches.
| | 03:13 | So if I click Cancel here and I take a
look, there's the 19 foot label and there
| | 03:17 | is my 13 feet and it looks like 2.38
inches for my actual height of this room.
| | 03:23 | So, data is already assigned to this
kind of shape, whereas, other shapes like
| | 03:29 | this, projector screen if we click on
it and go up to Data and Shape Data,
| | 03:34 | because it's Office equipment,
treat it like a piece of inventory.
| | 03:38 | You can see there is nothing in here now.
| | 03:40 | So I would give this thing an ID, I'm
going to call it PS for a projector screen
| | 03:45 | and maybe the size of this one is an 80
inch screen, so I'm going to put PS-80.
| | 03:49 | So I'm going to type in the name, Projector
Screen - 80, belongs to the IT Department.
| | 04:01 | If I want to give it a Serial number, I
could, a Product description, I'm going
| | 04:06 | to put all of this in here.
| | 04:07 | I'm going to just highlight that, Ctrl+C
on my keyboard and paste it down there,
| | 04:14 | just add a little bit more.
| | 04:16 | If I wanted to add a Purchase date,
you can see I've got a dropdown here so I
| | 04:19 | can select from the calendar.
| | 04:21 | I bought this say, back in
December of 2006, there we go.
| | 04:26 | I can give it a Product number, Base elevation
and Description there as well, if I want to.
| | 04:31 | But that's enough for this particular
piece of data equipment so I am going to
| | 04:34 | click OK and it's now stored
with that piece of equipment.
| | 04:38 | So I've got a Projector back here,
I could do the exact same thing.
| | 04:41 | If I was to go up to Data and choose
Shape Data you could see I get the same field.
| | 04:46 | I'm going to click Cancel here and
click on the table that this is sitting on
| | 04:50 | and go up to Data and choose Shape Data.
| | 04:52 | Look at that, it's got some of
the information in there already.
| | 04:55 | So because it's a table, it's got a size,
a length and a depth and then I've got
| | 04:59 | all those other fields if I
wanted to, to add it to my inventory.
| | 05:03 | So I'm just going to click Cancel right there.
| | 05:06 | The door is also
something that's called a shape.
| | 05:09 | Although it's a door we call it a shape.
| | 05:12 | If I click on it, and go up to Data, and
Shape Data, you can see this is very different.
| | 05:17 | Because this is a door, Visio knows that,
it's got a Door width, the height, a
| | 05:21 | Door type, all kinds of
fields that relate to a door.
| | 05:26 | So depending on the shapes that
you're working with, you're going to see
| | 05:29 | some data, some other time, other
times you'll see no data but you can go in
| | 05:33 | there and add all the data you want
and a little bit later on we're going to
| | 05:36 | talk about linking data to
external sources, such as, a database or a
| | 05:42 | worksheet in Microsoft Excel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with ConnectorsUsing AutoConnect| 00:01 | In the last section we devoted a
lot of our time and effort in getting
| | 00:05 | familiar with shapes.
| | 00:07 | Now we're going to focus in on
Connectors, the little connections that connect
| | 00:11 | one shape to another.
| | 00:12 | In Visio, because it's such a smart
application, we can use automatic connection
| | 00:18 | so that we never lose a
connection once it's set up.
| | 00:20 | Now there are many different ways to
use connectors in Visio and we're going to
| | 00:24 | explore a number of them right now, but
the first thing we're going to need to
| | 00:27 | do is open up a diagram that's been
started for you, so come up to the Open
| | 00:31 | button here, give it a click, navigate
to your Lesson4 folder of your exercise
| | 00:36 | files to find Flowchart4a.
| | 00:38 | You can double-click that one or one
click and then click the Open button to
| | 00:43 | bring it up on your screen.
| | 00:44 | So this is a basic flowchart, you can
see it's going to be a Pilot Program.
| | 00:49 | Down below you can see I've got a
number of shapes on my drawing page here
| | 00:52 | and if you can't read what's in there,
make sure your zoom level up here is
| | 00:55 | set to at least 75%.
| | 00:58 | So here we've got our shapes but
they're not currently connected.
| | 01:02 | The first way I'm going to show you to
connect a shape is one that I would like
| | 01:05 | you to forget as soon as I show you, but
it's the way that a lot of people think
| | 01:09 | they need to connect shapes if they're
not accustomed to using an application
| | 01:12 | that's smart with some
intelligence like Visio is.
| | 01:15 | So if you're used to using drawing
applications like CorelDRAW, Illustrator,
| | 01:20 | even the Paint Brush function, you're
probably looking for a Line Tool that you
| | 01:24 | can draw from one shape to another.
| | 01:26 | Well, there is a Line Tool, it's on
the Drawing toolbar and right now our
| | 01:29 | Drawing toolbar may or may not be showing up
here at the top of our screen, mine is not.
| | 01:35 | So if I move outside of any of the
toolbars up here and just right click in this
| | 01:39 | area, I can turn on the Drawing toolbar.
| | 01:42 | So here it is, right here on my screen it's
floating and there is the Line Tool right there.
| | 01:47 | You can see I can draw my own rectangles,
ellipses and so on, but I dragged each
| | 01:51 | of these shapes from a Stencil.
| | 01:53 | So they've got connection points.
| | 01:54 | They are little bit smarter than the
average shape, same thing goes for lines.
| | 01:58 | I'm going to click the Line Tool.
| | 02:00 | Let's say I want to draw a
line from one shape to another.
| | 02:02 | So I can go to this one here, click and
drag over to the other shape and let go
| | 02:07 | and it looks like they're connected, right.
| | 02:09 | Let's close the Drawing toolbar.
| | 02:11 | I don't need that on our screen now.
| | 02:13 | We see the connection here.
| | 02:14 | What happens if we try to
move one of these shapes?
| | 02:17 | I'm going to move this one here called Training.
| | 02:19 | I'm just going to move it down.
| | 02:20 | Notice that the line is still drawn
exactly where I drew it the first time.
| | 02:25 | It's not maintaining a connection with
this shape, I would have to move this
| | 02:29 | into place and that's too far, try to
get it connected, there is a good spot.
| | 02:36 | You can see the hassles, if you
need to make adjustments in a drawing.
| | 02:39 | So I'm going to click on the line, so
it's selected and hit my Delete key on
| | 02:44 | the keyboard to remove that and now we're
going to look at the proper way to connect shapes.
| | 02:48 | We're going to start with AutoConnect
and I want you to just see something.
| | 02:53 | When I hover over a shape, you may see
little arrows showing up and right now
| | 02:56 | there is one pointing to the right.
| | 02:58 | As I move to that arrow, you can see
what happens to the shape that's next to
| | 03:02 | it, the neighboring shape.
| | 03:04 | It's highlighted in a red box, meaning
if I click this arrow, I will connect
| | 03:08 | this shape to its neighbor.
| | 03:10 | So I'm going to give it a click and you
can see the line is drawn and there is
| | 03:13 | even a little arrow here next to that.
| | 03:15 | So what happens if I move
this shape, if I move it down?
| | 03:19 | Look at that, it maintains its connection.
| | 03:21 | Look what happens, if I move it over
underneath the previous shape and let go.
| | 03:26 | It's still connected by using
different connection points, and the reason for
| | 03:31 | that you need to understand the
difference between shape to shape and point
| | 03:34 | to point connections.
| | 03:35 | By default, when we use this
AutoConnecting feature, we're using a shape to
| | 03:40 | shape connection, and that means the
entire shape is connected to this entire shape.
| | 03:44 | So if I move it around, it will
stay connected but it will adjust the
| | 03:47 | connection points for me.
| | 03:49 | Whereas a point to point connection
would actually keep the connection but would
| | 03:53 | be a glued to that connection point.
| | 03:56 | So you might get lines that are drawn
in round circles, for example, going
| | 04:00 | around the shape, so it
maintains that connection.
| | 04:03 | So this one is a little bit more dynamic.
| | 04:05 | It will change the connection point
as needed to keep the drawing nice and
| | 04:09 | neat and organized.
| | 04:11 | So as I move to the right you can see
there is an arrow here as well, as I
| | 04:14 | hover over that it's going to connect to the
next shape, if I click this, same thing here.
| | 04:19 | As I connect, by clicking, I've got
smart connections from shape to shape.
| | 04:24 | So if I move these around,
they will always stay connected.
| | 04:30 | So that's kind of cool.
| | 04:31 | That's our AutoConnecting feature.
| | 04:33 | There are some other ways to
connect shapes, for example, we've got a
| | 04:36 | Connection Tool button up here on our
toolbar, we may, in the Stencils as well
| | 04:41 | have some connectors like Dynamic
connectors, for example, and we're going to
| | 04:44 | explore some of those next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Connector Tool button| 00:01 | In the last lesson, we connected
shapes one to the other using an
| | 00:05 | automatic connection type.
| | 00:07 | Now we are going to look at another
way to connect shapes and that's using
| | 00:10 | the connector tool.
| | 00:11 | So we are going to continue to work
on our diagram here called FlowChart4a.
| | 00:15 | But if you are skipping to this lesson,
no problem, go to your Open button, give
| | 00:19 | it a click and navigate through the
Lesson4 folder of your exercise Files.
| | 00:23 | You are going to click on FlowChart4b,
double-click it or one click and Open
| | 00:27 | gets you all caught up with us.
| | 00:29 | So here is our flowchart and we do
have our connections already set from
| | 00:33 | one shape to another, but as we
look at this decision box here where it
| | 00:36 | says screening pass.
| | 00:38 | Well, that's going to be a decision
where if they don't pass the screening they
| | 00:42 | need to loop back around to
the participants selection stage.
| | 00:46 | So we need another connector from here
to here and we can't use our auto connect
| | 00:50 | feature to do that, it just
doesn't happen, it's one connection only.
| | 00:54 | So what we do need is a tool that's
going to allow us to connect our two shapes
| | 00:58 | in another way and in
another direction by the way.
| | 01:02 | So if we go up to our toolbar up
here, you will see that we do have
| | 01:04 | the Connector Tool.
| | 01:06 | There is a dropdown next to that and
you will see that when we click that, the
| | 01:09 | other choice is Connection Point Tool,
we will talk about that momentarily.
| | 01:13 | Right now we want to make sure
we are using the Connector Tool.
| | 01:16 | All right, with the Connector Tool
selected, you can see my mouse pointer looks
| | 01:19 | a little bit different.
| | 01:20 | It's waiting for me now to click
and drag from one shape to another.
| | 01:24 | Now I can drag from a shape and when I
am hovering over a shape, you can see I
| | 01:27 | get a box around the
entire shape or from a point.
| | 01:30 | Now if I drag from this shape to this
shape for example, it will use whatever
| | 01:36 | connection points are convenient at the time.
| | 01:39 | In other words, if I moved my shapes
around, the Connection Points may change.
| | 01:43 | If I want to make sure that it's only
from this point to this point and that
| | 01:47 | never changes then I need to drag from
point to point to create a point to point
| | 01:52 | connection and that's what I am going
to do, I am going to make sure that the
| | 01:54 | point is selected and I am going to
click and drag down, you can see the lines
| | 01:58 | being drawn here and as I get
closer to this other connection point, it
| | 02:02 | eventually turns red when I am over it,
meaning when I let go the two points
| | 02:07 | will be glued together and I have
got a point to point connection now.
| | 02:10 | So it's as simple as that, so that
means if I switch back to my mouse pointer
| | 02:15 | here, by clicking on the Pointer Tool
and I move my shapes around, these points
| | 02:21 | will always be connected, yet the
other points may change, you can see that
| | 02:25 | they do change if I moved my shape
to a point where the connections have
| | 02:29 | changed to use the bottom point
instead of the side points and if I drag it
| | 02:34 | down here, they are switched back.
| | 02:36 | But these two points remain glued at all
times because of the point to point connection.
| | 02:42 | So that's using the Connector Tool.
| | 02:44 | Now, the Connection Point Tool that we saw on
the dropdown here is a little bit different.
| | 02:49 | When I use that it's not to create a
connection, but to change connection points.
| | 02:54 | So for example, if I wanted to connect
this point to this point, but before I
| | 02:58 | do I want to change where those connection
points appear on the shape, I can do with this tool.
| | 03:04 | So I would make sure the Connection
Point Tool is selected, come over here and
| | 03:07 | click on a connection point, when I do,
it turns pink and you can see that my
| | 03:12 | shape is also selected.
| | 03:13 | That means now with the foresighted
arrow over it, I can move that connection
| | 03:18 | point, just by clicking
and dragging, I can move it.
| | 03:22 | So if I went down here and clicked on
this one, you can see now it's selected
| | 03:26 | and I can move it as well.
| | 03:28 | So if you need to move your
connection points, make sure you are using the
| | 03:31 | Connection Point Tool, click on a point
when it's pink, it means you can get the
| | 03:35 | foresighted arrow to click
and drag it to move it around.
| | 03:39 | So we will switch back to our Mouse
Pointer Tool here and deselect anything to
| | 03:43 | see our finished product.
| | 03:45 | Now we are going to look at another way
to connect shapes in the next lesson and
| | 03:48 | that's using a dynamic
connector from the stencil.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding connectors from a stencil| 00:01 | It's time now to look at connecting shapes
using connectors that we find on the stencil.
| | 00:06 | So depending on the template we
have used, in this case a flowchart.
| | 00:10 | We may see connectors
showing up on our stencils.
| | 00:13 | So in previous lessons we used an
automatic connection means, we also used the
| | 00:17 | Connector tool from the
Toolbar in the last lesson.
| | 00:19 | Now we are going to look at using
Connectors that we might find on the stencils.
| | 00:24 | So I am still working with Flowchart4d here.
| | 00:26 | But if you are skipping to this
lesson no problem, you can go to your Open
| | 00:29 | button up here, navigate to the
Lesson 4 folder of your exercise files and
| | 00:33 | open up flowchart4c.
| | 00:34 | So I will give that one a click, open
it up and you will be all caught up.
| | 00:40 | All right, if I look over at the
stencils here to the left and I see basic
| | 00:44 | flowchart shapes down here at the
bottom I see a couple of connectors a dynamic
| | 00:49 | connector and a line curve connector.
| | 00:52 | So the first thing I am going to do is
add another shape to my drawing here so
| | 00:56 | that I can connect to it.
| | 00:58 | So what we will do is add a document.
| | 00:59 | I am going to click on the document
shape here, I am going to click and drag it
| | 01:03 | down right underneath my launch pilot
program and I am going to type with it
| | 01:07 | selected, I am going to type Report on Results.
| | 01:13 | Good, now when I click off the shape,
you can see I zoom back at where I can
| | 01:17 | see the entire diagram.
| | 01:19 | So now I am going to connect this shape
to this shape and you can see if I was
| | 01:23 | to hover over here I get
an automatic connection.
| | 01:26 | But I have also got this
dynamic connector right here.
| | 01:28 | So if I click and drag it, I have
actually got a pointer and you can see the
| | 01:32 | point of the arrow is pointing downwards.
| | 01:34 | So I am going to move this one up to
the point at the bottom of my launch pilot
| | 01:39 | program process box up there.
| | 01:42 | Now if I wanted to connect shape to
shape I can move it into the middle of
| | 01:45 | the shape and release.
| | 01:48 | Now it also means that I need to drag
the end of the connector down to this
| | 01:52 | shape or connection point.
| | 01:53 | So again, just to review what we did in
the last lesson, this would be a shape
| | 01:58 | to a point connection or shape to shape.
| | 02:00 | I am going to reset right on the shape,
the whole shape highlighted in red which
| | 02:05 | means if I move this shape around it may
use different connection points to keep
| | 02:09 | things organized or as a point to
point connection, we will always use the
| | 02:13 | points that are selected no
matter where we move the shape.
| | 02:16 | So that's one easy way.
| | 02:17 | Now here is another one, you can see I
have got a Line-curve connector here.
| | 02:21 | Let's say I want to jump to the process, go
right from participant selection to training.
| | 02:26 | Well, if I wanted to I could
use a Line-curve connector here.
| | 02:29 | So I am going to pull it on to the
page and the arrow I want going right to
| | 02:33 | training, so I will let go there and the
start point, I want to bring it all the
| | 02:37 | way back to this
connection point here and release.
| | 02:40 | So now what I have got is kind of a jump
with a curved line and this little node
| | 02:45 | in the middle allows me to adjust the curve.
| | 02:47 | So I can move it up and down, move
it to the right, to the left, just by
| | 02:52 | clicking and dragging my mouse.
| | 02:54 | So I am going to do it right there and
I am going to click out here to deselect
| | 02:58 | anything, to see the end results.
| | 03:00 | So and that's a couple of other ways to
connect shapes and always check out your
| | 03:04 | stencils, you may have some connectors
showing up here as well as your connector
| | 03:08 | tool don't forget that
and your automatic connect.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding text to a connector| 00:01 | In the last few lessons as we have
been working with connectors, connecting
| | 00:05 | one shape to another.
| | 00:06 | You may have been wondering can
I add text to those connectors?
| | 00:10 | For example, here in our flowchart
where we have a decision box whether or not
| | 00:14 | a person moves on through this pilot
process and the answer would be yes, if
| | 00:18 | they pass the screening to move
on to where they are provided with
| | 00:21 | documentation whereas here if they don't pass
the screening they go back to the very beginning.
| | 00:26 | So it might be nice to put the word 'yes' on
this connector and the word 'no' over here.
| | 00:30 | Can that be done? You bet.
| | 00:32 | Now if you are jumping to this lesson
and you skipped the previous ones where
| | 00:36 | we have been editing this flowchart, no
sweat, you will go to your open button
| | 00:40 | here and you will navigate to the
Lesson 4 folder of your exercise files and
| | 00:45 | select flowchart4d, double-click that
one and one click and open and you will
| | 00:50 | be all caught up with us.
| | 00:51 | All right, so let's say we want the
word 'yes' to appear on this connector
| | 00:55 | between our decision box and the
next step in the pilot program.
| | 00:59 | So I am going to click on
the connector and watch this.
| | 01:02 | I am just going to type the word yes.
| | 01:05 | So right away it zooms in to mid-way
through this connector, the word yes is
| | 01:09 | going to show up and when I deselect
by clicking out here an empty spot on
| | 01:13 | my diagram, you can see the word yes
appears right there in the middle of my connector.
| | 01:18 | So obviously if I come to this connector
here click on it and I type the word No
| | 01:24 | and I deselect, you are going to see
it appears right there, right on the
| | 01:28 | connector between these two shapes.
| | 01:30 | So the answer was yes, we can add text
to a connector and it's very easy to do
| | 01:36 | so, just click right on the
connector and start typing away.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Deleting a connector from the drawing page| 00:01 | We have spent the last few lessons
connecting our shapes in various ways but we
| | 00:05 | haven't talked about removing connectors.
| | 00:08 | Sometimes when you accidentally
connect the wrong shapes, or you get too many
| | 00:12 | connectors on there, you need
to know how to take one away.
| | 00:15 | Well to do that, it's very, very simple.
| | 00:17 | If you are skipping to this lesson
and you haven't followed it along in the
| | 00:20 | previous lessons, go to your Open button
first, give that a click and go to your
| | 00:24 | Lesson 04 folder of your Exercise Files,
and double-click Flowchart4e, or click
| | 00:30 | it and click Open to get all caught up with us.
| | 00:33 | So here is our flowchart.
| | 00:34 | We have got some connectors in
there that make sense, may be this one
| | 00:37 | doesn't, where we have got our
Participant Selection, and then we have got a
| | 00:40 | connector jumping across to the
Training step in this process, and we want to
| | 00:44 | get rid of this connector.
| | 00:46 | Watch how difficult this is.
| | 00:48 | We click on it, it's selected, we know
it is because we can see that the nodes
| | 00:52 | are highlighted at each end.
| | 00:54 | I hit the Delete key on keyboard, and it's gone.
| | 00:58 | It's simple as that.
| | 01:00 | Click on a connector, hit your
Delete key on the keyboard and it's gone.
| | 01:05 | I am going to undo that one.
| | 01:07 | Ctrl+Z is our Undo function to bring
it back, because that looks just right.
| | 01:12 | So again, deleting a
connector, very, very simple.
| | 01:16 | Click on it, hit your Delete key
on the keyboard, and it's gone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and hiding connection points| 00:01 | So we have been doing a lot of work
with connectors, connecting shapes from one
| | 00:05 | to the next using these connectors and
we talked about these little points that
| | 00:09 | we see midway on our
rectangles called connection points.
| | 00:12 | We see them here on our decision box
as well and the corners and we see them
| | 00:16 | here on each of our shapes and showing up
about midway on each of the sides of a shape.
| | 00:21 | Those connection points allow us to
visually see where we want to connect shapes.
| | 00:26 | Now when we are done with a drawing, it
might be good if we were to make those
| | 00:30 | invisible, because if we were to print
this diagram that I have on my screen
| | 00:34 | right now, we would not see those
connection points on the print out.
| | 00:38 | So if you want to get a good idea, what
this is going to look like if we post it
| | 00:41 | to the web or print it out on a paper,
we can hide the connection points.
| | 00:45 | Now they will still be there,
they will just be invisible.
| | 00:47 | Let me show what I mean.
| | 00:48 | First of all, let's all
open up a new diagram here.
| | 00:51 | We will go to the Open button, give
that a click, from the Lesson4 folder of
| | 00:56 | your Exercise files, let's open up Flowchart4f.
| | 01:00 | So we can double click that to open it up.
| | 01:02 | Basically it's the same diagram but
I have removed the background, so you
| | 01:06 | can see that there are some other options under
the view menu that will come into play as well.
| | 01:11 | But let's go back to that connection points.
| | 01:13 | Right now, we can't see them.
| | 01:14 | So if we wanted to, for example move
this connection point on this connector.
| | 01:19 | We want to connect this box
to the top of the next box.
| | 01:22 | Well, we can move the entire thing or we
can go right to the connection here and
| | 01:26 | you can see as I am moving, as soon as
I touch a connection point, it turns red
| | 01:30 | which means I am going to glue to that
connection point, when I release you see
| | 01:34 | how I have changed it.
| | 01:35 | Now I saw where the connection point was, so it
made it easy for me to move it and release it.
| | 01:40 | So if we go up to the View menu now,
you will notice that there is a number of
| | 01:44 | options that are checked off here, Rulers.
| | 01:47 | So that's the Rulers that we see on the
top and down the left hand side of our
| | 01:50 | drawing page, the grid
that helps us line things up.
| | 01:54 | Guides, we haven't talked about yet
but we will look at that in a second and
| | 01:57 | there it is Connection point.
| | 01:59 | So if I click on Connection
points right now, you can see how they
| | 02:01 | disappear from the shapes.
| | 02:04 | That doesn't mean they are not there.
| | 02:05 | For example, if I come back here and I
want to connect one shape, my training
| | 02:08 | shape to this shape but on the top.
| | 02:10 | Look what happens as I get close to
the border, it does turn red, when it
| | 02:14 | touches or snaps to the
connection point so I can release.
| | 02:18 | So it's visually not there for me
to move to, but it's still there.
| | 02:21 | It's invisible and I do see a
highlight when I touch a connection point.
| | 02:25 | All right, let's check out some of the
other view options while we are at it.
| | 02:29 | We will go up to the View menu
here and let's turn off our Rulers.
| | 02:32 | You can see they have just disappeared
the horizontal one from the top and down
| | 02:36 | the left hand side here, I had a
vertical ruler, no longer being shown.
| | 02:40 | If I go up to the View menu, they don't
have check marks next to them. The grid does.
| | 02:43 | The grid is handy, if I want to line
shapes up, but if I turn the grid off, you
| | 02:47 | can see this is really what it is going
to look like on paper, if I was to send
| | 02:51 | this drawing to a color printer.
| | 02:54 | Now if I go up to View, you will see
the only other one left here with the
| | 02:57 | check marked is Guides.
| | 02:58 | Now before we turn that off.
| | 03:00 | Guides are also useful in lining up shapes.
| | 03:03 | But you need to have the
Ruler on to get those guides.
| | 03:06 | So we are going to go back up to View,
we are going to turn the Rulers back on
| | 03:10 | and now the easiest way to get a Guide
on to the page is to go up to the Ruler
| | 03:14 | and just simply drag it on to the drawing page.
| | 03:17 | So you can see, as I hover over the Ruler
here, it says drag to add a horizontal Guide.
| | 03:21 | So if I click and drag,
you can see the dotted line.
| | 03:25 | If I want to move it here for example, to
line the tops up of shapes that would be handy.
| | 03:30 | So if I went to this training shapes
here and I click and drag it, you can
| | 03:33 | see it kind of snaps.
| | 03:35 | Right up there to the Guide, and now I release.
| | 03:39 | Same thing here, if I want to move that
up, look what happens when I get close
| | 03:42 | to the Guide, boom snaps.
| | 03:44 | You can see it's going to be glued to
the Guide, there is a connection point
| | 03:47 | that's highlighted and I release.
| | 03:49 | So Guides are handy.
| | 03:50 | I can do vertical ones as
well by dragging from this ruler.
| | 03:54 | So once I have done all my lining up,
if I am done with the Guides, I can come
| | 03:58 | up to the View menu and just come
done here to Guides to see what it would
| | 04:02 | look when it prints. All right.
| | 04:04 | If we are going to turn them all back
on now, because that is the default we
| | 04:07 | will keep the rulers on, we will turn
the grid back on, we will go up to the
| | 04:11 | View menu, turn back on
the Guides, they are handy.
| | 04:13 | We will go up to View and turn
on our connection points as well.
| | 04:17 | Now to remove a guide, we just make sure,
we have selected it by clicking on it.
| | 04:21 | Hit your Delete key on the keyboard.
| | 04:23 | Same thing goes for the horizontal one, we
will click on it, hit Delete and it's gone.
| | 04:28 | We will talk more about those guides
a little bit later when we get into
| | 04:31 | aligning some of our shapes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing connector options| 00:01 | So we have been doing a lot of work
with diagrams that involve connectors,
| | 00:05 | connecting one shape to another like
you see here on my screen right now.
| | 00:09 | Well, it's good to know that there is
number of options when it comes to how
| | 00:12 | these connectors are
displayed on your drawing page.
| | 00:15 | So what we are going to do is open up
another diagram here, we will go to the
| | 00:18 | Open button and from your Lesson4
folder of your Exercise files, find this
| | 00:23 | one here, Flowchart4g.
| | 00:25 | Give that a click and open or double click it.
| | 00:27 | That's the shortcut and what we are
going to do is, work with this diagram by
| | 00:31 | adding a new connector that's
going to cross over some other lines.
| | 00:35 | So we will go up to our connector tool
up here on the toolbar, give it a click
| | 00:40 | and let's connect this box
to this very last shape here.
| | 00:43 | We will do it from this
connection point here on the far left.
| | 00:46 | So when it's highlighted.
| | 00:47 | We will click and drag down and
across until we see the connection point
| | 00:51 | highlighted on our final shape here and release.
| | 00:54 | Now it's kind of hard to see here but
this line which crosses over two other
| | 00:59 | lines is arched at the point of intersection.
| | 01:02 | So I am going to zoom in for you to
get a better look at that at 150% here.
| | 01:07 | You can see there is a tiny little arc
just to indicate that these lines are not
| | 01:10 | connected to one another but they
actually jump over the other lines.
| | 01:15 | So where do we set up the
options for how this appears?
| | 01:18 | We go up to the File menu, and
we will come down to Page Setup.
| | 01:22 | Page Setup is made up of many tabs.
| | 01:24 | You can see, we have got Print, Page,
Drawing Scale, Page Properties and then we
| | 01:28 | get to this one here called Layout and Routing.
| | 01:31 | Give that one a click.
| | 01:32 | Now we saw this in an earlier movie,
when we were talking about the actual
| | 01:35 | flowchart and the routing
of the flowchart itself.
| | 01:39 | So the direction that it
flows from left to right.
| | 01:41 | This affects our connection
points by the way as well.
| | 01:44 | So when we draw our connector lines.
| | 01:46 | If we are going left to right, then
when we draw our connector, we are going to
| | 01:51 | see an arrow at the end point.
| | 01:52 | So going from left to right, we are
going to see, as we look down here, lines
| | 01:57 | that have arrows on the right hand side.
| | 01:59 | Now we have different directions to
choose from for our style here which is
| | 02:02 | selected as flowchart.
| | 02:04 | Keep the style in mind because when we
talk about the line jumps down below,
| | 02:09 | you can see that we can add line jumps
to horizontal lines and if we click this
| | 02:14 | little drop down, vertical lines, last
routed line, last displayed line and as
| | 02:20 | we scroll down here, we have
also got first displayed line.
| | 02:23 | So what we are going to do is, by the
way we have got none up here as well.
| | 02:28 | We are going to make sure that we
add jumps to the horizontal lines.
| | 02:32 | That was what was selected and you can
see down here it's the horizontal line
| | 02:35 | that gets the jump, not the
vertical line jumping over the horizontal.
| | 02:39 | The line style or jump style is arc.
| | 02:42 | Now if we click this little drop down,
you will see some other options like Gap.
| | 02:46 | So I am going to select Gap and I am
going to click Apply, so you can see
| | 02:50 | it down below here.
| | 02:51 | See how my line that crosses over other lines
has a gap now, where there is an intersection.
| | 02:56 | So that could be a little bit more
confusing that an arc, other options include
| | 03:01 | a square, same as an arc but when we
click Apply, you will see it's kind of
| | 03:05 | squared off as opposed to rounded at the top.
| | 03:07 | There are some other options
including two, all the way to seven sides.
| | 03:13 | So, here is what two sides look like,
a triangle, when I click apply, you can
| | 03:18 | see it jumps over but
there is just two sides to it.
| | 03:21 | Three sides is going to
look like a square. Isn't it?
| | 03:23 | So when we click that and click Apply.
| | 03:26 | The only difference is,
there is bit of an angle.
| | 03:28 | It's not perfectly at right
angles for all three sides.
| | 03:32 | Now we have got 4, 5, 6 and 7.
| | 03:35 | 7 is almost going to look like our arc.
| | 03:38 | So many sides, it's going to
look like it's rounded. All right.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to arc, and
I kind of like that one.
| | 03:44 | It's the default but look
over here to the right hand side.
| | 03:47 | We can also adjust the spacing.
| | 03:49 | So the vertical spacing means,
how high is that arc going to go.
| | 03:52 | The horizontal spacing means how wide.
| | 03:55 | So from left to right, how wide are the
start and end points is going to be from
| | 04:00 | each other on this arc.
| | 04:01 | Totally adjustable, we have got a slider
here, we go all the way to the right, 1
| | 04:06 | is as high as we can go.
| | 04:07 | If I click Apply, you can see
it's so much larger arc here.
| | 04:11 | Much more visible, when you get into
complicated drawings that have many lines
| | 04:15 | that are crossing over,
you may want to adjust that.
| | 04:18 | Now back to our routing section here, we
know that we are using a flowchart style.
| | 04:23 | The direction is left to right, but
down below here where it says separate.
| | 04:28 | We can talk about how we separate the connector.
| | 04:31 | So do we want unrelated
lines to be separate lines?
| | 04:34 | In other words, not one line with branching out.
| | 04:37 | Every unrelated line in this
particular drawing will be a separate line.
| | 04:42 | Now there is a lots of other options.
| | 04:44 | We can have it so that every single
line in our diagram is a separate line so
| | 04:49 | nothing actually joins up and
branches off to a various shapes.
| | 04:53 | No lines means that every line in our
diagram will be linked to the other so
| | 04:59 | they won't be separated.
| | 05:00 | We could have one single line with
four or five different branches to the
| | 05:04 | various shapes and they would all be
kind of connected to one another, or we
| | 05:08 | could choose to use a routing style
which in this case is flowchart and just
| | 05:12 | accept the defaults.
| | 05:13 | So I am going to click that one right there.
| | 05:15 | Same thing goes for the overlap.
| | 05:17 | How are our lines going to
be overlapping one another?
| | 05:21 | So, do we want our line jumps down
below to be affected to just related lines,
| | 05:26 | all lines, no lines, or use the routing style?
| | 05:29 | I am going to choose all
lines here just for fun.
| | 05:32 | The appearance is straight,
our other option is curved.
| | 05:36 | So the lines in our diagram have right
angles in them that's because straight is
| | 05:41 | selected curved, we would see actual
curves in our lines and you can see in the
| | 05:44 | preview here what that might look like.
| | 05:47 | I am going to go back to straight.
| | 05:50 | So there is your options for
your layout and your routing.
| | 05:53 | Specifically your
connectors and what they look like.
| | 05:56 | Clicking Apply allows you to get a preview of it.
| | 05:58 | When you are happy, you
click OK to save those changes.
| | 06:01 | I am going to zoom back out to see
what this looks like at 75% and I am just
| | 06:05 | going to go back to my mouse pointer
tool here and click anywhere in a blank
| | 06:10 | space on my drawing page to see
what that looks like. Very cool.
| | 06:14 | Now you know, how to work with the
various options when it comes to the lines
| | 06:18 | and the connectors in your drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Formatting TextAdding and formatting text| 00:01 | Text can be a really big
part of any drawing in Visio.
| | 00:05 | If you think about it, almost every
drawing is going to have some kind of title.
| | 00:08 | The shapes that appear on the drawing
page, a lot of them will have labels
| | 00:12 | for example, and you may see headers and
footers, you may see tables with text in them.
| | 00:17 | Even bulleted lists in some cases.
| | 00:19 | So we are going to dedicate this entire
section to working with text and we are
| | 00:23 | going to start with the drawing.
| | 00:24 | So let's go to our Open button up
here on the toolbar and this time we are
| | 00:29 | navigating to the Lesson5 folder of
your Exercise files to find FloorPlan5a.
| | 00:35 | Give that one a click and click Open.
| | 00:38 | So what we are going to look at is, how
we add text to a drawing for one because
| | 00:42 | there is a couple of different ways and
then formating that text to look good.
| | 00:45 | For example, this Floor plan that we
are looking at up here at the top, I don't
| | 00:49 | even know, if you can read it, it's so
small, it says viewing room and it looks
| | 00:53 | like the room number appears down below, VR-210.
| | 00:57 | So we might want to spice
up that text a little bit.
| | 00:59 | We will format it in a moment, but
first let's talk about adding text and there
| | 01:03 | is a couple of different ways to do it.
| | 01:05 | If you are adding text that's not tied
to a shape, you probably want to use the
| | 01:09 | Text tool and it appears up here on our toolbar.
| | 01:13 | So if I click the text tool, whatever I
click on, down here in my drawing page
| | 01:18 | is going to be text.
| | 01:20 | So for example, across the bottom I
want to put in the date, down here in
| | 01:23 | the bottom left corner.
| | 01:24 | I just click, you can see how I am
zoomed in automatically and there are certain
| | 01:28 | font attributes that I am
working with by default.
| | 01:31 | So I am just going to type in a date
and if I hit enter, I am going to start a
| | 01:39 | new line, so I don't want to do that.
| | 01:41 | If I hit enter, you can see I can
have multiple lines of text here.
| | 01:44 | So I am just going to backspace, delete
it at a single line and all I am going
| | 01:48 | to do is, I am going to come
up to my pointer tool up here.
| | 01:50 | Give it a click, and you can see I am
zoomed back out and I have got these
| | 01:54 | handles showing up around my
text in the bottom left corner.
| | 01:57 | Now if I zoom in and I am going to
change my zoom level up here on the toolbar
| | 02:01 | to a 150% and I am going to scroll down
to the bottom and over to the left, so
| | 02:06 | you can see that text.
| | 02:08 | And it's actually in a text box
that overlaps left edge of the page.
| | 02:12 | So there are certain font
attributes that are being used here.
| | 02:15 | If I look up at my formatting toolbar, I
will see that the default font is Arial.
| | 02:20 | The font size is set to 12 points
and if I come over here to my Alignment
| | 02:24 | tools, it's centered.
| | 02:25 | So If I was to make this left aligned
for example, by clicking right here, you
| | 02:29 | can see it overlaps the edge of my page.
| | 02:31 | So when I see the four sided arrow,
it's going to the border of my text box.
| | 02:36 | That means I can move it.
| | 02:37 | I am going to just slides it in here and
release, so that it's on the page. All right.
| | 02:43 | Let's move back up to the top of our
screen now and work with our title because
| | 02:49 | we realise when we looked
at this, this was too small.
| | 02:52 | So if I click on this text, you can
see that the actual size is Arial, its 12
| | 02:58 | points, all of the defaults
we saw and we added the date.
| | 03:01 | So let's spice this up a little bit.
| | 03:03 | We will make it a little bigger and may
be change the font up a little bit too.
| | 03:06 | So I am going to choose this one here,
look at that, looks different already.
| | 03:12 | I am going to change the size.
| | 03:14 | I am going to bump it up to say,
18 points, look at that, looks cool.
| | 03:20 | Numbers appear a little bit smaller
with the font that we have chosen and if we
| | 03:24 | wanted to, we could do things like
change the font color, I am going to go up
| | 03:28 | here to my text color button.
| | 03:31 | I am going to change the color from Black
to a nice Blue color to 10% right there.
| | 03:37 | That looks better.
| | 03:39 | And I am going to click
outside of my selected text.
| | 03:42 | I am going to zoom back out to a 100%.
| | 03:46 | Actually, I am going to zoom right out,
so I can see the entire page and see if
| | 03:49 | that's big enough and sure enough,
| | 03:51 | that looks a lot better.
| | 03:53 | Now there is whole lot more, we can do
with text and we will do this as we move
| | 03:56 | through movies in this lesson,
but for now that looks good.
| | 03:59 | Now let's talk about adding text to an
actual shape, for example, here in our
| | 04:03 | viewing room, this is the projector
screen and you can see that it's been
| | 04:06 | rotated, so that it's on its
side here against this back wall.
| | 04:10 | So I am going to click right on the
projector screen with it selected and
| | 04:14 | simply going to type.
| | 04:15 | I am going to type in the
words projector and screen.
| | 04:19 | So I zoom in automatically.
| | 04:20 | Now you can see as I am typing, I am
inside a box but the way it's actually
| | 04:24 | going to appear is showing up in behind.
| | 04:27 | We will leave a space, screen and now
when I click outside of this text box you
| | 04:33 | can see I zoom back out and it
says projector screen right there.
| | 04:38 | Now to modify that text,
it's a little bit different.
| | 04:41 | When I click on the shape, you can see
there is a little yellow diamond here
| | 04:44 | representing the position of my text.
| | 04:47 | So if I wanted to move that away from
the screen, I could click and drag it
| | 04:51 | out a little bit, good.
| | 04:53 | And if I double click on it, I am back
in to modifying my text, where I could
| | 04:57 | type something else.
| | 04:58 | I could add to this or of
course I could format it as well.
| | 05:03 | So I am going to Bold this and
I am going to choose Italics.
| | 05:07 | Now you can see it happening in the
background here as well and that's the
| | 05:10 | way it's going to look.
| | 05:11 | Let's bump it up to 14 points as well
and when we click outside of our drawing,
| | 05:18 | we are zoomed back out and that's
much more legible the way it is there.
| | 05:22 | Now it's turned on its side
because my shape is turned on its side.
| | 05:26 | If I go over to one of these storage units here
and click on it and just type in storage unit.
| | 05:32 | You can see, it's a little bit too
big to fit inside the box, so I could go
| | 05:37 | to double lines here.
| | 05:39 | Now by default it's not going to show
up inside the box but of course we know,
| | 05:43 | we can reposition text, if we wanted to.
| | 05:46 | When I deselect by clicking, you can see the
word storage appears right outside the box.
| | 05:52 | So I am going to click on it and with
my little yellow diamond, I am going to
| | 05:55 | pull it away, because it's kind of
overlapping some of the buttons or the
| | 05:59 | handles on that storage units
and see what that looks like.
| | 06:03 | Good, if I wanted to, I can click on it
again and just move it over a little bit.
| | 06:07 | So it kind of covers both
storage units and there we go.
| | 06:11 | I might want to double click it to add
an S to storage in units and that might
| | 06:16 | make better sense right there.
| | 06:19 | Great, so to add text to a shape, we
simply click the shape and type away.
| | 06:24 | Of course, we can format, if we want.
| | 06:26 | Another option is to add text that's
not attached to anything by using the text
| | 06:31 | tool and I am going to do that, one more time.
| | 06:33 | I am going to click the Text tool and I
click down here anywhere and I am just
| | 06:38 | going to type in Coat Rack. All right.
| | 06:43 | When I go back to my mouse pointer
here, you can see Coat Rack appears.
| | 06:47 | Now we do have a Coat Rack back here.
| | 06:49 | If I was to move this over, that will
be nice if I could turn it on inside.
| | 06:53 | Well, we know that with any shape
including a text box, there a round circle at
| | 06:57 | the top is our rotate.
| | 06:59 | And click and drag, it snaps
into place. That looks good.
| | 07:04 | Now I can move it right over
here, where it says Coat Rack.
| | 07:09 | When I click inside my drawing, I
deselect it and you can see I am labelling the
| | 07:14 | items or the various shapes in my
drawing by either typing on the shape itself
| | 07:19 | or by using MyText tool.
| | 07:22 | So items like a title for example and
the state at the bottom which are not
| | 07:25 | attached to the shapes, we
want to use our text tool.
| | 07:28 | Otherwise, I would recommend just
clicking on the shape and type away.
| | 07:31 | Modify that text, if you need to by
double clicking it and don't forget you can
| | 07:35 | reposition with that little yellow diamond.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing paragraph settings| 00:01 | In the last lesson we looked at a
couple of different ways to add text to a
| | 00:05 | drawing and then to format that text.
| | 00:07 | Well, there is yet another way to
format text, but what I would like to do is
| | 00:10 | talk about Paragraph Text now.
| | 00:12 | We know that when we add text using the
Text Tool up here from the toolbar that
| | 00:17 | we can press Enter at the end
of a line to start a new line.
| | 00:20 | And as soon as we create more than
one line of text we get into what we
| | 00:24 | call Paragraph Text.
| | 00:25 | So what I like you to do is go up
to the Open button on your toolbar.
| | 00:29 | Give it a click and let's
open up FloorPlan5b this time.
| | 00:34 | Give that a click and open or
double-click. That's a shortcut.
| | 00:37 | And you will have what I have on my screen here.
| | 00:39 | So same drawing but you see an actual
paragraph of text has been added to this drawing.
| | 00:44 | So now we're going to
look at formatting this text.
| | 00:47 | So first of all I am going
to click on it to select it.
| | 00:49 | Next thing I am going to zoom in to 100%,
and I am going to scroll up so you can
| | 00:54 | see that paragraph of text.
| | 00:57 | The next thing I am going to do is go up to
Format and choose Text right here at the top.
| | 01:02 | Now the Text dialog box
will show up on your screen.
| | 01:06 | I am just going to move it out of the
way here so we can see some of the changes
| | 01:09 | that happen right in front of our eyes.
| | 01:11 | So the first thing you see is the Font
Tab is selected and the current font is
| | 01:15 | the default font Arial.
| | 01:17 | The Style is Regular and the Size is 12 points.
| | 01:20 | So we already know we can change fonts
and font sizes and we can do it from the
| | 01:24 | Formatting toolbar or we can do it from here.
| | 01:27 | I am going to change this to Verdana so
I am going to hit the V on my keyboard.
| | 01:32 | It takes me down to the bottom part of my list.
| | 01:35 | There is Verdana right there.
| | 01:37 | Give that a click and now when I
click Apply you can see there is an actual
| | 01:41 | change taking place back
here on my drawing page.
| | 01:44 | All right, so we'll leave the Font size
and the Style as is, but down below in
| | 01:50 | the General section here you can see
that the Case is set to Normal by default.
| | 01:54 | And we know that we can do All
Caps which should be called Uppercase.
| | 01:58 | Just initial caps or small caps if we
wanted to, but Normal is what we've got
| | 02:02 | and I am going to keep it at Normal.
| | 02:03 | Under General we have a
Position drop-down in Normal.
| | 02:06 | We also have Superscript and Subscript.
| | 02:09 | So if you've worked with fonts before
in another application like Microsoft
| | 02:12 | Word, you know what that means.
| | 02:14 | For example, if you had a math figure in
there with square or cubed you want the
| | 02:19 | two or three to be Superscript.
| | 02:22 | Subscript would be the opposite like in
H2O where the 2 is down below and smaller.
| | 02:28 | We also have some options for
Underlining, Strikethrough, and you can see None
| | 02:32 | is selected, but we can have our text
underlined or with a line through it.
| | 02:35 | That's Strikethrough.
| | 02:36 | We can change the Color of our text,
right now Black is the default.
| | 02:40 | If we click this drop-down let's choose a
Blue color that kind of matches our title.
| | 02:45 | Tint 10% in the Blue column
here is what I am selecting.
| | 02:50 | The Language is English.
| | 02:51 | We'll keep it at that.
| | 02:51 | We can also adjust the Transparency of our text
if we want to be able to kind of see through it.
| | 02:56 | I am going to leave it at 0
transparency which means it's totally opaque.
| | 03:00 | 100% transparency would make it invisible.
| | 03:03 | So I am going to click Apply just to
see what that looks like so far in the
| | 03:07 | background here, not bad.
| | 03:08 | Let's move on now to the Character Tab.
| | 03:10 | Here's where we get specific with
the actual characters in our paragraph.
| | 03:14 | Not the words, not the
sentences, the actual characters.
| | 03:17 | And the Scale you can see is defaulted
to 100% and the Spacing is Normal, but
| | 03:23 | we can change that up.
| | 03:24 | For example, if I click this drop-down
and change my Scale to 150% what do you
| | 03:29 | think is going to happen?
| | 03:30 | Well, when I click Apply you're going
to see it doesn't fit at the top of my
| | 03:33 | page anymore because I just bumped it up.
| | 03:35 | I've scaled it to one-and-
a-half times what it was.
| | 03:39 | So I am going to scale it back down and
I am going to go below 100%, it was kind
| | 03:43 | of cramped at the top.
| | 03:44 | So if I go to 90% for example, and I
click Apply, you can see it fits a little
| | 03:48 | bit better with a little space above
and below this border on my drawing page.
| | 03:53 | Now the Spacing for the
characters is set to Normal as well.
| | 03:57 | That's the space in between each character.
| | 04:00 | If I click this drop-down I
can do it Expanded or Condensed.
| | 04:04 | If I go Expanded, by default I see one
point, and if I click Apply you can see
| | 04:09 | that I am back into really spacing
things out and requiring more room to do so.
| | 04:15 | But I can knock that down if I wanted
to say half-a-point, by clicking the Down
| | 04:19 | Arrow here I would knock it down to 0.5.
| | 04:21 | If I click Apply that makes it kind of easy
to read, but not taking up quite so much space.
| | 04:28 | The opposite of Expanded is Condensed
and you can see -1 point is the default,
| | 04:33 | if I click Apply it's probably going to
be very difficult to read, and it's kind
| | 04:36 | of squished together.
| | 04:38 | So the opposite of Expanded being Condensed.
| | 04:40 | I actually want to move this up to
say -0.5 points when I click Apply.
| | 04:46 | That's pretty good right there.
| | 04:48 | I'll move this just right out of the way.
| | 04:49 | You can see that it's not a bad option.
| | 04:52 | So I am going to leave it at 90%
Condensed and Condensed by 0.5 points.
| | 04:57 | Let's go to the Paragraph Tab now
because here I do want to show you a couple of
| | 05:02 | things like Alignment and
the Alignment is set to Left.
| | 05:05 | If I wanted every line in this
paragraph to be centered of course I can change
| | 05:08 | the Alignment by clicking the
drop-down and choosing Centered.
| | 05:12 | If I click Apply now you'll see that change.
| | 05:16 | And there it is, every single line is centered.
| | 05:19 | All right, I am going to change back to
Left, but you can see the other options
| | 05:23 | are Right and Justified.
| | 05:26 | Justified means it would be flush
on the left and the right-hand side.
| | 05:29 | That's actually not a bad option.
| | 05:31 | If we click it and click Apply and move this
out of the way you can see what's happening.
| | 05:37 | So I might just leave it at Justified.
| | 05:39 | Other options are for Indentations.
| | 05:42 | So if we wanted to indent text we have
an option Before Text, After Text and
| | 05:47 | First Line in our text.
| | 05:49 | And we also have spacing before,
after and on the line itself.
| | 05:53 | So if we look at the spacing between
these lines it's not actually one line it's
| | 05:58 | 120% of one line, okay.
| | 06:02 | But we can adjust it by points if we wanted
to before and after each line if we needed to.
| | 06:07 | Now this one here the Text Block Tab is
kind of interesting because our text is
| | 06:13 | also lined up vertically inside the box.
| | 06:16 | So I used to increase the size of
this box you would see that it's actually
| | 06:19 | lined up in the middle vertically of this box.
| | 06:23 | So I am just going to move this up here.
| | 06:25 | I am going to click OK and I am going
to increase the size of my text box.
| | 06:29 | You can see as I do the text is
lined up on the left-hand side and the
| | 06:34 | right-hand side that the justified we
chose but it's lined up in the middle,
| | 06:39 | vertically of my text box.
| | 06:42 | So I am going to move that back up,
and I am going to change my Alignment for
| | 06:45 | the text blocks to the top of my text box.
| | 06:49 | So we go back up to Format now, down to
Text, and we select the Text Block Tab,
| | 06:56 | change it from Middle to Top.
| | 06:58 | Now when I click Apply you'll
see it bump right up to the top.
| | 07:02 | And that's normal if you are used to
working for example with the Word Processor
| | 07:06 | text starts at the top of the
page and works its way down.
| | 07:08 | We can also adjust the
Margins inside our text box.
| | 07:12 | So if we wanted it to come close to the
edge but not too close, we can adjust it
| | 07:17 | using points for the top-bottom, left and right.
| | 07:20 | We can also apply a Text
Background, we'll look at that next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a text background| 00:01 | We have been doing a lot of work
with text in the previous lessons.
| | 00:04 | So adding text to our drawings in
different ways and then making changes to that
| | 00:08 | text, to its appearance for example,
changing the font, the size, some of the
| | 00:13 | attributes like bolding, italics and so on.
| | 00:16 | Alignment options, we have looked at
paragraph text and the last thing we did
| | 00:21 | in the previous lesson was worked with this
paragraph text to change some of its spacing.
| | 00:26 | We looked at the margins.
| | 00:27 | We even changed the font color
to match the title over here.
| | 00:30 | What we haven't looked at yet
is adding a Text Background.
| | 00:33 | So for example, if we don't think that
this paragraph is standing out on the
| | 00:38 | page enough, we can put a backgrounding
behind it, and if we do that, we might
| | 00:42 | want to consider changing the font color again.
| | 00:44 | So that's how I would like to do next.
| | 00:45 | Now if you are skipping
to this lesson, no problem.
| | 00:48 | You are going to go to the Open button
up here, click on it, and you'll go to
| | 00:52 | your Lesson5 folder of your
Exercise Files and open up FloorPlan5c.
| | 00:58 | So here's our FloorPlan5c, not much change.
| | 01:02 | You can see they are all caught up with us.
| | 01:04 | With this paragraph text selected, I'd
like you to do that now just by clicking
| | 01:09 | on it, go up to the Format menu, come
down to Text and it's the block of text
| | 01:15 | that we are formating now.
| | 01:16 | So we go to the Text Block Tab.
| | 01:19 | So here's where we left
off in the previous lesson.
| | 01:22 | We changed the alignment so that no
matter how big this box is, the text is
| | 01:26 | lined up at the top of the box.
| | 01:28 | Here's where we can adjust the margins.
| | 01:30 | So how close the text comes to the edge of
the text box, and you can see it's in points.
| | 01:35 | But we haven't touched on
the Text Background yet.
| | 01:39 | Now the options are to
have a solid color or none.
| | 01:42 | But when we choose a solid color,
whatever it may be, we can also
| | 01:46 | adjust transparency.
| | 01:48 | So we are going to choose Solid Color here.
| | 01:51 | You can see the default color is
Black, but we have a drop-down button.
| | 01:54 | So we can give it a click and then we can
go to something like a Dark Blue for example.
| | 01:58 | Now I am going to come down here to
Tint 10% in the Blue column and I am
| | 02:04 | going to click on it.
| | 02:06 | Now of course, if I used to click Apply
here and look at the background, you can
| | 02:10 | see that my text, because
it's selected appears in black.
| | 02:14 | Now if I click OK and I come in here
and I just click outside of my text box,
| | 02:19 | the change was made for me, but that
may not be the best color combination.
| | 02:24 | So I am going to click again on this text.
| | 02:26 | I am going to go back up to Format,
click on Text here at the top and go to
| | 02:32 | my Text block again.
| | 02:33 | So here I can either change the
color, I can adjust the transparency.
| | 02:38 | So I am going to slide it across half
way to 50% and click Apply, and you can
| | 02:42 | see that that makes the text
a little bit easier to read.
| | 02:45 | Another option that will might be to
leave it at 0%, I am going to slide it all
| | 02:49 | the way across and go up to my Font
Tab and change my Font color to White.
| | 02:55 | So I am going to go to White right
here and I am going to click Apply.
| | 03:00 | So you can see our change here, we've
got our white text, and see that it's
| | 03:06 | using the Verdana font.
| | 03:08 | This is the stuff we did in
the previous lesson, 12 points.
| | 03:11 | But with White selected here and
I click OK to see the full page.
| | 03:15 | It's actually a little bit easier to read.
| | 03:17 | I am going to de-select over here.
| | 03:19 | Yet the color combination goes with my title.
| | 03:22 | So obviously, this is something
that you want to play around with.
| | 03:25 | Play around with the transparencies.
| | 03:28 | In fact, if I look at this, I am
thinking may be it's not the greatest looking.
| | 03:32 | I may want to add a background to my
entire drawing that matches up with this to
| | 03:37 | make it really work.
| | 03:38 | So experiment with some of the font
attributes and changes you can make.
| | 03:42 | Look at the font background or
the text background and play around
| | 03:45 | with transparencies until you get
it exactly the way you need it to
| | 03:49 | for this particular drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and editing bulleted lists| 00:01 | Continuing on our theme of working
with text, we are going to explore
| | 00:05 | bulleted lists now.
| | 00:07 | Visio is not a Word processing
application and you need to keep that in mind
| | 00:10 | when creating a bulleted list because
the possibilities are not so endless as
| | 00:15 | they are with a Word processing application.
| | 00:18 | There is a degree of automation built
in, but you will see that it's quite
| | 00:22 | limited compared to
Microsoft Word for example.
| | 00:25 | So let's insert a bulleted
list right here in our floor plan.
| | 00:29 | If you are jumping to this lesson, you
can get all caught up by going to the
| | 00:32 | Open button up here, navigating to the
Lesson5 folder of your Exercise Files and
| | 00:37 | you can double-click FloorPlan5d,
double-click that or click and click Open to
| | 00:44 | get all caught up with us.
| | 00:45 | All right, so here's a
good spot for a bulleted list.
| | 00:47 | We will create an inventory right here.
| | 00:50 | To do that, we need to create a text box
first, so we will go up to our Standard
| | 00:53 | Toolbar up here and click the Text Tool,
and let's just draw a marquee selection
| | 00:58 | of where our text box should go.
| | 01:00 | How about right there?
| | 01:01 | Now as soon as I let go with the mouse,
you can see I am zoomed in to my text
| | 01:06 | box and my cursor is flashing in the center of
the box, centered vertically and horizontally.
| | 01:12 | So before we start typing we can change
that and we know how to do that from the
| | 01:16 | previous lesson, right?
| | 01:17 | We go up to the Format menu, down to
Text here, and we are going to go to first
| | 01:23 | of all our Text block tab.
| | 01:25 | Let's go right here and we will
change the Alignment from Middle to Top.
| | 01:31 | So with that selected we can click Apply.
| | 01:34 | And if we go back to our Font, you can
see that the default font is Arial and we
| | 01:39 | are going to be using 12 point font,
if that's fine, we'll leave it as is.
| | 01:43 | We move over to Character and we are
going to leave the Scaling at 100%.
| | 01:47 | But when we get to the Paragraph Tab we
are going to change our Alignment from
| | 01:50 | Centered here which is
horizontal centering to left aligned.
| | 01:54 | So click on Left and we will click OK.
| | 01:58 | Now look where our cursor is flashing up
here in the top left corner of our box.
| | 02:03 | So I am going to type-in the word
Inventory here, and I am going to hit Enter
| | 02:07 | twice just to drop-down.
| | 02:09 | Now I am going to enter the actual
items in this room, so I will start with the
| | 02:13 | Projector, we will type-in
Screen so we have one of those.
| | 02:19 | We have Seating and I am going to put
in brackets 8, we also have Storage and
| | 02:26 | there are two of those units, and
we have a Coat Rack and a Trash Can.
| | 02:35 | All right, so they are the items in our room.
| | 02:40 | Let's add the table that the
projector is sitting on to.
| | 02:43 | All right, so these are the items that
would actually look good if they were
| | 02:48 | bulleted excluding the title at the top.
| | 02:51 | So let's highlight the title.
| | 02:53 | We will make a changed to it, I am
going to bold it and I am going to center
| | 02:57 | it in the text box.
| | 02:58 | Notice that only the title is centered
and the rest of my items because they are
| | 03:02 | not selected or not affected.
| | 03:03 | Now I am going to select from
Projector all the way down to the end of table.
| | 03:08 | And now I am going to go up to my
Formatting Toolbar and there is a
| | 03:11 | bullet button here.
| | 03:12 | So when I click Bullets you can see the
bullets that I used last show up here.
| | 03:16 | Now your bullets maybe different
depending on what your default is set at.
| | 03:20 | But we can change those bullets and we
can do a little bit of formatting as well.
| | 03:25 | So let's do that next.
| | 03:27 | We'll go up to the Format menu again,
once again we will click Text and you may
| | 03:32 | have noticed that there is tab
at the end here labeled Bullets.
| | 03:35 | So we click on that and you can see
why my bullets show up as little arrows.
| | 03:39 | That's what's selected here.
| | 03:41 | You may have black dots.
| | 03:42 | Well, we can make another selection
from the list here and click Apply to see
| | 03:46 | what that might look like.
| | 03:48 | We can try Check Marks and Apply, and I
am thinking, maybe these boxes over here
| | 03:54 | on the left might be the best because
when we print this out if we want it to,
| | 03:59 | we could check out for those boxes.
| | 04:00 | We can see the Font size is being used for
the bullets not the text, it's set at 100%.
| | 04:06 | That means it's going to
be equal to the font size.
| | 04:09 | So if I want to make those boxes a
little bigger, I can bump them up with the
| | 04:13 | arrows to 150%, let's say.
| | 04:16 | When I click Apply you can see what it does,
it stretches my text box to accommodate.
| | 04:21 | So maybe that was a little bit too
much, we can knock it back down to 120%,
| | 04:25 | click Apply to see what that looks
like and that makes better sense.
| | 04:27 | We can also adjust the Text position, if
I bump this up from 0 inches to say 0.5
| | 04:34 | inches and click Apply, look at the
space between my bullets and my text.
| | 04:39 | I am going to bump that down to 0.2
and see what that looks like, and that's
| | 04:44 | pretty good right there.
| | 04:46 | If I didn't like any of the bullets, I
can choose from here and like I said,
| | 04:49 | this is limited, relatively limited
to what you might be used to in a Word
| | 04:53 | processing application like Microsoft Word.
| | 04:56 | But if you wanted to come up with your
own character, you can enter it here and
| | 05:00 | use a custom bullet.
| | 05:01 | So for example, if I put the asterisk
in here as a custom bullet and click
| | 05:07 | Apply, you can see I have got the
asterisk showing up now for my bullet.
| | 05:12 | I was better off with the squares,
so I am going to go back to that, with
| | 05:15 | that selected click OK.
| | 05:17 | And I have got my nice
looking bulleted list here.
| | 05:21 | We will go up to the mouse pointer and
give it a click to zoom back out and see
| | 05:24 | the finished product.
| | 05:26 | We will de-select it by
clicking outside the selected area.
| | 05:31 | So there it is, now of course we know
we can do some formatting with a text box
| | 05:35 | as well, if we want to put a background
on it like we did up here, it might make
| | 05:38 | it stand out a little better, maybe the
Inventory shouldn't be centered since we
| | 05:42 | don't have borders around our text box.
| | 05:44 | So I am just going to make a change now.
| | 05:47 | To make a change to a bulleted list,
we double-click it that gets us back in.
| | 05:52 | I am going to make sure that just
Inventory is selected with a double-click and
| | 05:56 | I am going to make that Left
Justified like the rest of my list.
| | 06:00 | So I will click outside of that selected
box to see the finished results, perfect!
| | 06:04 | I might want to just move it over a
little bit so I click once, just so I can
| | 06:08 | move this box over a little bit by
clicking-and-dragging, double-clicking would
| | 06:12 | get me inside the box to
make changes to the list itself.
| | 06:16 | So de-selecting, we click
outside the box. That looks great.
| | 06:20 | Just like that I would save my
changes and be happy with my bulleted list.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating tables| 00:01 | I sometimes get asked by people who use
Visio, how do I get a table into a drawing?
| | 00:07 | Well, those are people who are
probably used to using Microsoft Word or some
| | 00:10 | other Word processing application
where it's as easy as going up to the
| | 00:14 | toolbar and clicking the Table button or
going to the Insert menu and finding Table there.
| | 00:19 | Well, if you do that in Visio you won't find it.
| | 00:22 | However, there are some table like
shapes that you can add to a drawing by
| | 00:26 | opening up the right stencil and
dragging them on to your drawing page.
| | 00:30 | So let's open up a drawing that we
can use a table in, we will go the Open
| | 00:34 | button and navigate to the Lesson5
folder of your Exercise Files and we will
| | 00:38 | open up FloorPlan5e.
| | 00:40 | So give it a click, click Open and you
will have the same diagram that we have
| | 00:44 | been working within previous lessons
but without the bulleted list here.
| | 00:48 | Instead we will insert a table
that lists our inventory perhaps.
| | 00:52 | So we are going to start actually by
putting in the title inventory, I am going
| | 00:56 | to click on the Text Tool, I will
just click down here in my drawing and
| | 01:00 | type-in the word Inventory.
| | 01:02 | All right, I will go back to my
mouse pointer here and you can see that
| | 01:06 | Inventory is selected.
| | 01:08 | I can move it over that means
to a spot where it makes sense.
| | 01:12 | I might even bold that so it
stands out a little bit, there we go.
| | 01:15 | I will de-select it by clicking
outside of the selection handles.
| | 01:19 | Now, here's a good spot for a table, but
we need to go find that shape in a stencil.
| | 01:25 | Here is where we find it, we go up to
the File menu, we go down to Shapes, down
| | 01:30 | to the Business category and you will
see here we've got Charts and Graphs.
| | 01:35 | Well, it's the Charting Shapes
that contain table type shapes.
| | 01:40 | So let's go to Charting Shapes
(US units) and give that a click.
| | 01:43 | That opens up over here in our Shapes window.
| | 01:46 | And you can see down below we have a
Grid, it looks like we have row and
| | 01:50 | column headers, we have got Process chart,
Feature comparison, these are all like tables.
| | 01:55 | So we will bring in our grid how about.
| | 01:57 | So we click on the Grid, drag it into
our drawing, you can see the size that
| | 02:01 | it's going to show up as by default,
but I am going to move it here so that the
| | 02:06 | left edge is under the
word Inventory and release.
| | 02:10 | Now before it's actually drawn we
need to choose the number of rows, we are
| | 02:14 | going to need and the number of columns,
so I am going to go to Rows here and I
| | 02:18 | am going to select 8, and the number
of Columns I am going to select 2 here.
| | 02:22 | So I am going to scroll up and choose 2.
| | 02:25 | So this will allow me a number of rows,
a good number of rows to add the items
| | 02:30 | in my inventory, and maybe even a title
at the top of each column, and then I am
| | 02:34 | going to put the Quantity in the second column.
| | 02:37 | So when I click OK, you can see how
it's drawn there, it's placed nicely
| | 02:40 | under the word Inventory.
| | 02:41 | I am going to move it over just a little
bit more to the left here, and that's a
| | 02:46 | good spot right there.
| | 02:48 | Now to start entering our data we
actually just click on the cell in the table
| | 02:52 | where we need to type and type away.
| | 02:54 | So my first row is going to be Title.
| | 02:56 | So what I am going to type-in here is Item.
| | 02:58 | I am going to click in the next
cell here and type-in Quantity.
| | 03:03 | I am going to click under the word
item here, and actually if I go up to Item
| | 03:09 | and bold that it might look more
like a heading, same thing for Quantity.
| | 03:14 | Now the items down below don't need to
be bolded, but they will be on the list.
| | 03:18 | So let's start with our Projector, we will
click under Quantity and we do have one of those.
| | 03:25 | We will click under Projector, let's do
Screen, and we have to click in the next
| | 03:31 | field here to type-in the number 1.
| | 03:33 | That's how many screens we have.
| | 03:36 | Seating, we have got 8 of those,
so we will type-in the number 8.
| | 03:40 | How about the Coat Rack?
| | 03:44 | We have one Coat Rack and we have also got
Storage here, we have actually got 2 storage units.
| | 03:54 | We have got a Table, again just 1 of those and
Trash Can, and 1 of those in the room as well.
| | 04:06 | All right, so I am going to click
outside of the selected area, and because I am
| | 04:11 | zoomed in to get the full picture, I
am going to go up to my Standard Toolbar
| | 04:15 | where it says 100% here for the Zoom level.
| | 04:17 | I am going to choose Page to zoom
back out and see the finished product.
| | 04:21 | Now obviously I can do a lot more
formatting with this, I could change the font,
| | 04:26 | the font colors and sizes, the table
colors and the borders and so on if I
| | 04:30 | wanted to spend that kind of time.
| | 04:32 | But now you know how to get a
table into a drawing in Visio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating headers and footers| 00:01 | The last topic that's somewhat text-related
that I would like to discuss now is
| | 00:06 | headers and footers.
| | 00:07 | If you have ever used a Word
processing application like Microsoft Word for
| | 00:11 | example, you probably know
about headers and footers.
| | 00:14 | You type-in text once that appears at
the top of every page, a Header or at the
| | 00:19 | bottom of every page, a Footer.
| | 00:21 | It saves you a lot of time and effort
by being able to type that in only once
| | 00:25 | and have it appear on multiple pages.
| | 00:27 | Well, we can do the same
thing in Visio with a drawing.
| | 00:30 | We will never see it on the drawing
page but we will see it on the printed copy
| | 00:34 | and in Print Preview. So let's do that.
| | 00:36 | We will open up a diagram
that has multiple pages first.
| | 00:39 | So we will go to the Open button and
in your Lesson5 folder of your Exercise
| | 00:43 | Files find FloorPlan5f, give
that a click and open it up.
| | 00:50 | So this diagram opening up here doesn't
look much like a floor plan, it's more
| | 00:54 | like a network diagram, but it does
have multiple pages, there is one labeled
| | 00:58 | Topology then we have got different
rows and racks here for our other pages.
| | 01:03 | All right, we don't need the
external data showing up down below so we
| | 01:08 | will close it by clicking the Close button
down here to get a better view of our diagram.
| | 01:12 | All right, so in our diagram with
multiple pages it might be good to have some
| | 01:17 | information that shows up maybe at
the top of every page and at the bottom.
| | 01:21 | So to do that we are going to create
a Header and a Footer and we access
| | 01:26 | that from the View menu.
| | 01:27 | So we'll go up to View and now we'll
come down to Header and Footer, give that a
| | 01:32 | click and you will see in the Header
and Footer dialog box we've got a Header
| | 01:35 | column and a Footer column, and we've
got three fields for each one of those.
| | 01:41 | So we can have text that shows up on
the left side at the top, center, or right
| | 01:46 | side at the top of every page or at
the bottom of every page in the left,
| | 01:51 | centered or right-hand side.
| | 01:53 | So let's type-in some text that
shows up at the top center of every page.
| | 01:57 | We'll type-in XYZ Inc.
| | 02:04 | - All Rights Reserved, okay.
| | 02:09 | Now in the bottom right-hand corner of
every page, maybe it would be good to
| | 02:12 | have the date in there.
| | 02:13 | I am going to type-in January 22, 2007.
| | 02:19 | Now there is some formatting that I
can do with a Header and a Footer.
| | 02:22 | I can change the margins, in other words,
how close to the bottom of the page or
| | 02:27 | the top of the page does
my Header and Footer come.
| | 02:29 | It's a quarter-inch right now, and I
can format the font as well, by clicking
| | 02:34 | Choose Font I can change the default,
which you can see back here is 12 points
| | 02:39 | and Arial, you can also it here.
| | 02:41 | I am going to change -- I am going to
leave the Font at Arial, but I am going to
| | 02:44 | change the Style to Bold, and I am
going to change the Size down to 11 points.
| | 02:51 | The Color I am also going to
change from Black here to a Light Blue.
| | 02:55 | So we'll come down here and select Blue.
| | 02:58 | And if I wanted to I could choose a
different Script as well, I can put a line
| | 03:03 | through it with Strikeout or a line under
it with Underline, but I won't select those.
| | 03:08 | I am just going to click OK and
finish editing my text and formatting it.
| | 03:13 | Now when I click OK, I will
actually add the Header and Footer.
| | 03:17 | Now like I said, you won't see the
header or the footer text on the drawing page
| | 03:21 | you will only see it on the printed
page or if we select Print Preview.
| | 03:25 | So let's go up to our toolbar here
and click on the Print Preview button.
| | 03:31 | So here you can see in blue at
the very top, my Header, XYZ Inc.
| | 03:35 | - All Rights Reserved, and there in
the bottom right-hand corner is my
| | 03:39 | Footer, today's date.
| | 03:41 | As I flip through the various pages, you
can see it appears on every single page.
| | 03:46 | All right, let's close our Print
Preview to return back to the drawing page
| | 03:51 | knowing that we do have a Header
and a Footer setup in our drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Using Snap and GlueViewing active snap and glue elements| 00:01 | Okay folks, it's time to talk now
about something called Snap and Glue.
| | 00:05 | Without even realizing it you have seen
the effects of Snap and Glue elements.
| | 00:10 | In previous lessons as we dragged
shapes onto a drawing page, you may have
| | 00:14 | noticed that it kind of snapped into
position making it easy to line up objects.
| | 00:20 | And then when we connected shapes
together, you may have noticed after we
| | 00:23 | moved a shape around it stayed
connected because the connector was seemingly
| | 00:28 | glued to the shape.
| | 00:29 | Well, these are all Snap and Glue
elements that are setup by default in Visio
| | 00:33 | and you have access to them
if you need to make changes.
| | 00:36 | So the first thing we are going to
do is just create a new blank drawing.
| | 00:40 | We will go up to our New
button and click the drop-down.
| | 00:42 | Let's move down to General and then
across to Basic Diagram (US units).
| | 00:49 | So this gives us a new
blank drawing to work with.
| | 00:52 | Now you can see that on my blank page
here I do see the grid, so this will come
| | 00:56 | in handy when I want to align shapes up,
and you'll see those shapes actually
| | 01:00 | snapped to the grid lines themselves.
| | 01:03 | But the elements that we are talking
about are setup by default in an area
| | 01:08 | called Snap and Glue, and we
access that from the Tools menu.
| | 01:12 | So Tools, and there it is Snap and Glue,
give that a click, and here is our dialog box.
| | 01:17 | So you can see that under the currently
active column, Snap and glue are both turned on.
| | 01:24 | So both of these features are optional,
if we didn't want to use Snap and Glue,
| | 01:29 | we could turn them off by
clicking these checkboxes.
| | 01:32 | As soon as we do that, you will notice
that the Snap to and the Glue to columns
| | 01:37 | are no longer available.
| | 01:39 | So we will leave them both turned on and
we will talk about the Snap to column now.
| | 01:43 | You will notice that Ruler subdivisions,
so those lines we see on the grid are
| | 01:48 | selected as is the entire grid itself.
| | 01:51 | So when we pull shapes on, we
will snap to those lines on the grid.
| | 01:55 | What's not selected is
Alignment box and Shape extensions.
| | 01:59 | But Shape geometry so the actual shape
is something that would be snapped to, so
| | 02:04 | would Guides, we looked at those
briefly in a previous lesson, but we will look
| | 02:07 | at them again coming up shortly.
| | 02:10 | Shape intersections, handle and
vertices are snapped to by default but
| | 02:14 | Connection points are.
| | 02:16 | Under the Glue column we are only gluing
to Guides and Connection points by default.
| | 02:22 | If we wanted to glue to shape vertices
and shape handles as well as the entire
| | 02:27 | shape itself, the shape geometry,
we could turn those on as well.
| | 02:32 | So we'll leave the defaults as is and
in the next lesson what we'll do is go in
| | 02:37 | and take a look at the effects of Snap and Glue.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Snapping and gluing to items| 00:01 | In the previous lesson we opened up the Snap
and Glue dialog box to check out the defaults.
| | 00:06 | So we know for example that shapes
when we drag them from a stencil on to the
| | 00:10 | drawing page, we will snap to our grid
lines, and shapes will actually glue to a
| | 00:15 | guide line if we use guides.
| | 00:17 | We know that shapes will be glued to one
another when we use connections as well.
| | 00:22 | So let's test this out and check out
the defaults on our basic diagram here.
| | 00:27 | Now if you are skipping to this lesson
you won't have this on your page, you
| | 00:29 | need to go to your new drop-down up
here, go down to General and select
| | 00:35 | Basic Diagram (US units).
| | 00:37 | That will get you all caught up with us.
| | 00:39 | All right, before we start dragging
some of the shapes from a stencil onto our
| | 00:43 | drawing page, I want to zoom in a
little bit, so I am going to change my Zoom
| | 00:47 | Level from 50% up here to 100%.
| | 00:50 | If you need to do the same,
go ahead and do that now.
| | 00:53 | All right, let's go to our basic
square here on our Basic Shapes Stencil and
| | 00:58 | click-and-drag it onto our drawing page.
| | 01:00 | You can see as I move across it's
actually snapping from grid line to grid line,
| | 01:05 | I can actually place it in
between these grid lines.
| | 01:09 | And that's because the Snap feature is
turned on and guidelines is selected in
| | 01:14 | the Snap to section of my dialog box.
| | 01:17 | So if I wanted it perfectly centered on
4 inches and 7 inches, I could do that,
| | 01:22 | I just move it here and up a little
bit and release, and it's snapped right
| | 01:27 | into position, perfect!
| | 01:28 | All right, let's do that with another
shape here, let's get our hexagon, and
| | 01:34 | we'll drag it in just to the left of our box.
| | 01:38 | And you can see because of the grid
lines it's easy to align things up, I can
| | 01:42 | just snap it right in there and
release and know that it's perfectly lined up
| | 01:46 | with the shape next to it.
| | 01:48 | All right, now we can also snap to guides.
| | 01:51 | Now when we snap to guides we also glue
to guides by default, we saw that in the
| | 01:56 | dialog box in the last lesson.
| | 01:58 | So guides can be brought
onto the drawing page by simply
| | 02:00 | clicking-and-dragging them onto the page.
| | 02:03 | So right from the Ruler I am going
to click straight down and release.
| | 02:08 | Now when I click on shape and I move it
down onto that guide, you will see it's
| | 02:12 | snapped to the guide but
also it gets glued to the guide.
| | 02:16 | I know that by that little
red box I see in the bottom.
| | 02:20 | So when I release because it's glued
and these three nodes have turned red to
| | 02:24 | indicate so, I can move my guide
now and the shape will move with me.
| | 02:31 | If the glue option wasn't selected in
the dialog box for Snap and Glue, then I'd
| | 02:35 | move my guide and my shape
would stay put right where it is.
| | 02:38 | All right, we also see glue when
we connect shapes to one another.
| | 02:44 | So let's go up to our Connector Tool up
here, I am going to give it a click, and
| | 02:48 | I am going to connect one shape to the other.
| | 02:50 | Now I can go from a connection point to
a connection point if I wanted to, from
| | 02:55 | a shape to an entire shape, or I can
use some automatic connecting as well.
| | 03:01 | So if I move to this connection point
without clicking on it, you can see how
| | 03:05 | the next shape, the
neighboring shape is highlighted.
| | 03:08 | So all I have to do is actually click right
on this little arrow to connect the two shapes.
| | 03:14 | So that happened automatically.
| | 03:16 | Now if I used to move the shapes
around, let's see what happens.
| | 03:19 | I am going to go up to my Pointer
Tool and I am going to move this up and a
| | 03:24 | little bit higher than the shape on the left.
| | 03:27 | You can see how it's still connected
but it's dynamic, it's changed to a
| | 03:31 | different connection point.
| | 03:32 | If I move it down, look at this, it's
moved now to the top connection point.
| | 03:38 | So this is what we call as
shape-to-shape connection.
| | 03:42 | If I wanted it connected right to a connection
point, that's a different kind of connection.
| | 03:46 | So I am going to click on the connection,
I am going to hit Delete on my keyboard.
| | 03:50 | I am going to go back to the Connector
Tool here and I am going to go right to
| | 03:55 | the actual connection point
that I want to connect to.
| | 03:58 | I am going to go to this one and I am
going to click-and-drag across to an
| | 04:02 | actual connection point here and release.
| | 04:05 | If I go to the Shape then I
get that dynamic connection.
| | 04:08 | But I want to go right to
connection point and release.
| | 04:11 | All right, so if I go back to my Pointer
Tool now and I move this box down, will
| | 04:18 | it change connection points?
| | 04:20 | No, it doesn't move to the top
connection point like last time, it stays glued
| | 04:25 | or connected to the connection point I selected.
| | 04:28 | So that's snapping and gluing in a nutshell.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Using LayersAssigning a shape to a layer| 00:01 | It's time now to talk about layers
and we are going to dedicate this entire
| | 00:05 | section to working with layers.
| | 00:07 | Layers are very good in helping you to
stay organized because they allow to work
| | 00:11 | on just the pieces of a
drawing that you want to work on.
| | 00:13 | Let's use an example of a room drawing
that has walls, maybe some furniture in
| | 00:18 | there and some equipment.
| | 00:19 | If we put those all on separate
layers and we can work on just the specific
| | 00:23 | areas that we want to work on
while protecting the others.
| | 00:26 | Now that's the other nice thing
about layers is that it does allow you to
| | 00:29 | protect or lock parts of your
drawing so you can't make changes to those
| | 00:34 | specific areas or layers.
| | 00:36 | So first thing we need to do is open up
a drawing, we will go to the Open button
| | 00:39 | up here on your standard toolbar,
navigate to the Lesson7 folder of your
| | 00:44 | Exercise Files and open up RoomDrawing7a.
| | 00:47 | So you can double-click that or one-click
and Open does the same thing, brings
| | 00:51 | it up on our screen.
| | 00:53 | Now when we create drawing especially
when we use some of the templates that
| | 00:56 | come with Visio, shapes and walls and
equipment and all the stuff you see on
| | 01:01 | this particular drawing will get
assigned to specific layers that are
| | 01:05 | automatically created for this drawing.
| | 01:08 | So to see those layers we go up to the
View menu and come down to Layer Properties.
| | 01:14 | These are the layer properties for
this particular drawing, and down the
| | 01:18 | left-hand column here under Name is
where you see all of the layers that exist
| | 01:22 | in this particular drawing.
| | 01:23 | So we have got the Building Envelope and the
next column here says 46 under the Number column.
| | 01:28 | That indicates the number
of shapes on this layer.
| | 01:32 | Down below that you see Dimensions
has 3, Door has 17 shapes on it, the
| | 01:37 | Equipment layer has 3 fixtures, has
only 1, the Furniture layer has 19.
| | 01:41 | Now just so you know, if you are
looking at the drawing it's like, wow, there
| | 01:45 | aren't that many shapes.
| | 01:46 | That's because shapes can
appear on more than one layer.
| | 01:49 | So for example, if I am working on the
Furniture layer I may want the chairs to
| | 01:53 | be in there, I may also want the screen,
the table, the projector and so on to
| | 01:57 | be in there as well.
| | 01:59 | Well, the projector and screen are also
going to show up on the equipment layer
| | 02:02 | if I just wanted to work on equipment.
| | 02:04 | So keep that in mind that shapes can
be assigned to more than one layer.
| | 02:09 | So we are going to come back to this
screen a little bit later on the Layer
| | 02:12 | Properties and spend a lot of time talking
about the various columns and options here.
| | 02:16 | Right now though we will click Cancel
because what I want to focus on now is how
| | 02:19 | we assign shapes to be on a layer.
| | 02:23 | So there are a couple of ways we can do that.
| | 02:25 | First of all, we can select the shape.
| | 02:27 | Let's do that by clicking on this chair.
| | 02:29 | Now that's one single chair that's selected.
| | 02:32 | If I right-click it, you can see I have
got the Format menu here and down at the
| | 02:37 | bottom of the Format menu I have got
Layer, and if I click that, you will see
| | 02:42 | that this particular shape, I am going
to move it out of the way so you can see
| | 02:45 | it's still selected, is located on
the Movable Furnishings layer that was
| | 02:49 | created as part of the template
as well as the Furniture layer.
| | 02:53 | So if I wanted to assign this to the
non-movable furnishings, I could, by
| | 02:58 | clicking the checkbox.
| | 02:59 | If I wanted to take it off of the
Movable Furnishings layer I click that
| | 03:03 | checkbox to remove the check mark.
| | 03:05 | So you can see how easy it is just
to assign a specific shape to a layer.
| | 03:11 | Assign it to every layer so no matter
what layer I am working on, I will always
| | 03:15 | have that chair on it or to none.
| | 03:17 | So it doesn't actually appear on any layers.
| | 03:20 | I am going to leave it where it was, to
Movable Furnishings and on the Furniture layer.
| | 03:27 | Now I will click OK to return to my drawing.
| | 03:31 | So it doesn't make sense to just have
one chair when I've got 8 on the layer,
| | 03:34 | I can marquee-select by clicking-and-dragging
around the outside of all eight chairs.
| | 03:39 | And you can see I also got the title in
here, so I am going to restart that and
| | 03:42 | start a little bit lower.
| | 03:46 | And when I see just my
chairs are selected. There we go.
| | 03:49 | I can go up to the Format
menu and come down to Layer.
| | 03:52 | That's the other option.
| | 03:54 | Same dialog box shows up, you can see
its part of those two layers and if I want
| | 03:58 | it to I could put it on another layer.
| | 04:01 | So all eight chairs then
would appear on that layer.
| | 04:03 | Okay, I am going to just de-select and click OK.
| | 04:09 | So that's how we get shapes onto a layer,
but it's not going to make a whole lot
| | 04:13 | of sense until we start talking about
the actual properties of a layer and how
| | 04:17 | we can stay organized by
adjusting those properties.
| | 04:20 | We are going to look at that next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a new layer| 00:02 | All right, just before we do dive into
the properties of our layers, you need to
| | 00:06 | know how to create a new layer for
yourself and it's pretty easily actually with
| | 00:10 | the drawing opened and you can see
I am working on RoomDrawing7a here.
| | 00:14 | For you to get all caught up
you can open up RoomDrawing7b.
| | 00:16 | So we go to the Open button,
navigate to your Lesson7 folder, select
| | 00:22 | RoomDrawing7b and then click
Open or you can double-click it.
| | 00:25 | That's the next shortcut.
| | 00:26 | That gets you all caught up with us.
| | 00:28 | So here we are with our drawing and
now we want to create a new layer.
| | 00:32 | Why would you want to create a new layer?
| | 00:34 | Here is a really good example.
| | 00:36 | Maybe I want to make it so
that these chairs cannot move.
| | 00:39 | So I might want to put them on my own
layer called Chairs and then lock that
| | 00:45 | layer so it can't be changed.
| | 00:47 | So that comes later when we look at the
properties, but for now we need to look
| | 00:51 | at how we create the new layer and
assign these shapes to the new layer.
| | 00:55 | So again, we will go up to the View
menu like we did in the last lesson and
| | 00:58 | come down to Layer Properties, because from
this dialog box, we can create a new layer.
| | 01:04 | We can also remove
layers and change their names.
| | 01:07 | So if we click on the New button,
we get to give our new layer a name.
| | 01:10 | I am going to call it Chairs, I am
going to hit Enter or click OK, same thing.
| | 01:16 | So right now I have got a Chairs layer
showing up here listed alphabetically
| | 01:19 | in the Name column and you can see there are
no shapes assigned to the actual Chairs layer.
| | 01:25 | That's okay.
| | 01:26 | I am going to click OK down here and now I
am going to marquee-select all of my chairs.
| | 01:31 | I am going to right click or I could go up to
the Format menu and choose Layer from there.
| | 01:37 | But I am going to right click, go to
Format and choose Layer down here. All right.
| | 01:41 | So I am going to remove the chairs from
the other layers and now I am going to
| | 01:47 | assign them to Chairs, which shows up
down here at the bottom, because it was
| | 01:50 | the last name to get created.
| | 01:53 | When I click OK, nothing changes in
my diagram, but now when I go into the
| | 01:57 | Properties, if I wanted to lock the
Chairs layer, these chairs will not move
| | 02:02 | and I cannot edit them.
| | 02:03 | I will be able to work around the
chairs so I can build my room around my
| | 02:06 | chairs, around my seating, and that's the
advantage of being able to create a new layer.
| | 02:11 | So now it's time to really dive into
other properties of the various layers
| | 02:16 | in our drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing layer properties| 00:01 | Now that you are comfortable with how
to create your own layers and then assign
| | 00:06 | shapes to those layers, it's time to
dive deeply into the various properties we
| | 00:10 | can adjust for any given layer in a drawing.
| | 00:13 | We are going to do that
with our room drawing here.
| | 00:16 | You can see from the previous
lesson I have RoomDrawing7b opened.
| | 00:19 | Now if you are skipping to this lesson,
you can get all caught up by clicking
| | 00:22 | the Open button and navigating to the
Lesson7 folder of your exercise files and
| | 00:28 | you can double-click this one, RoomDrawing7c.
| | 00:31 | Double-click it or one click and
Open gets you caught up with us.
| | 00:35 | So here is our drawing,
it's made up of several layers.
| | 00:37 | We created one layer that we assigned
these chairs to and removed the chairs
| | 00:41 | from any other layer so that they are
isolated on their own layer, and we will
| | 00:46 | see what the advantages to that
are as we look at the properties.
| | 00:49 | To look at those layer properties we
go up to the View menu and come down to
| | 00:54 | Layer Properties, give that one a click.
| | 00:56 | So here is our Layer Properties dialog
box, I am just going to move it up here
| | 01:00 | so we can see a lot other chairs in our drawing.
| | 01:03 | You see that there is a Chairs layer
here with 8 shapes on that layer and
| | 01:08 | that's our 8 chairs.
| | 01:10 | I can guarantee you from the previous
lesson and if you've jumped to this lesson
| | 01:13 | and opened up this drawing, that those
chairs do not appear on any of the other
| | 01:17 | layers like Furniture, for example, or
Movable or Non-Movable Furnishings, we
| | 01:22 | removed them in a previous
lesson from those layers.
| | 01:25 | So now let's talk about some of the
other properties, some of the other columns
| | 01:29 | that have check boxes like the Visible column.
| | 01:31 | Now the Visible column here, you can
see everything has a check mark in it
| | 01:35 | and that means if I look at my drawing, I
am seeing the contents of every single layer.
| | 01:40 | So if I wanted to focus on the inside
of the room and leave these chairs out of
| | 01:45 | it for the time being, I
could hide the chairs temporarily.
| | 01:48 | So I am going to hide the chairs by
clicking the check box under the Visible
| | 01:52 | column and then click Apply.
| | 01:55 | So it appears like the chairs have been
removed from the drawing. They have not.
| | 01:59 | They are just invisible so I can
focus on other areas of my drawing if I
| | 02:03 | wanted to, temporarily.
| | 02:05 | When I am done I come back to unhide
those chairs by clicking the check box
| | 02:09 | next to Visible to add the check back to the
box and then click Apply, so my chairs are back.
| | 02:16 | Now the same applies to printing.
| | 02:18 | So if for some reason I thought, you
know what, I am creating a room drawing
| | 02:22 | here, I am going to put furniture in
here just to give me an idea if the room is
| | 02:25 | big enough and if the layout is going to work.
| | 02:28 | Yes, it is, I may want to print the
drawing, but I don't need to print all of
| | 02:32 | the equipment and furniture and so on.
| | 02:34 | So I would deselect the check box
next to Chairs for example, deselect
| | 02:38 | Equipment, Furniture including
Movable and Non-Movable Furnishings.
| | 02:44 | So I am left with Walls and
Doors and Fixtures, for example.
| | 02:47 | So this way, when I go to print, only
the drawing for the room itself is going
| | 02:52 | to print, and all of the contents in
the room that I have been using to make
| | 02:56 | sure that I can lay this out
properly do not print.
| | 02:59 | Right-Clicking the Print column at the top adds
the check marks back to all of the boxes.
| | 03:06 | Let's talk now about the Active column.
| | 03:08 | Sometimes you get shapes that are not
assigned to a layer, so by default they
| | 03:13 | don't belong to any layer.
| | 03:14 | Well, by selecting the check box under
Active means that any unassigned shapes
| | 03:20 | will get assigned to that layer.
| | 03:22 | So for example, if I select the Chairs
check box under Active, any shapes in my
| | 03:27 | drawing that do not belong to a layer by
default so they are not preassigned are
| | 03:31 | now assigned to the Active layer.
| | 03:33 | Now one note about the
Active layer, you cannot lock it.
| | 03:37 | So if I go over here to click the Lock
check box, look what happens to my Active layer.
| | 03:42 | It becomes unchecked, so the
Active layer cannot be locked.
| | 03:46 | I would have to unlock it to make it
the Active layer and, of course, any of
| | 03:50 | these layers could be active.
| | 03:53 | Okay, so keep in mind that shapes that
are not preassigned to any of the layers
| | 03:59 | that exist in this drawing will be
assigned to the Active layer and you choose
| | 04:03 | what the Active layer is by clicking the
appropriate check box or boxes. All right.
| | 04:08 | So locking, we know that that's
going to protect a layer, right.
| | 04:11 | If I go to my Chairs layer here and I
click in the check box under Lock and
| | 04:16 | click Apply, I am not going to be
able to do anything with these chairs.
| | 04:21 | Let's just click OK to close up the
Properties dialog temporarily and let's just
| | 04:26 | click on the Projector Screen, it
becomes selected, the Projector.
| | 04:30 | How about our storage units? No problem.
| | 04:32 | Clicking on the chairs though, look
at that, we cannot select the chairs,
| | 04:37 | which means we can't move them, we can't edit
them, we can't resize them, we can't delete them.
| | 04:42 | They are protected because they are
locked and we did that from the Properties.
| | 04:47 | So we go back to View and down to Layer
Properties and sure enough because our
| | 04:52 | chairs are locked, we weren't
able to do anything with them.
| | 04:54 | So if you need to protect a part of
your drawing, remember you can lock it.
| | 04:59 | Where does that come in most handy?
| | 05:01 | Well, in a room drawing, it would
probably the room itself, for example,
| | 05:05 | the wall and the doors.
| | 05:07 | So the wall, I would lock it.
| | 05:09 | I go up to Door here and lock that as
well, which means my room itself cannot
| | 05:14 | change but if I wanted to remodel
inside the room, I could by moving furniture
| | 05:20 | around and equipment.
| | 05:21 | So if you need to protect a layer,
it's just simple as clicking the check box
| | 05:25 | under the Lock column.
| | 05:27 | Snap and Glue is selected, by default,
for every single layer, which means
| | 05:30 | when we are moving items around on those
layers they can snap and glue to other items.
| | 05:37 | So for example, the chairs, if I was
to move them together, they would snap
| | 05:40 | together and then if they are touching,
they would actually be glued together so
| | 05:44 | I can move them together as one.
| | 05:46 | So Snap and Glue we talked about in the
previous section, so you can go back and
| | 05:50 | review that if you like.
| | 05:51 | But Snap and Glue options are turned on,
by default, for every one of our layers.
| | 05:56 | If we didn't want Snap and Glue
action to be used for a specific layer, we
| | 06:00 | simply deselect the check boxes.
| | 06:02 | I am going to put those back as I like it.
| | 06:05 | Now the last column is the Color column.
| | 06:08 | Now we can turn on Color Coding for
layers and that will override any of the
| | 06:12 | colors that we are already using.
| | 06:13 | For example, look at our Projector
Screen here and our Projector, which are
| | 06:17 | couple of pieces of equipment,
they are dark blue right now.
| | 06:20 | Well, if I go to my Equipment and I
go over to the Color column and click
| | 06:24 | it, the default color that's selected here,
which is gray, will be applied if I click Apply.
| | 06:30 | So I click the Apply button here and
look at that, I have got no fill and I have
| | 06:35 | got this light gray
outline for that layer color.
| | 06:38 | Now when I choose colors, for example
from the dropdown if I wanted to go to a
| | 06:42 | blue and apply, you can see now
that they have got that blue outline.
| | 06:47 | I can also adjust the Transparency.
| | 06:51 | So if I go to, for example, 30%, I am adding
a 30% transparency, 0 means no transparency.
| | 07:00 | So as I click Apply you
can see how it got lighter.
| | 07:03 | So this is great, if you
want to color code your layers.
| | 07:06 | So if for example, walls and doors in
my drawing should have a different color.
| | 07:12 | Well, I can click right on the actual layer
here and then assign the color from the dropdown.
| | 07:19 | So I will go to red, notice it gets a
check mark now for Color and red is added.
| | 07:24 | I see it in my drawing when I click Apply.
| | 07:27 | Okay, same thing goes for
any of these, the chairs.
| | 07:31 | I am going to click on chairs here and
I am going to assign a different color
| | 07:35 | and it's going to
override the color that's there.
| | 07:37 | Let's make those green.
| | 07:40 | When I click Apply, check out my chairs,
they are no longer filled but they have
| | 07:46 | got that green outline.
| | 07:48 | So if I deselect now the Color
check box for chairs and click Apply, my
| | 07:54 | old colors come back.
| | 07:55 | So I can override colors that have
been selected including fill colors and
| | 07:59 | the outline color which is black in this
case for my chair, by using the Color column.
| | 08:04 | I am going to deselect each of these and
click Apply to get everything back the way it was.
| | 08:10 | Now just before we exit the Layer
Properties dialog box here, you need to know
| | 08:14 | that you can remove layers
and you can even rename them.
| | 08:18 | So I am going to rename my Chairs layer here
by clicking it, clicking the Rename button.
| | 08:24 | I am going to type in Seating
because I may put other type of seating in
| | 08:28 | there, maybe a couch or maybe a bench, for
example, that would all be on that same layer.
| | 08:34 | I click OK to save my changes, it moves
down the list alphabetically, down here
| | 08:38 | and it's called Seating.
| | 08:40 | I still have those 8 shapes which are in
my 8 chairs on the layer I just renamed it.
| | 08:45 | If I don't need a layer I can remove it.
| | 08:49 | So, for example, Fixtures has one shape
on it that also appears on another layer.
| | 08:53 | I can click Fixtures. Click Remove.
| | 08:56 | I do get a warning because removing this
layer will delete any shapes belonging to it.
| | 09:01 | You've got to keep that
in mind. Remove the layer?
| | 09:04 | If I click Yes, it's gone.
| | 09:07 | Just so happens that the shape that
was on that layer appears on other layers
| | 09:11 | in my drawing as well.
| | 09:12 | So I didn't lose anything from my drawing.
| | 09:14 | All right, clicking Apply just allows
you to apply the changes and keep the
| | 09:19 | Properties dialog box open, but when you are
done you just click OK to return to your drawing.
| | 09:25 | So that covers the properties
when we are working with layers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Inserting PicturesDisplaying the Clip Art task pane and searching for clip art| 00:01 | One way to add some visual interest or
some even some additional information is
| | 00:06 | to do it graphically by
inserting pictures into a drawing.
| | 00:09 | Now pictures can be clip
art, they could be photos.
| | 00:12 | A picture could also be a drawing
that you created in another application.
| | 00:16 | So in this section we are going to
look at how we find those images and after
| | 00:21 | we've found them how do we
get them into the drawing.
| | 00:23 | So let's open up a drawing first.
| | 00:25 | We will go to the Open button on your
Standard toolbar, navigate to the Lesson8
| | 00:29 | folder of your exercise files.
| | 00:32 | That's where you are going to find
this one here, RoomLayout8a, give it a
| | 00:35 | double-click or one click and Open to
bring it up on the screen. All right.
| | 00:39 | So the first thing that we are going to
talk about is our Clip Art task pane and
| | 00:46 | how we get that up on the screen and
once we got it how we can use it to search
| | 00:50 | for a specific clip art.
| | 00:51 | Now let's say, I wanted to put some
plants in each corner of my room here.
| | 00:55 | Well, I know that I have
got in my stencils over here.
| | 00:58 | You can see I have got Cubicles,
Accessories, Equipment, Furniture and so on.
| | 01:02 | If I go to Accessories, you can see I
do have some plants here, but it's maybe
| | 01:06 | not exactly what I am looking for.
| | 01:08 | So I can search through the clip art
that comes with Visio or even online for
| | 01:13 | some different plants.
| | 01:14 | The first thing we need to do is get
the Clip Art task pane opened our screen.
| | 01:18 | Couple of different ways to do
that, one way is from the View menu.
| | 01:22 | If we go to View menu and select Task
Pane, it will show up over here on the
| | 01:26 | right hand side displaying the very
last thing we used, which in this case was
| | 01:30 | Theme - Colors for me, you may
have something different there.
| | 01:34 | But to change it to Clip Art, we just
click the dropdown here and you can see
| | 01:38 | Theme - Colors is selected but Clip
Art appears a little further down.
| | 01:41 | When I click on Clip Art, I
get the Clip Art task pane.
| | 01:45 | To close that, I click the Close
button over here on the right hand side.
| | 01:49 | Now another way to get that Clip Art
task pane, if I jump right to Clip Art is
| | 01:53 | to go up to the Insert menu, and from
here we are going to go down to Picture
| | 01:57 | and select Clip Art from there.
| | 02:00 | As soon as we do that, boom!
| | 02:01 | The Clip Art task pane appears and we
don't even have to select it from the dropdown.
| | 02:05 | All right.
| | 02:06 | So now we want to look for some plants,
so we are going to go in the Search for
| | 02:09 | field here and we are
just going to type in plant.
| | 02:12 | Now before we click the Go button here,
notice that we can search in selected
| | 02:18 | collections and if we click the
dropdown, you can see it includes My
| | 02:22 | Collections, Office Collections.
| | 02:24 | We can include Web Collections as well or
just Everywhere by clicking this check box.
| | 02:28 | All right.
| | 02:29 | We will click the dropdown to close
that up and Results should be, in here you
| | 02:34 | can see the default is
Selected media file types.
| | 02:37 | So if we click this dropdown, Clip Art
is what's selected because we are looking
| | 02:40 | at the Clip Art task pane.
| | 02:42 | If we wanted to include Photographs,
Movies and Sounds, we could click each
| | 02:46 | of those check boxes.
| | 02:47 | But that's coming up a little bit later.
| | 02:48 | We are just looking for Clip Art right now.
| | 02:50 | So we click the Go button and you can
see that some plants have shown up here.
| | 02:55 | Now there are some options down below to
get Clip Art on the Office Online site,
| | 02:59 | which is obviously needing an Internet
connection to access tons of other clip
| | 03:04 | art that you can find
from Microsoft Office Online.
| | 03:07 | So we will just deal with what we have
here on our own computers and maybe this
| | 03:11 | is the plant I was looking for right here.
| | 03:13 | So in the next lesson we will look
at how we get clip art into a drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting clip art| 00:01 | All right, in the previous lesson we
learned how to open up the Clip Art task
| | 00:05 | pane here and then to
search for a specific Clip Art.
| | 00:08 | You can see, I searched for the word,
plant here, looking in All collections
| | 00:12 | and only Selected media file types was used
and that is Clip Art, you can see that here.
| | 00:19 | Now it's time to insert the
Clip Art into our drawing.
| | 00:21 | Now if you are jumping to this
particular lesson, no problem, you can go to
| | 00:25 | your Open button, navigate to the
Lesson8 folder of your exercise files, and
| | 00:29 | open up RoomLayout8B.
| | 00:30 | So you can double-click that or one
click and Open gets you caught up.
| | 00:34 | So if you also want to make sure the
Clip Art task pane is visible, you can go
| | 00:38 | to the previous lesson to
refresh your memories on that.
| | 00:41 | With Clip Art showing, we searched
for plant, and here is the plant we want
| | 00:45 | to add to our drawing.
| | 00:47 | So the easiest way to add it to the
drawing is to simply click it and drag it on
| | 00:51 | to the drawing page into the area,
generally, where we want it to show up.
| | 00:56 | When we release, you can
see the default size shows up.
| | 00:59 | That's way too big for our room.
| | 01:01 | I am going to size that down.
| | 01:02 | You can see it's snapping to the inside
wall and I am going to size this down a
| | 01:06 | little further here, so it's just in the corner.
| | 01:09 | Now it might be nice to have
one of these on the other side.
| | 01:11 | So options would be to click-and-drag from here
to the other corner but then I have to resize.
| | 01:16 | With this already selected, Ctrl+D as
an Duplicate on your keyboard, hold down
| | 01:22 | Ctrl, tap the letter D, and release
gets you an exact duplicate of your plant.
| | 01:27 | Now we can just click-and-drag it down
into the bottom corner and you can see it
| | 01:31 | snaps into position.
| | 01:34 | We'll click outside of our drawing page
to de-select, to see what that looks like.
| | 01:38 | All right, so that's pretty easy.
| | 01:39 | Once you've found the Clip Art you
are looking for, it's really easy to get
| | 01:42 | it into your drawing.
| | 01:43 | You just click-and-drag
and then adjust as necessary.
| | 01:46 | Next we are going to look at inserting
other images, other pictures that are
| | 01:50 | not Clip Art.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting a picture from a file| 00:01 | All right, we now know that finding
Clip Art and inserting it into a drawing is
| | 00:06 | really quite simple.
| | 00:08 | What if you have got another kind of
picture, whether it's a photograph, or
| | 00:11 | maybe it's something that you have
drawn in another drawing application, like
| | 00:15 | CorelDraw or Adobe Illustrator?
| | 00:18 | So, let's use the example of a company logo.
| | 00:21 | This is something that would not
appear in the Clip Art task pane over here.
| | 00:24 | So we need to know how to insert
pictures, like that, into a drawing.
| | 00:28 | First thing we are going to do
though, is open up a different drawing.
| | 00:30 | We will click the Open button, navigate
to the Lesson8 folder of your Exercise
| | 00:34 | Files to find this one here, RoomLayout8c.
| | 00:38 | Click the Open button and that
will bring it up on your screen.
| | 00:42 | So basically, the same drawing but
notice that the background here is white and
| | 00:46 | there is a reason for that.
| | 00:47 | We are going to insert a
company logo that was created.
| | 00:50 | I am going to insert it right up
here in the top left-hand corner.
| | 00:53 | Well, we are not going to find it on the
Clip Art task pane and we are not going
| | 00:55 | to find it in any of our stencils, we
need to go up to the Insert menu and come
| | 01:00 | down to Picture and this time choose, From File.
| | 01:03 | When we click From File, instead we
get a dialog box here where we can insert
| | 01:08 | pictures from various locations,
whether it's a hard drive, a network drive,
| | 01:12 | other media, if it's installed, like
floppy disks, and CDs, and DVDs, and so on.
| | 01:18 | Right now though, to keep it simple,
we are going to navigate to the Lesson8
| | 01:21 | folder of your Exercise Files because there
is a logo sitting there. It's a JPEG image.
| | 01:26 | So you can give it a click and click Open.
| | 01:29 | So that inserts it right
here in the middle of our page.
| | 01:32 | Now it's just a matter of adjusting.
| | 01:33 | So we will move it up here to the top-left
corner and now let's size it down a little bit.
| | 01:39 | I am going to size it from the corner.
| | 01:41 | So you can see when I get the double
arrows, I am able to change the size.
| | 01:46 | When I get the size and with the four-
sided arrow, I can move it in the exact
| | 01:50 | location, I release.
| | 01:52 | I will de-select by clicking outside
the drawing page here to see what that
| | 01:55 | looks like and you can see that's just perfect.
| | 01:58 | So inserting Clip Art in the
previous lesson, easy enough.
| | 02:01 | Inserting any other kind
of picture, equally as easy.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the clip organizer| 00:01 | On the topic of inserting Clip Art and
pictures into a drawing, like we have
| | 00:06 | been doing in the previous lessons,
there is one other feature you should know
| | 00:09 | about and it's called the Clip Organizer.
| | 00:12 | Down here at the bottom of the Clip Art task
pane, you can see it says, Organize clips.
| | 00:16 | Now if you don't have the Clip
Art task pane open up, no problem.
| | 00:19 | You can go up to View, click View,
select Task Pane and then from here on the
| | 00:25 | drop-down, make sure Clip Art is selected.
| | 00:28 | Down at the bottom, you will see Organize clips.
| | 00:31 | Give that a click and it opens up a dialog box.
| | 00:34 | You can see, by default, we
are looking at a Collection List.
| | 00:37 | So down here under My Collections, we
have got Favorites and Unclassified Clips,
| | 00:41 | clips that are not
classified by some, kind of, category.
| | 00:45 | Then down below that we have got our Office
Collections and also collections on the web.
| | 00:50 | We can expand these by clicking the plus sign.
| | 00:52 | You can see under Office Collections,
I have got lots of choices here.
| | 00:56 | Now let's say, I use a background over and over.
| | 00:58 | I am going to click Backgrounds here.
| | 01:00 | This is, kind of, a funky background
that I'd like to use in many of my drawings.
| | 01:04 | I might want to add it to my Favorites.
| | 01:06 | So I am just going to scroll up, so I
can see the Favorites folder, I am going
| | 01:09 | to click and drag it to my Favorites.
| | 01:11 | Notice there is a plus sign attached.
| | 01:13 | I am not removing it from the Backgrounds
category, I am just copying it to my Favorites.
| | 01:19 | So it stays here in the Backgrounds.
| | 01:21 | Let's do one more, let's
go down to Concepts here.
| | 01:24 | Let's say, this is one we'd like to use a lot.
| | 01:26 | We will drag it to the
Favorites and let's just do one more.
| | 01:30 | We will go down to Food and we will
drag this one over to our Favorites.
| | 01:36 | All right, now we will
minimize or collapse this branch.
| | 01:41 | So this is where we started but click on
Favorites to see that we have got those
| | 01:44 | three that we use most often.
| | 01:47 | So it's really handy to use the Clip
Organizer sometimes to get those pictures
| | 01:52 | or Clip Art that you use on a frequent basis.
| | 01:55 | Now we can view these in different ways.
| | 01:56 | Right now, we are looking at thumbnail
representations of each and you can see
| | 02:00 | under our View button, Thumbnails is selected.
| | 02:02 | If we want to see a list, we could do that.
| | 02:04 | Pretty hard to figure out which is which.
| | 02:06 | So another option is Details and you
can see that we get some information, like
| | 02:11 | the Size, the Type, any Keywords.
| | 02:15 | I am going to just drag
these borders, so you can see it.
| | 02:17 | One came from backgrounds, one is from
cartoons, there we have under the Autumn
| | 02:23 | heading, cornucopias.
| | 02:24 | All of these are keywords that, when
we type them in Search field in our Clip
| | 02:28 | Art task pane, these will show up,
if we type any of those words.
| | 02:31 | I am going to go back to
Thumbnails because that's the one I like.
| | 02:35 | We can also get clips online by
clicking the Clips Online button.
| | 02:40 | Obviously, you need to be
connected to the Internet to do that.
| | 02:43 | It takes you to Microsoft Office online.
| | 02:45 | If you see anything you like there,
click-and-drag it over to your Favorites
| | 02:48 | folder and you will always have quick
and easy access via the Clip Organizer.
| | 02:53 | To close it up, we go up to the top
-right corner and click the red X.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Managing PagesInserting a new page| 00:01 | So far as we have been working through
the various lessons in this title, we
| | 00:05 | have been working with drawings
that are pretty much a single page.
| | 00:09 | Now you may want to get into
drawings where you need additional pages.
| | 00:12 | I can think of the example of an
office layout where you have got multiple
| | 00:16 | floors in the building, that you want
to have drawings for each separate floor.
| | 00:22 | So that's the example or scenario that
we are going to use, as we go through a
| | 00:25 | few lessons covering, how we insert new
pages, how we apply backgrounds and then
| | 00:31 | how we rename, delete, move
around pages in a drawing?
| | 00:35 | So the first thing I'd like to do
in this lesson is open up a drawing.
| | 00:38 | We will go to the Open button up here
and navigate through the Lesson9 folder of
| | 00:42 | your exercise files and open up OfficePlan9a.
| | 00:46 | Give that one click and click Open.
| | 00:50 | So here's an office plan where we have
got a single page and we are looking at
| | 00:54 | the ground floor, but in our building
we may have multiple floors and we want
| | 00:59 | to have a separate drawing for each
floor, so we can organize how we are going
| | 01:03 | to lay out the office.
| | 01:04 | So down at the bottom left-hand corner,
you can see I do have one page and
| | 01:08 | it's titled Page 1.
| | 01:11 | So what we need to do really, is
insert a new page before we can copy this
| | 01:16 | drawing over and make changes to the
second floor, the third floor, and so on.
| | 01:21 | So how do we insert a page? Glad, you asked.
| | 01:22 | Let's go up to the Insert menu and you can
see right at the top, we have got New Page.
| | 01:29 | So we give that a click, and the Page Setup
dialog shows up, and now we have some options.
| | 01:34 | First of all, Page Properties.
| | 01:36 | You can see the Type is Foreground.
| | 01:37 | We are going to talk about putting
backgrounds into a drawing a little bit later.
| | 01:41 | So we do want to a foreground page here.
| | 01:43 | The title, by default, is going to
become Page 2 with no background.
| | 01:48 | Again, we will talk about
backgrounds a little bit later.
| | 01:50 | The Measurement is going to take on
the same measurement that we are using in
| | 01:53 | the drawing which is
Feet and Inches or US units.
| | 01:57 | So that everything is good, we will talk
about renaming the pages a little later on.
| | 02:01 | We will just click OK to add our new
page and you see we do get a blank page.
| | 02:05 | So I am going to go back to Page 1 now.
| | 02:08 | If I wanted to copy everything I see
here on to the second page, obviously, we
| | 02:12 | are going to re-title it second floor
and probably make some changes to it later
| | 02:16 | on, but to select everything on a page,
no matter what's there, I can hold down
| | 02:20 | Ctrl on the keyboard and hit the letter
A at the same time, the letter A as in
| | 02:26 | All selects everything.
| | 02:28 | So you can see we have got walls, we
have got a title, we have got a door, we
| | 02:32 | have even got measurement showing up
here because dimensions, room measurements
| | 02:36 | were added to this drawing.
| | 02:37 | So Ctrl+C now on the keyboard is to copy.
| | 02:42 | To move to Page 2, we just come
down and click on the Page 2 tab.
| | 02:45 | And to paste, Ctrl+V. That's the
shortcut for going up to the Edit menu up
| | 02:51 | here and choosing Paste.
| | 02:52 | So here you can see our shortcuts,
Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V. Selecting everything like
| | 02:59 | we just did, Ctrl+A. So all of
that's available on the Edit menu but the
| | 03:03 | keyboard is much quicker.
| | 03:05 | Now you will notice that if I go to
Page 1 and then I flip to Page 2, that it
| | 03:09 | didn't exactly paste in the exact same
location, as I have my layout on Page 1.
| | 03:15 | So I can adjust that by doing a Ctrl+A
here on Page 2, and then just clicking
| | 03:20 | and dragging everything down
and across to where I want it.
| | 03:24 | When I release, I have moved everything.
| | 03:26 | Next we will come into here where it
says Ground Floor and double-click, and
| | 03:31 | we actually just need to highlight the word
Ground with a double-click and type in Second.
| | 03:37 | So we click outside the selected
box to see our changes, there it is.
| | 03:43 | We now have a second page with a Second Floor.
| | 03:46 | So when we have drawings that have
multiple pages, sometimes it's nice to have
| | 03:50 | something that's consistent from one
page to the next, like a background.
| | 03:54 | So a background could be a color, a
background could contain a title, for
| | 03:57 | example, up here, maybe
it's our office building.
| | 04:00 | Whatever we want on the background,
we create once and it appears in the
| | 04:03 | background of every page in our drawing.
| | 04:05 | So in the next lesson, we will look
at creating and assigning backgrounds.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and assigning a background page| 00:01 | In the previous lesson, we found out how
easy it was to simply add a page to our drawing.
| | 00:06 | So we inserted a new page
called Page 2, by default.
| | 00:10 | It was a blank page, we took the
contents of Page 1, copied them over to Page 2.
| | 00:15 | Then just made a small edit here,
retitling this, Second Floor.
| | 00:19 | So the scenario is an office building
with multiple floors, it's all going to
| | 00:22 | have the same dimensions but the
contents on each floor may change.
| | 00:26 | So we need multiple pages in our drawing.
| | 00:29 | Now we are going to talk about adding
a background because a background page
| | 00:32 | is going to show through your other pages
called foreground pages, Page 1 and Page 2.
| | 00:37 | This means I can make changes to the
background one time only and see them up
| | 00:41 | here on multiple pages.
| | 00:44 | The trick is, once I have got my
background, assigning the background to the
| | 00:48 | pages that I see here in front of me.
| | 00:50 | So we are going to continue working
with OfficePlan9a here from the previous
| | 00:54 | lesson but if you are jumping to this
lesson, follow me to the Open button,
| | 00:58 | and you will navigate to the Lesson9 folder
of your exercise files and select OfficePlan9b.
| | 01:05 | Double click that or one click
and Open, gets you all caught up.
| | 01:08 | So here we are on Page 2.
| | 01:10 | Now we are going to insert a background page.
| | 01:13 | Now there is a couple of
different ways we can do that.
| | 01:16 | We can go up to our Insert menu and
insert a new page, and from here just select
| | 01:21 | that it's going to be a Background.
| | 01:23 | I am going to hit Cancel here because
another shortcut is just to go down to the
| | 01:27 | Page 2 tab here, right-
click and choose Insert Page.
| | 01:31 | I get the same dialog and you can see
by default, Visio is trying to insert a
| | 01:35 | third foreground page.
| | 01:37 | So Foreground is selected
and Page 3 would be the name.
| | 01:40 | I want to insert a background page, though.
| | 01:43 | It becomes Background-1 and you can
see the Measurements are Feet and Inches
| | 01:48 | because that's what I am using
in this current drawing, US units.
| | 01:51 | So I am going to click OK.
| | 01:52 | Here's my background page, it's
blank, there is nothing on it yet.
| | 01:57 | So if I wanted to add anything to this
page, whatever I do will show through
| | 02:02 | each of my other pages, once I
assign this page to those pages.
| | 02:06 | I'll show you what I mean.
| | 02:07 | Let's insert our company log.
| | 02:09 | We will go up to the Insert menu, down
to Picture, and then over to From File.
| | 02:14 | Because in your Lesson9 folder here
you have got the company logo, so I will
| | 02:18 | click on Logo and Open.
| | 02:20 | That inserts right here
into the middle of our page.
| | 02:23 | I am just going to size it down by
dragging the bottom-right corner up to make
| | 02:27 | it smaller, keeping the actual proportions.
| | 02:31 | Now I am going to drag it up to the
top-left corner here from the inside of
| | 02:36 | the logo, when I see that four-sided arrow,
I can move a graphic and I will de-select it.
| | 02:40 | So you think by default, if I go to
Page 1 now, I am going to see that same
| | 02:44 | thing on Page 2, but as I go to the
Page 1 tab, you can see it's not there and
| | 02:48 | it's not on Page 2 either.
| | 02:50 | So I am going to flip back to Page 1,
and I am going to go up to File and
| | 02:56 | down to Page Setup.
| | 02:58 | So from here I am going to go to my Page
Properties tab, and you can see this is
| | 03:03 | Page 1 which has under the
Background drop-down, None selected.
| | 03:08 | So there is no background assigned to Page 1.
| | 03:10 | If I click the drop-down, I will see
that there is a background to choose from
| | 03:14 | now, Background-1, I give it a click.
| | 03:16 | When I click Apply, look what
happens over here in the top-left corner.
| | 03:20 | My logo is shining through.
| | 03:22 | It hasn't been added to the page, it's
just showing through from the background.
| | 03:26 | So I click OK and then I repeat that
for Page 2 because I can have multiple
| | 03:32 | backgrounds, if I want, and assign
different backgrounds to different pages.
| | 03:36 | But in this case, we are just going
to repeat File, Page Setup, click the
| | 03:41 | Page Properties tab, and from the Background
drop-down, choose Background-1, and click OK.
| | 03:49 | So the background has been
assigned to both of my pages.
| | 03:51 | Now you can only assign
one background to a page.
| | 03:54 | However, you can have multiple
backgrounds and you can assign a background to a
| | 03:59 | background page, if you wanted to as well.
| | 04:01 | Now so far we have got a background, I am
going to go back to the Background tab here.
| | 04:05 | What we don't have is a background
shape and we saw this in an earlier
| | 04:08 | lesson, where we can create a new
background just by dragging a background
| | 04:13 | shape on to our drawing.
| | 04:14 | So I am going to go back to Page 1 here
and I don't have any background shapes
| | 04:19 | to choose from, from the
selected stencils that we see here.
| | 04:22 | So I can open up a stencil.
| | 04:24 | I am going to go up to File and down to
Shapes, and over here I am just going to
| | 04:30 | go down to----Well, let's see
what we have in Visio Extras here.
| | 04:33 | Look at that, we do have
Backgrounds using US units.
| | 04:36 | So I am going to click that,
which opens up a new stencil.
| | 04:40 | Here is my Backgrounds and if I want
to drag any of these backgrounds to my
| | 04:44 | drawing, we have done it before,
we just simply click-and-drag.
| | 04:46 | So I am going to drag this one, the
Background tranquil, over on to my
| | 04:50 | drawing page and release.
| | 04:52 | Now when I do that, you can see that
another background tab has appeared here
| | 04:57 | and by default, it's assigned to every
single page in my drawing, including my
| | 05:05 | background that I added manually.
| | 05:07 | Okay, so that's kind of cool.
| | 05:09 | I have got a second background which
is applied to a background and this
| | 05:12 | background is applied to every page.
| | 05:15 | So that's just another
way to create a background.
| | 05:18 | You can see its VBackground-1 and
that's because I used a shape to assign it.
| | 05:22 | Now with the background shape selected,
this means when I go up to Themes here
| | 05:27 | and I choose a theme from my Theme-Colors.
| | 05:29 | I will make sure Color Themes is selected.
| | 05:32 | For example, one of these darker ones
that darkens the background, if I didn't
| | 05:36 | have a background shape, I will get a
dialog box here saying, "Hey, I can't use
| | 05:40 | that unless I have a background
shape assigned to my drawing."
| | 05:44 | So you can see that these are available to me.
| | 05:48 | Thanks to the fact that I dragged one of
these background shapes on to my drawing.
| | 05:51 | Okay, so when I find one that I like,
I leave it like that, close up my task
| | 05:58 | pane here, and I have got the end results.
| | 06:01 | So I have got now a drawing with two
backgrounds and two foreground pages.
| | 06:07 | The next thing we are going to look at
in this lesson and the next lesson, is
| | 06:12 | how we rearrange our pages and
rename them from the tabs down below.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Renaming, reordering, and deleting pages| 00:01 | All right, so we have been working
with multiple pages in a drawing and then
| | 00:06 | working with backgrounds, even multiple
backgrounds in a drawing and assigning
| | 00:10 | those backgrounds to the pages in our drawing.
| | 00:13 | Now, it's time to look at how we get
around those pages, change their names,
| | 00:18 | reorder them and so on.
| | 00:19 | So to do that, we are all going to
open up a different diagram here.
| | 00:23 | We will go to the Open button, and
navigate to the Lesson 09 folder of your
| | 00:26 | Exercise Files, find
OfficePlan9c and open that one up.
| | 00:31 | So it's very similar.
| | 00:33 | You can see I have actually got three pages.
| | 00:35 | Page one has the ground floor, looks
like page two says third floor, and page
| | 00:40 | three says second floor.
| | 00:42 | Then we've got our background and you
can see we have also got our background
| | 00:45 | shape on our V Background-1 here
that's applied to this background which is
| | 00:50 | applied to everyone of these pages.
| | 00:52 | So to move around, we can navigate
using the Navigation buttons here.
| | 00:56 | If you can't see all of your tabs, you
need to use these to move from page to page.
| | 01:00 | Now, it just shows you the tabs,
doesn't move you to the page.
| | 01:04 | You have to click the
Page Tab to get to that page.
| | 01:07 | So we have to do something here.
| | 01:09 | First of all, we need to reorder these
and probably we should relabel them as well.
| | 01:14 | Instead of page one, page two, page
three, they should be labeled by floor.
| | 01:19 | So I am going to go to page one here,
and clicking on the tab takes me
| | 01:22 | there, but double-clicking highlights
the text in the tab, and I am going to
| | 01:25 | type in Ground Floor.
| | 01:28 | That makes more sense.
| | 01:30 | Now, I am going to double-click the second tab.
| | 01:32 | So double-clicking here, notice that
it says Third Floor, so that's what I
| | 01:36 | am going to type here.
| | 01:38 | Third Floor, and now I am going to
double-click the page three which should be second floor.
| | 01:46 | So that's no problem.
| | 01:47 | It's pretty easy to rename.
| | 01:49 | You can double-click backgrounds as
well if you wanted to, to rename them.
| | 01:53 | But we are not going to do that.
| | 01:55 | Background-1 is fine, same
thing with our V Background.
| | 01:57 | So let's go back now to our second
floor which really needs to go before the
| | 02:01 | third floor, doesn't it?
| | 02:03 | So we need to reorder these.
| | 02:05 | There are some shortcuts that you can
use when you right-click tabs in a drawing.
| | 02:10 | So let's right-click second floor.
| | 02:12 | Obviously, if I didn't need
this page, I could delete it.
| | 02:15 | I could rename it this way as well,
but double-clicking is faster.
| | 02:19 | Here is what I want though
right here, Reorder Pages.
| | 02:22 | This opens up a dialog box that shows me
each of my pages, all of my foreground pages.
| | 02:27 | So I have got Ground Floor, then
Third Floor, then Second Floor.
| | 02:30 | I am going to click here on
Second Floor, and just move it up.
| | 02:34 | Now, when I click OK, I will have,
look at that, reordered everything.
| | 02:40 | So when I click Ground Floor, that's
what I see, the next floor should be the
| | 02:43 | second, sure enough.
| | 02:44 | That's what's there, and they are all
labeled correctly and now in the right orders.
| | 02:50 | So let's say I didn't need the Third
Floor, maybe I am downsizing my company.
| | 02:54 | I no longer need the Third Floor.
| | 02:56 | I don't need it in my files.
| | 02:58 | Obviously, I can right-click, we saw this
earlier, and hit Delete Page, and it's gone.
| | 03:04 | So now, I have only got a
Ground Floor, and a Second Floor.
| | 03:08 | So that covers renaming our pages
and reordering them as well, and don't
| | 03:13 | forget to navigate.
| | 03:14 | If you can't see all of your tabs, use
the Navigation Buttons down here to move
| | 03:18 | left to right, and then
click the page you want to view.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Using the Page View ToolsShowing and hiding page breaks| 00:01 | So far working through the numerous
drawings that we have seen, certain view
| | 00:06 | elements have been set for us by default.
| | 00:08 | Now, we did touch on briefly how we can
show the grid and some of the guides and
| | 00:13 | so on to help us maneuver shapes on
our page and line them up and so on.
| | 00:17 | But there is a whole bunch of other
view options that you need to know about.
| | 00:20 | So let's open up a diagram first.
| | 00:22 | We will go to the Open button here,
navigate to your Lesson 10 folder of your
| | 00:27 | Exercise Files, and open up
this one here, Timeline10a.
| | 00:32 | So you can double-click it or one
click and Open brings it up on the screen.
| | 00:37 | All right, so we are not going to be
too concerned about the external data that
| | 00:40 | goes with this particular drawing.
| | 00:42 | So come down here first thing and close that up.
| | 00:45 | This gives us a bigger area to view
our diagram and you can see if we look at
| | 00:50 | the rulers, which are currently turned on,
we are going from 0 to 17 inches, and
| | 00:56 | then the height of this drawing
looks like its 11 inches. So 11x17.
| | 00:59 | Now, the rulers help us with that and
if we go to the View menu, you can see
| | 01:04 | that the rulers are turned on.
| | 01:07 | Now, Guides are also visible if we are
using them, and in this case we don't
| | 01:11 | have any guides showing up and just a
quick review to get a guide on your page.
| | 01:15 | You go to the Ruler, click and drag
from the left and over to the right or from
| | 01:21 | the top down to create guides.
| | 01:23 | And you can have as many of those as you
need, and it would be very handy if you
| | 01:26 | needed to line things up.
| | 01:28 | Remember that when we add shapes and so
on that they will snap and glue to these
| | 01:31 | items, if that's set that way.
| | 01:33 | Now, to remove them, we could click on
them and hit Delete or we could go to the
| | 01:37 | View menu and just not show the
guides. There we go. All right.
| | 01:42 | So let's look at some of the
other options you need to know about.
| | 01:45 | For example, Page Breaks, I
am looking at this diagram.
| | 01:49 | It's quite a large diagram.
| | 01:50 | We know its 11x17, but I know that my
printer doesn't take this size paper.
| | 01:55 | So I am going to be printing on multiple pages.
| | 01:57 | So this diagram is taking up more than one
page according to what I will be printing.
| | 02:02 | So I might want to see the page breaks.
| | 02:05 | Before I do, let's check out the Print Preview.
| | 02:07 | We will click the Print Preview button
right here on the toolbar to see that
| | 02:11 | indeed using 8.5x11 sheets of paper,
my diagram is showing up on two separate
| | 02:16 | pages, and it looks like it's getting
cut right down the middle here and that
| | 02:19 | could be a problem because of the
margins that you get with every printer.
| | 02:23 | We return back to our drawing.
| | 02:25 | It might help if we could see the page
break on our drawing page, so that we can
| | 02:29 | maneuver this thing, so
that it breaks in a good spot.
| | 02:32 | To do that, we will go back up to the
View menu here, and this time we will come
| | 02:35 | down to Page Breaks.
| | 02:37 | So yeah, sure enough, it's breaking
right through this text and right down the
| | 02:41 | middle of my timeline.
| | 02:42 | I am going to move this around.
| | 02:44 | So holding down Ctrl on the keyboard,
tap the letter A simultaneously, and
| | 02:48 | everything is selected.
| | 02:50 | Now, all I need to do is
get that Four Sided Arrow.
| | 02:52 | There it is, when I touch the border.
| | 02:54 | I am just going to move this
over a little bit to the right.
| | 02:58 | When I let go, everything is
readjusted here in a second, give it some time.
| | 03:04 | Look at that, look where the
page break is now. That's better.
| | 03:08 | So you can see how maneuvering our
image around is going to help us if we can
| | 03:12 | see our page breaks here on the screen.
| | 03:15 | So when you are done working with
page breaks and you don't want to look at
| | 03:17 | them, you just want to work on your
drawing, you turn off anything the same way
| | 03:22 | you turn it on by clicking View and
selecting Page Breaks. All right.
| | 03:27 | So that covers viewing and
hiding page breaks in a drawing.
| | 03:31 | But there is a lot more to come.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Pan & Zoom window| 00:01 | When you are working with intricate
drawings that take up a large area like this
| | 00:05 | one here in front of me, it might be
handy to be able to zoom in to specific
| | 00:09 | areas of your drawing to work on them,
and a handy tool for when you are zoomed
| | 00:13 | in to a certain level where you can't
see the entire page like we can right here
| | 00:18 | is the Pan and Zoom Window.
| | 00:19 | I'll show you how handy this is in a moment.
| | 00:22 | First of all, you will need to
have this drawing open, Timeline10a.
| | 00:26 | So navigate to your Lesson 10 folder of
your Exercise Files from the Open button
| | 00:31 | here, and open up Timeline10a if
you are skipping to this lesson.
| | 00:34 | So we had this opened in the previous lesson.
| | 00:36 | We viewed our page breaks, turned them
off, and moved this around a little bit,
| | 00:40 | so that it fit better right
down the middle of our page break.
| | 00:44 | Now, we are going to use the
Pan and Zoom window to zoom in.
| | 00:47 | So first I am going to zoom in to a level
where I can't see my whole page. Let's go to 100%.
| | 00:50 | So right now to move to a specific
section in my drawing, I've got to use these
| | 00:56 | toolbars, or the scroll bars here to
scroll to the exact area where I want to
| | 01:00 | be, and obviously I can't
see the rest of my drawing.
| | 01:04 | But if we open up the Pan and Zoom
window, you'll see how helpful that is.
| | 01:07 | We go up to the View menu again, and we
are going to be spending a lot of time
| | 01:10 | here in this View menu in this section.
| | 01:12 | Second one down is Pan and Zoom window.
| | 01:15 | So we give that a click.
| | 01:17 | Now, right now, mine showing up over
here on the right hand side, and you can
| | 01:20 | see it's kind of like my Task Bar in
Windows Vista where as soon as I touch it,
| | 01:25 | it appears when I am not using it,
it scrolls up and disappears.
| | 01:30 | So I am going to go to back
to my Pan and Zoom window here.
| | 01:33 | The Red Box you see represents the
area that I am currently viewing.
| | 01:37 | So as I move this around, you can see
how it allows me to select a section to
| | 01:41 | work on and when I release,
I am in the right spot.
| | 01:44 | I don't need to use these Scrolls Bars
going horizontally across the bottom or
| | 01:48 | vertically up and down.
| | 01:50 | I really like that Pan and Zoom window.
| | 01:52 | So here I am working in a section and
busy maybe moving text around, changing it.
| | 01:57 | Now, I want to go to the
beginning of my drawing.
| | 01:59 | I can move over here.
| | 02:01 | Now, I can also change the Zoom Level.
| | 02:03 | You'll notice that there
are little handles in this.
| | 02:05 | So if I squeeze it open a little bit, you can
see I've just zoomed out to a different level.
| | 02:11 | Zoom way in, and I am seeing just a
smaller part of my screen, but using the Pan
| | 02:16 | and Zoom window, I can adjust that.
| | 02:18 | I can also adjust it from the Slider
Bar over here on the right-hand side.
| | 02:21 | So scrolling down towards the minus sign,
I am zooming out, and my box gets bigger.
| | 02:28 | If I zoom in, the box gets smaller, and
what I am able to see I am really zoomed into.
| | 02:34 | That's great for working on intricate
areas of my drawing, but it's not very
| | 02:38 | good for seeing, drawing in its entirety.
| | 02:41 | So get comfortable with Pan and Zoom.
| | 02:43 | It's very handy tool.
| | 02:44 | There's a good zoom
level for me in this drawing.
| | 02:47 | That's about it there, and of course
as I want to move to different areas, I
| | 02:50 | just click and drag that box.
| | 02:52 | Now, there's a little Push Pin button here.
| | 02:55 | This is the Auto Hide option.
| | 02:57 | If I click that, I am turning off Auto Hide.
| | 02:59 | Now, if you have got Auto Hide not turned
on, clicking that actually does turn it on.
| | 03:05 | So as I move away from the Pan and
Zoom window, now you can see that it's
| | 03:09 | staying open here for me.
| | 03:11 | Now, that may have been your default,
it depends on what was used last.
| | 03:14 | But the Push Pin is what changes it from
Auto Hide to not Auto Hiding. Now, it's on.
| | 03:20 | As I move away, I kind of like how it
just gets out of my way, so I can work on
| | 03:25 | my drawing until I need it, then I come back
and make adjustments as needed. All right.
| | 03:31 | To close the Pan and Zoom window, we
come down here to the Close button and now,
| | 03:36 | we are back to working with our
different zoom levels from the Standard toolbar
| | 03:40 | and using our scroll bars
to move around our diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Size & Position window| 00:01 | In the last lesson, we looked at the
Pan and Zoom window to allows us to zoom
| | 00:05 | into specific areas of our drawing
easily and then just move around the drawing
| | 00:10 | dragging that little red box.
| | 00:12 | Now, we are going to look at something
a little bit different called the Size
| | 00:15 | and Position window.
| | 00:16 | So if we want to know the exact size
and position of shapes or objects on our
| | 00:20 | page, we could find that out quickly
without having to look at the rulers at the
| | 00:25 | top and down the left hand side.
| | 00:26 | So we still have Timeline10a opened here.
| | 00:30 | We are going to go up to the View
menu and from here we'll select Size
| | 00:34 | and Position window.
| | 00:35 | So it shows up down here for me.
| | 00:38 | Now, depending on what I select, I am
going to see some data about that selection.
| | 00:42 | For example, this long timeline, if just
click anywhere in it, you can see it's selected.
| | 00:46 | And because it's selected down here in
the Size and Position window, I can see
| | 00:51 | the exact start point, which is 2.01
inches, the beginning of the Y point,
| | 00:56 | which is 3.91 inches.
| | 00:58 | So going down and across.
| | 01:00 | We are looking at 3.9 and 2.01.
| | 01:03 | That's the intersection.
| | 01:04 | Now you can see where it ends, way over here.
| | 01:07 | And you can see that the X ending
position is 15.6898 inches, the Y position 3.91.
| | 01:16 | Not a big difference there. It's the same.
| | 01:18 | Everything stays the same on the Y level.
| | 01:20 | There was a change though on the X axis.
| | 01:23 | Now, we also see the exact length of our object,
which is 13.6798, in this case our timeline.
| | 01:30 | If it was on an Angle, we would see the
degrees here, and there's our Height at 0.57 inches.
| | 01:35 | So not only do we get to see
information about what we select, for example if I
| | 01:39 | click this tiny little box here.
| | 01:41 | You can see that's a little bit different.
| | 01:42 | You can see exactly where it's located,
the position on the X and Y scale.
| | 01:47 | Then the width and height is 0.57x0.57.
| | 01:51 | So I can see information about
any of these shapes, but I can also
| | 01:55 | adjust information.
| | 01:56 | For example, the beginning point is 2.01.
| | 01:59 | I think it should be right at 2.0.
| | 02:00 | So I am going to come in here.
| | 02:01 | I am going to take out the 01.
| | 02:04 | I am going to leave it at 2.0.
| | 02:04 | And maybe it should begin
here at the 4-inch mark.
| | 02:10 | I am going to type in 4.
| | 02:12 | When I move down to another field, you
can see things adjusting here on the screen.
| | 02:17 | The ending and for the X and the Y
is irrelevant, and the length is okay.
| | 02:23 | How about the height?
| | 02:24 | Let's make it a nice, round 0.6.
| | 02:25 | Now, when I type in 0.6, and I just
move to any of these other fields,
| | 02:30 | watch what happens.
| | 02:31 | It gets a little bit taller.
| | 02:34 | So it's adjusted here, right
from the Size and Position window.
| | 02:37 | So it's a great tool for viewing
information about your shapes, but also for
| | 02:41 | adjusting that information if you need
to just by simply clicking on the field
| | 02:46 | where you need to make the change.
| | 02:47 | We also have a Push Pin here.
| | 02:49 | So clicking the Push Pin will turn on Auto Hide.
| | 02:52 | That means as I move away, it will disappear.
| | 02:54 | So I move into my drawing.
| | 02:56 | Now, it's still open, but it's scrolled up.
| | 02:59 | As I hover over the Title bar
here, it opens back up for me.
| | 03:02 | Now, depending on what's selected, I
am going to see information about what's
| | 03:06 | selected, when it scrolls open for me.
| | 03:09 | Clicking the Push Pin again turns off Auto Hide.
| | 03:12 | So now as I move into my drawing, it
stays open, depending on what I click on, I
| | 03:16 | am going to see information
about whatever I click on.
| | 03:19 | Of course, I can zoom back to
view the entire page. Okay.
| | 03:25 | To close this-- and by the way,
any of these windows can be moved.
| | 03:28 | You may have noticed the Four-Sided
Arrow when I moved into the Title area.
| | 03:32 | I can move that up over here to the
right hand side, and when I do, you can see
| | 03:36 | it creates a pane and adjust
the size of my drawing space.
| | 03:40 | If I move it out of there,
clicking and dragging, again there's an
| | 03:43 | adjustment made and I can have it
floating anywhere I want or I can have it
| | 03:47 | locked into position.
| | 03:48 | You can see it kind of snaps to the ruler
there and down below it snaps in as well.
| | 03:53 | All right.
| | 03:55 | To close it up, click the Close button,
and if you needed that back, remember we
| | 03:59 | have to go to the View menu to get those items.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Drawing Explorer window| 00:01 | Sometimes, it's good to be able to see
a hierarchy of the list of shapes in any
| | 00:06 | other objects that you might
have in a drawing sorted by page.
| | 00:09 | Well, the Drawing Explorer provides this view.
| | 00:13 | Just another useful tool in Visio that
gives you another way to look at your diagram.
| | 00:17 | So what we are going to do now is
actually open up a different diagram.
| | 00:20 | We'll go to the Open button here,
navigate to your Lesson 10 folder of your
| | 00:24 | exercise files, and find OfficePlan10b,
give that one a click, and open it up.
| | 00:31 | So this is a drawing
that's actually a floor-plan.
| | 00:34 | You can see there's multiple pages here.
| | 00:36 | You may have opened Page 1.
| | 00:38 | There's Page 2, and we also have a background
in here that's applied to both of these pages.
| | 00:42 | So you can just click on the Page 1
tab, if you are not looking at it now.
| | 00:46 | All right, so let's take a look at this
Drawing Explorer window and see how it can be useful.
| | 00:51 | We go up to the View menu to find it
of course, and we come down to Drawing
| | 00:54 | Explorer window, give that a click,
and you can see it opens up here on my
| | 00:58 | screen right here on the top left corner.
| | 01:00 | Now, just like the other windows we
have been looking at, there's a Push Pin
| | 01:03 | here, if we prefer to use Auto Hide.
| | 01:05 | So when we pull the pin out, like so,
Auto Hide is on, meaning when I move away
| | 01:10 | from the window, it scrolls up.
| | 01:12 | So I only see it when I need it by
hovering over it, it opens up again.
| | 01:16 | Now here you can see how things have
been broken up in this particular drawing.
| | 01:20 | I have got Foreground pages, and there's a
little plus sign here for expanding that.
| | 01:24 | I have got Background pages, Styles,
Masters and then any Fill patterns, Line
| | 01:30 | patterns, and Lines ends that have been
used are listed here in these folders.
| | 01:34 | So let's go to our Foreground
pages and click the plus sign.
| | 01:37 | There's my two pages, Page 1 and 2.
| | 01:39 | Now to see the contents of Page 1, I
click the plus sign next to it, and you
| | 01:43 | can see it's broken up into shapes, layers,
and there's the background that's applied to it.
| | 01:47 | Now, what's kind of neat is when you
click on something it gets selected here
| | 01:51 | in your drawing page.
| | 01:52 | So you can see by clicking Background
1, it took me right to Background 1.
| | 01:57 | If I go up to Shapes and click the
plus sign, you can see them listed here.
| | 02:00 | I've got an L shaped room and if I click on
that, it becomes selected on my drawing page.
| | 02:06 | If I click on the door look at
that, it's selected over here.
| | 02:10 | Back to the Drawing Explorer.
| | 02:12 | If I go to the multi-chair round-table,
there's a plus sign next to it, and you
| | 02:16 | can see each of the shapes that makes up that.
| | 02:19 | So as I click on it, each
chair for example is selectable.
| | 02:23 | So if I wanted to remove a chair, I hit
Delete on my keyboard and the chair is gone.
| | 02:27 | It moves right to the next one.
| | 02:30 | That's something I should probably undo.
| | 02:32 | So I am going to go up to my Standard
toolbar and click the Undo button to bring it back.
| | 02:36 | I think I've clicked the Push Pin so
I am turning off Auto Hide, so it's
| | 02:41 | going to stay open.
| | 02:42 | To collapse the branch, I'll just click
the Minus sign, and you can see I have
| | 02:46 | got a scroll bar here now when too
many items show up on one screen.
| | 02:50 | Of course I can adjust the size of this
window if I wanted to but when it gets
| | 02:54 | to be too big, look at that.
| | 02:56 | I have got my scroll bar to scroll through.
| | 02:58 | So I am going to minimize shapes.
| | 03:00 | I am going to minimize
Page 1 and move on to Page 2.
| | 03:04 | If I click on Shapes there, you can see
again I have got an L shaped room, but
| | 03:09 | there's a different layout in here.
| | 03:10 | I have got Cube Workstations.
| | 03:12 | So I can select those
easily right from this window.
| | 03:16 | There's my room measurement, look at that.
| | 03:18 | I didn't know I had that, but there's
the room measurement and there's the
| | 03:21 | information showing up right here in the middle.
| | 03:23 | So that was automatic.
| | 03:24 | That's not something that was
entered manually. Kind of cool.
| | 03:29 | There's a window.
| | 03:30 | There's another window down below. All right.
| | 03:33 | So you can probably get an idea of
how this could be useful to close up the
| | 03:38 | Drawing Explorer window.
| | 03:39 | You just click the Close button here
when you are done with it, and you are left
| | 03:42 | on your drawing page with the Item
selected as we've selected it from the
| | 03:45 | Drawing Explorer window.
| | 03:47 | All right, to deselect, we just click
off of the drawing page here where there's
| | 03:51 | nothing to select, and we are ready to move on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Merging anchored windows| 00:01 | All right, in the last few lessons we
have been opening up various windows to
| | 00:05 | help us navigate our drawings and find
shapes and get information about objects
| | 00:10 | on our drawing page.
| | 00:11 | For example, we looked at the Pan and
Zoom window was helpful when we are zoomed
| | 00:14 | in to move around our document or our drawing.
| | 00:17 | Then we looked at the size and
position window to get the exact size and
| | 00:20 | position of shapes in a drawing, and
then in the last lesson, we opened up
| | 00:24 | the Drawing Explorer window to get
a different way to view the various
| | 00:28 | contents in our drawing.
| | 00:29 | So what happens when we want multiple
windows open and we want to stay organized?
| | 00:34 | Well, let's go up to the View menu.
| | 00:35 | Now, before we do, if you've jumped to
this lesson, we still have OfficePlan10b
| | 00:39 | open from the previous lesson here.
| | 00:41 | You can see it on the Title Bar.
| | 00:43 | Go ahead and open that up
if you want to follow along.
| | 00:46 | Then we'll go to the View menu here,
and let's open up our Pan and Zoom window.
| | 00:50 | Now for me it opens up over here on the
right hand side of my screen on the top corner.
| | 00:54 | And that's because that's where
it was the last time I used it.
| | 00:57 | So don't worry too much
about where it shows up for now.
| | 01:00 | We'll go to View and let's open
up our Size and Position window.
| | 01:03 | So for me, that's bottom-left corner.
| | 01:05 | That's where it was when I used it last.
| | 01:08 | From the View menu, let's open up our
Drawing Explorer window from the last lesson.
| | 01:11 | It shows up here in the top-left corner for me.
| | 01:14 | All right, so with all of these open,
you can see how it obstructs our view
| | 01:18 | of our drawing page.
| | 01:19 | Well, we know we can use the Push Pins
here to turn on the Auto Hide feature
| | 01:24 | which if they are all turned on, you
can see how when we move away from the
| | 01:28 | actual window that they scroll up for us,
and that's one way to stay organized,
| | 01:33 | but they are still scattered around.
| | 01:34 | So let's go back in here and click the
Push Pin to turn off Auto Hide for each
| | 01:39 | one of them, and talk about another
way that we can get organized with the
| | 01:43 | various windows that are open.
| | 01:45 | All right, so they are all
back to where they started.
| | 01:48 | Auto Hide is turned off for each one, and
let's talk about Floating versus Anchoring.
| | 01:53 | So right now, these are anchored into
the corners of our screen and we are
| | 01:57 | using the ruler up here.
| | 01:58 | You can see that this is anchored to the
top left corner here using the ruler on
| | 02:03 | the left and the ruler on the top.
| | 02:06 | Same thing goes over here.
| | 02:07 | Each of them is anchored to a corner.
| | 02:09 | Now, we can go into the Title Bar and
just when we see that Four Sided Arrow,
| | 02:13 | move a box and it becomes floating.
| | 02:16 | Now, if we right-click on the Title Bar
for example here where it says Size and
| | 02:20 | Position, you can see I have got
an option here to anchor the window.
| | 02:23 | So I am going to click Anchor Window and
it goes anchored right back to where it was.
| | 02:26 | If I right click now, I can float the
window, and it goes back to floating.
| | 02:31 | So of course, I can just drag
it when it snaps into the corner.
| | 02:34 | Let go when it's anchored as well.
| | 02:36 | But I can also anchor it to a position
in my screen, not my Drawing Window here.
| | 02:40 | So look what happens here
with Pan and Zoom for example.
| | 02:43 | I am going to right-click
to float the window first.
| | 02:46 | Now, from the Title Bar here, I am
going to click and drag, and instead of just
| | 02:50 | snapping to the corner, I am going to go
even further to the right and look what happens.
| | 02:55 | An entire area is created for Pan and Zoom.
| | 02:58 | I can adjust that when I see a
Double Arrow on the border here.
| | 03:01 | I am just going to drag it.
| | 03:02 | So I have got a little
bit more of a drawing page.
| | 03:05 | Now, what we are going to do is merge
any of our windows that are open such as
| | 03:09 | the Drawing Explorer and the
Size and Position window as well.
| | 03:12 | This is very useful.
| | 03:13 | I am going to go over to my Drawing
Explorer here, click, it's selected, and I
| | 03:17 | am going to drag it over inside the Pan
and Zoom area and let go. See what happens.
| | 03:21 | It looks like it just replaced it.
| | 03:23 | But what's really happened is it's
merged and down below I have got a Pan and
| | 03:27 | Zoom tab and a Drawing Explorer tab.
| | 03:31 | So let's bring our Size and
Position window inside there as well.
| | 03:35 | No selection, but there's a third tab down here.
| | 03:38 | So I can move between the
various windows by clicking their tabs.
| | 03:41 | If I click on an object now, I am going
to get the exact information including
| | 03:46 | the Size and Position of what's selected.
| | 03:49 | Go to my Drawing Explorer, and I can
expand and look at the various objects or
| | 03:54 | shapes on a page, and
select them right from here.
| | 03:58 | Need to go to Pan and Zoom, I can do that too.
| | 04:00 | Not very useful when I can see the
entire page, but just to review when I zoom
| | 04:05 | in, this becomes very handy if I
want to Zoom or Pan to a specific area.
| | 04:11 | I can even use it to zoom out and zoom in,
and there's a Slider Bar here as well
| | 04:16 | for zooming in and out. All right.
| | 04:20 | So right now, Pan and Zoom is selected.
| | 04:22 | The Close button up here will close
this window, but look what happens when I
| | 04:26 | click and drag it into my Drawing Page.
| | 04:29 | I have actually dragged the
whole thing, not just Pan and Zoom.
| | 04:32 | I have got each of my tabs down here as well.
| | 04:35 | So it doesn't have to be located
at the right-hand side of my screen.
| | 04:38 | I can drag it down to the very bottom.
| | 04:40 | There's it's snapped and anchored into
position, but if I move further down, you
| | 04:45 | can see now it's taking up
the bottom portion of my screen.
| | 04:48 | Now, I see the Title Bar over here on the left.
| | 04:51 | So it can be floating, yet all merged together.
| | 04:54 | It can be anchored and we can even
have it take up an area of our screen by
| | 04:59 | going all the way to the right
or all the way down to the bottom.
| | 05:02 | How do we separate them now?
| | 05:03 | We go down to the tab itself.
| | 05:05 | So Size and Position, I am going to right-
click and I am going to choose Float Window.
| | 05:09 | So now it's removed from the other two,
and I can just move it by clicking and
| | 05:13 | dragging it to an area of my screen.
| | 05:16 | Notice over here Drawing Explorer is
showing and I have only got two tabs that
| | 05:20 | are merged together here, Pan and Zoom.
| | 05:23 | Again, if I right-click on Pan and
Zoom down here, and choose Float Window,
| | 05:26 | it's now floating as well, and I can move it
around and if I wanted to float, no problem.
| | 05:33 | I just click and drag it to an
area of my drawing screen here.
| | 05:37 | Same thing if I want the
Drawing Explorer window to float.
| | 05:41 | Again, I right-click up here, choose
Float Window, and now none of them are merged.
| | 05:46 | They are all floating right where
they were before when we started.
| | 05:49 | I can anchor them into position.
| | 05:51 | You can see if I move down to the
bottom-left, it kind of snaps into position there.
| | 05:55 | I can size them if I want.
| | 05:57 | Going to the border allows me to size those.
| | 06:00 | And of course I have also got that option if I
wanted to, Auto Hide them, I can do that too.
| | 06:05 | So now you have got all the options.
| | 06:07 | Whatever works for you to help you
stay organized and work on your drawing at
| | 06:11 | the same time, you now have everything
you need to know to make your choice.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting a drawing scale| 00:01 | So far in the section we have worked a
little bit with a floor plan and in some
| | 00:06 | previous lessons too.
| | 00:07 | And one thing we haven't talked
about yet is the Drawing Scale.
| | 00:11 | If you have ever built a home or you
have had to move offices and use a floor
| | 00:14 | plan and look at specs or even a
blue print for that matter, you need to
| | 00:19 | understand what the Drawing Scale is.
| | 00:20 | In other words, X number of inches on the
drawing page equals 1 foot in real life.
| | 00:26 | So one thing you can do in Visio is
set the drawing scale for drawing.
| | 00:30 | Now, you probably want to do it before
you start drawing or adding shapes to the
| | 00:34 | drawing page, because if you do it
after, then you may run into some problems
| | 00:38 | with resizing things after the fact.
| | 00:40 | Now, to continue on we are going to
create a new floor plan but first I am going
| | 00:44 | to just close up some of these
windows I have opened on my screen.
| | 00:47 | I won't be needing them, and this
is just from the previous lesson.
| | 00:51 | Don't worry about that.
| | 00:52 | We are all going to go up to the New
button drop-down here, and from the
| | 00:55 | drop-down, we'll go to Maps and Floor Plans.
| | 00:58 | Now, let's just create a
simple floor plan here in US Units.
| | 01:02 | So we give that a click and we get our
blank drawing page here in front of us.
| | 01:06 | You can see across the top, I
have got 0 feet to 140 feet.
| | 01:11 | And then vertically I go from 0 down
here all the way up to close to 100 feet.
| | 01:16 | So that's how much room I have to play with.
| | 01:18 | Now, if the drawing scale for my floor
plan is going to be larger or smaller.
| | 01:22 | For example, if I have got a huge
floor, that's going to be a couple of 100
| | 01:26 | feet across and maybe more than 100 feet down,
then I may need to change the drawing scale.
| | 01:32 | A default drawing scale is assigned to
our drawing when we create a New here
| | 01:36 | using this particular template by default.
| | 01:38 | So let's go up and change the drawing
scale, and we do that by going up to
| | 01:43 | File then to Page Setup, give that a
click, and we click the Drawing Scale tab
| | 01:50 | right up here at the top.
| | 01:51 | Now, you can see the predefined
scale that I am using right now for this
| | 01:54 | architectural drawing is a quarter inch on
my drawing page equals 1 foot in real life.
| | 02:01 | So I can choose to have no scale.
| | 02:03 | It's 1 to 1 in that case, a predefined
scale, and from this drop-down, I can
| | 02:07 | choose Civil Engineering Metric.
| | 02:10 | You can see Mechanical Engineering.
| | 02:11 | This is going to be architectural.
| | 02:13 | It's going to be a floor plan.
| | 02:14 | So we'll leave it at that.
| | 02:15 | But I can choose from some other
predefined scales here, for example a half
| | 02:19 | inch equals a foot.
| | 02:20 | So if my building floor plan is not
going to be as big as the drawing page I
| | 02:25 | have here, almost 100 feet
vertically and across 140 feet.
| | 02:30 | I can narrow it down here,
so maybe half inch is a foot.
| | 02:34 | You can see I have got three
quarter, one inch is a foot, and so on.
| | 02:38 | So I can use a Scroll-bar to see some
other options, and I can go all the way
| | 02:42 | down to 330 seconds equals
1 foot on my drawing page.
| | 02:46 | So let's just change it.
| | 02:47 | Let's just move it from a quarter
inch to a half inch and see what happens
| | 02:51 | when we click Apply.
| | 02:55 | So over here on the ruler, you can
see now I don't go as high as 100.
| | 02:59 | I have just cut it in half.
| | 03:00 | I am almost reaching 50 feet, and if I
move this out of the way, you can see I
| | 03:04 | am going across the top to just pass 70 feet.
| | 03:07 | So it definitely makes a
difference on my drawing page.
| | 03:11 | Let's try another one here.
| | 03:12 | Let's go down to one inch, and when we
click apply, look what happens to the rulers.
| | 03:18 | I have got about 24 feet to work with here,
and only about 36 feet to work with going across.
| | 03:24 | Of course if we knock it down, I am
going to move up with my Scroll-bar to 1/8th
| | 03:29 | of an inch, and I am going to click OK.
| | 03:32 | That's the one I actually want to use.
| | 03:34 | Now I have got up to 280 feet across, and I
have got almost 200 feet here going up and down.
| | 03:41 | So now, when I pull a room into my
drawing page for example, you can see how
| | 03:45 | small it is the default size.
| | 03:47 | So when I drag this to make it bigger,
you know I have got a very large room here.
| | 03:53 | If I wanted to see those
dimensions, you know how to do that.
| | 03:55 | Go back to our previous lesson to show that.
| | 03:58 | But definitely I have just changed the
drawing scales for my entire drawing.
| | 04:01 | I am going to zoom in a little bit, so you
can see what's there while it's selected.
| | 04:05 | Let's go to 100% and I am going to go up
to my View menu just to review, the Pan
| | 04:10 | and Zoom window, and I am going to move
to the very top here where you can see I
| | 04:15 | have got 160 foot room.
| | 04:17 | If I move to the very far left hand side
here, I am just going to move that over here.
| | 04:22 | I have got 116-foot room.
| | 04:25 | So using the Dimension tool, or using the
Pan and Zoom helps me to see that information.
| | 04:30 | I am going to zoom back out now to about 75%.
| | 04:33 | Let's move all the way back to see
the entire page, and there's my room.
| | 04:37 | So now you know how to set the drawing scale.
| | 04:39 | It's best to do it before you start
drawing, but it can be done after, no
| | 04:43 | worries, but you will have some
adjusting to do as things kind of get cramped
| | 04:47 | into a small corner if you increase the
scale, and the opposite will happen if
| | 04:51 | you change it the other way obviously.
| | 04:53 | What you have drawn may go off
the page and you will have to adjust
| | 04:56 | it accordingly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Editing PagesCopying, cutting, and pasting Items| 00:01 | As you are working on your drawings in
Visio, and your editing those drawings,
| | 00:05 | building them up into something, you
can save a lot of time and effort, if you
| | 00:09 | know the basics of
cutting, copying, and pasting.
| | 00:13 | That's what we are going to do now.
| | 00:14 | So let's open up a drawing
that's been started for us.
| | 00:17 | Click the Open button here, navigate
to the Lesson11 folder of your exercise
| | 00:22 | files, and we will open up
this one here, OfficeFloorPlan11a.
| | 00:25 | Give that a double-click or one
click and Open brings it up on screen.
| | 00:30 | All right, so here is our office
building and you can see it's made up of at
| | 00:35 | least two pages and a background here.
| | 00:37 | So Page-1, Page-2 is the second floor,
so it's got a bit of a different layout,
| | 00:40 | and there is our Background.
| | 00:42 | That's the information that
shows up on every single page.
| | 00:45 | So go back to Page-1 here. We are expanding.
| | 00:47 | Let's say this is the scenario and
we want to add one of these cubicles.
| | 00:51 | Maybe over here, there is room for one.
| | 00:53 | So the easiest way is to actually
take one that's there and copy it.
| | 00:59 | There is a couple of different
ways I want to show you, for copying.
| | 01:02 | First of all, if I click on this item
and this is the item, the workstation,
| | 01:06 | that I want to copy.
| | 01:07 | I can go to the Edit menu.
| | 01:09 | You can see Copy is right there.
| | 01:12 | I can also use a keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:14 | Ctrl+C will copy this.
| | 01:16 | Where does it get copied to?
| | 01:17 | An imaginary location called the
clipboard and it will just sit there, until we
| | 01:22 | choose to paste it but there is another
option that I would like to use, if it's
| | 01:25 | going to be an exact duplicate.
| | 01:27 | Another way to copy and paste at the
same time is to use Duplicate and you can
| | 01:32 | see its Ctrl+D here on the shortcut list.
| | 01:35 | So I am going to click over here on my
item and I am going to de-select, so I
| | 01:39 | have got the whole cubicle selected here.
| | 01:42 | On the keyboard, I am going to hold down
Ctrl and press the letter D. So you can
| | 01:45 | see its being copied and pasted, simultaneously.
| | 01:49 | So now I can move it into position.
| | 01:51 | I can use this rotate handle
to move it around, like so.
| | 01:55 | Now I am going to just kind
of anchor to the wall here.
| | 01:57 | You see how it kind of
snaps into position and release.
| | 02:01 | I will de-select it, to see the end result.
| | 02:04 | So I could use Ctrl+C for copy and
then I would have to use Ctrl+V on the
| | 02:09 | keyboard to paste, or through the
Edit menu, I can do that as well.
| | 02:12 | There are some buttons on the tool
bar as well for copying and pasting.
| | 02:16 | What we haven't talked about yet is cutting.
| | 02:19 | So cutting an item and that's a little
scissors icon here is Ctrl+X on the keyboard.
| | 02:24 | That's if you want to remove an
item and paste it somewhere else.
| | 02:27 | So you don't actually want
to copy, like this table here.
| | 02:30 | I want it down here.
| | 02:31 | Now I could just move it, right?
| | 02:32 | But if I was going from page to page,
let's say, I can click on it, Ctrl+X on
| | 02:38 | the keyboard or the scissors up here,
removes it, puts in the clipboard until I
| | 02:43 | am ready to paste it.
| | 02:44 | So I can go to another page, for example,
and paste it using Ctrl+V, or I have
| | 02:50 | got my Paste button right here.
| | 02:52 | So once it's pasted, then it's a
matter of moving it into position.
| | 02:56 | So I am going to put one right there.
| | 02:57 | All right, let's go back to Page-1.
| | 03:01 | Anything that's sitting in the
clipboard can be pasted multiple times.
| | 03:04 | So Ctrl+V, paste it into this page as well.
| | 03:08 | I am going to move it back where it started.
| | 03:10 | I am going to do another one, Ctrl+V
gives me another table, and I am going to
| | 03:14 | move it down here into this area. There we go.
| | 03:18 | So keep that in mind too, when you cut
or copy, the item that you cut or copy
| | 03:23 | goes into the clipboard and then you
can paste it as many times as you like.
| | 03:27 | So imagine having 20 or 30
workstations on a floor, where you have brought in
| | 03:32 | the first one, you can copy it and
then just paste it as many times as you
| | 03:36 | need it in the drawing.
| | 03:38 | So that covers cutting, copying, and pasting.
| | 03:41 | Next, we are going to look at
copying an entire drawing page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying a drawing page| 00:01 | If you had your eagle eye going in the
previous lesson, you may have noticed
| | 00:05 | the shortcut for copying an entire
drawing, not just an individual object or
| | 00:10 | shape from that drawing.
| | 00:12 | So just review, if we wanted to
duplicate a workstation here, we can click the
| | 00:16 | workstation, go up to the Edit menu,
and see Copy is available to us, Ctrl+C on
| | 00:21 | the keyboard is a shortcut.
| | 00:23 | Well, let's see what happens, if we don't
have anything selected on our drawing page.
| | 00:28 | So if nothing is selected when we go
up to the Edit menu, look what Ctrl+C
| | 00:32 | does on the keyboard.
| | 00:33 | It's a shortcut for Copy Drawing.
| | 00:36 | So we can click Copy Drawing right here
to copy the entire page, the way we see it.
| | 00:40 | So that's a good scenario if, for
example, we wanted to add a third floor to
| | 00:45 | our building plan here.
| | 00:46 | We have got a Ground Floor, we have a
Second Floor, and now we have a Third
| | 00:50 | Floor, and we want to
duplicate one of these floor plans.
| | 00:52 | So if you are skipping to this lesson,
we are working on OfficeFloorPlan11a, but
| | 00:58 | you can click your Open
button to get all caught up.
| | 01:01 | You will navigate to the Lesson11
folder of your exercise files, click
| | 01:04 | OfficeFloorPlan11b, and Open that one.
| | 01:07 | So we want to add a third floor, we
will go to Page-2 here, because we want our
| | 01:12 | third floor after this page.
| | 01:14 | We will go up to Insert, choose New
Page, and you can see it's going to be
| | 01:19 | called Page-3, by default.
| | 01:20 | We could rename that Third Floor or Floor 3,
if we wanted to, but we will keep the default.
| | 01:26 | It's going to use the background
that both other pages are using.
| | 01:28 | We click OK, we have got our
new blank page here called Page-3.
| | 01:32 | Well, what we want to do
is take Page-2's layout.
| | 01:36 | So we are going to go to Page-2 and this
layout we want to duplicate on the Third Floor.
| | 01:41 | So again with nothing selected, we
go up to the Edit menu and choose Copy
| | 01:45 | Drawing, or click the Copy button up
here on our tool bar, or use the keyboard
| | 01:51 | shortcut, Ctrl+C. When we do that the entire
contents of this page get copied to the clipboard.
| | 01:58 | That means if we go to Page-3 and
paste using Ctrl+V on the keyboard, or
| | 02:04 | click the Paste button. Your choice.
| | 02:06 | Look what happens, I get an
exact duplicate of my Second Floor.
| | 02:10 | In fact, it's even labeled Second Floor.
| | 02:12 | So the only change, I need to make is
to double-click here and double-click on
| | 02:16 | the word Second and type in Third,
de-select by clicking out here and I am done.
| | 02:22 | So in an instant, I was able to
duplicate my Second Floor on a new Third Floor.
| | 02:27 | So as easy as that to copy an entire drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Find and Replace| 00:01 | If you are accustomed to using word
processing applications like Microsoft Word,
| | 00:07 | for example, you may have used the
Find or the Find and Replace feature.
| | 00:10 | You know it can save you a ton of time,
if you are searching for a specific
| | 00:14 | piece of text in a long document.
| | 00:16 | Using Find, we will take you directly
to whatever it is that you are looking for.
| | 00:20 | Using Find and Replace can save you a
lot of time in finding those pieces of
| | 00:23 | text that you need to
replace with something else.
| | 00:26 | Well, Visio is not a
word processing application.
| | 00:30 | It's a drawing application, but our drawings,
as you can see, often have text in them.
| | 00:35 | So having a Find and Replace or just a
Find feature can save us a ton of time in
| | 00:39 | our drawings as well.
| | 00:41 | So let's open up a drawing that
has a little bit more text in it.
| | 00:44 | We will go to the Open button,
navigate to the Lesson11 folder of your
| | 00:48 | exercise files, and you can double-click
Process11c, or one click and Open
| | 00:53 | does the same thing.
| | 00:56 | Now here is a diagram, looks like some
kind of process flow that appears to be
| | 01:00 | linked to some external data.
| | 01:02 | So that could be a spreadsheet or a
database, and the data from that spreadsheet
| | 01:07 | or database is showing up, or at least
some of it is showing up in the actual
| | 01:12 | shapes on my drawing.
| | 01:13 | So let's keep that in mind as we
go through the Find feature first.
| | 01:18 | We will go up to the Edit
menu and we will click on Find.
| | 01:21 | Now you see the Find has a keyboard shortcut.
| | 01:24 | That's Ctrl+F and also has
these little binoculars icon.
| | 01:27 | That means there is a button on our
tool bar to accomplish this as well.
| | 01:31 | So we will click on Find right here.
| | 01:33 | So we have the field here, Find what,
what are we going to be looking for?
| | 01:38 | We can look for a piece of text that is located
inside a shape, so Shape text is selected here.
| | 01:46 | It could be data. Ah, Shape data.
| | 01:48 | So if this is linked to external
data, we can find that text as well,
| | 01:52 | even though we are not in that
application, like Excel or Microsoft
| | 01:55 | Access, for example.
| | 01:57 | What about the name of the shape?
| | 01:59 | Should we include that, when we
are looking for a specific text?
| | 02:02 | Yeah, we can, including
User defined cells as well.
| | 02:05 | We can search in all the pages in a
drawing, just the current page we are
| | 02:09 | working on, or even narrow it down
to a specific selection, if we use our
| | 02:14 | Marquee Select to select an
area of our drawing, for example.
| | 02:17 | So what are we going to look for?
| | 02:18 | Well, why don't look for Service Sales.
| | 02:26 | Now I know that there are numbers of
these shapes that are tied to a service
| | 02:29 | sales representative.
| | 02:31 | Service Sales is all we need.
| | 02:32 | We don't need the third word, representatives.
| | 02:35 | So all we need to do now is
decide, if we need to Match case.
| | 02:39 | So does my results have to be in
uppercase at the beginning of each word, like
| | 02:44 | this, or could they all be
lowercase, or all uppercase?
| | 02:47 | If I Match case, it has to
appear exactly the way I typed it.
| | 02:50 | I don't need to match case and I don't
need to match the character width as well.
| | 02:55 | With that I can even narrow it
down to the width of the characters.
| | 02:58 | So what I am going to do is hit Find
Next and you can see this first box is
| | 03:03 | highlighted, it's selected, but if you
look inside the box, you are not going to
| | 03:07 | find the word Service Sales.
| | 03:10 | If we go back to our dialog here, you
can see that Service Sales was found in
| | 03:15 | Shape data under "Owner".
| | 03:18 | So if we look down below in the data,
you can see that under the Owner column,
| | 03:22 | yeah, Service Sales does show up many times.
| | 03:25 | So each time we had Find Next, it's
going to take us only those shapes that
| | 03:30 | contain the words, Service
Sales in the data, in this case.
| | 03:35 | Here it's jumping over to another one.
| | 03:37 | Eventually, it doesn't find any more and
this dialog shows up Visio has finished
| | 03:42 | searching all pages. So we click OK.
| | 03:43 | All right, let's say Cancel.
| | 03:47 | That is the Find feature.
| | 03:49 | What about Find and Replace?
| | 03:50 | Well, when we do a Find and Replace, we
are looking for something and we want to
| | 03:54 | replace it with something else.
| | 03:57 | Well, that means we cannot search in
the data, like we just did when we use the
| | 04:01 | Find feature, because we are not
allowed to replace data that's in an external
| | 04:06 | source, for example, a spreadsheet.
| | 04:08 | We would have to go into Excel to do
our Find and Replace there, if we wanted
| | 04:11 | to change the data.
| | 04:12 | So keep that in mind.
| | 04:13 | We will go up to the Edit menu
and we will click on Replace.
| | 04:18 | So here you can see what I was
looking for last, which is Service Sales.
| | 04:23 | I am going to change that to the word
Status and I want to replace it with the
| | 04:28 | words, Current Status.
| | 04:31 | I am going to type those in, so
I am changing one word into two.
| | 04:35 | So rather than going through each of
the shapes in my diagram, finding the
| | 04:38 | word Status, clicking inside there, adding the
word Current, going to the next one and doing it.
| | 04:44 | I can use Find and Replace.
| | 04:46 | I have got the same options, as I had
using Find, but down below my buttons are
| | 04:50 | a little bit different.
| | 04:51 | Find Next is going to take me to the
first occurrence of the word Status and you
| | 04:55 | can see it's highlighted here in this box.
| | 04:58 | So now my options are to Replace it
and if I do, it will replace it with
| | 05:02 | Current Status and move to the next one, in
which case, I have to hit Replace to do it again.
| | 05:07 | So I am going to hit Replace, sure
enough, and now it says Current Status over
| | 05:11 | here and it says Status is selected
and it's going to be replaced as I click
| | 05:16 | Replace, but they are all the same.
| | 05:18 | So to save a whole bunch of time, I am
going to click on Replace All, its goes
| | 05:23 | through every box, changes them all.
| | 05:26 | You can see it says Current Status in
every one of these and I click OK, when
| | 05:29 | it's done and close up the
Find and Replace dialog box.
| | 05:34 | So I am going to click out here,
outside of my drawing, to see the end results.
| | 05:38 | Now it says Current Status in
every single one of these shapes.
| | 05:42 | So that is a huge time saver.
| | 05:44 | Keep in mind that this is not a word
processing application but we do use text,
| | 05:48 | so Find and Replace can save
you a lot of time in Visio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Undo and Redo| 00:01 | If you have been following along since
the very beginning, you already know that
| | 00:06 | in few of the previous
lessons, we used the Undo feature.
| | 00:09 | The way we used it was to try something
out and if we didn't like it, we could
| | 00:13 | just undo it and that's a great use for Undo.
| | 00:16 | Now Undo can also come in
handy, if you make a mistake.
| | 00:18 | You can undo that mistake and start over.
| | 00:21 | Well, there is also a Redo feature
that allows us to undo the Undo's.
| | 00:26 | If that make sense, we are
going to try that out in a second.
| | 00:28 | There is also a history that goes with
that, so you can undo multiple steps at
| | 00:32 | one time, if you needed to.
| | 00:34 | All right, so we have been
working away here on Process11c.
| | 00:37 | To get all caught up with us, you can go
to the Open button, if you are skipping
| | 00:41 | to this lesson, and open up Process11d.
| | 00:45 | So that's in your Lesson11
folder of your exercise files.
| | 00:49 | Open that and you will be all caught up with us.
| | 00:51 | All right, so we are going to use
this process diagram to make a couple of
| | 00:56 | changes and then see what
happens, when we undo them.
| | 00:59 | So let's start by going up to Access
Technical Feasibility, we will click on
| | 01:04 | this shape here, and specifically, we
will click down below here where we see
| | 01:09 | Average Time and days is 3.
| | 01:11 | So I am going to double-click
and I am going to type in 5 days.
| | 01:16 | I am just going to click outside the box
here and you can see that's actually a mistake.
| | 01:20 | I thought I was changing the 3 to 5
days but I have actually added text to the
| | 01:24 | middle here, it looks messy.
| | 01:27 | So I can go to my keyboard, the
shortcut is Ctrl+Z. Holding down the Ctrl key,
| | 01:32 | tap the letter Z and then release both,
or I can go up to my Standard toolbar,
| | 01:38 | there is my Undo button.
| | 01:39 | I should be able to find it here
under Edit as well and when I do, I see a
| | 01:44 | little more information.
| | 01:46 | Undo Set Text, that's what I actually did.
| | 01:49 | So if I click Unto Set Text, it's undone.
| | 01:53 | I click outside here to see
that everything is back to normal.
| | 01:57 | All right, so let's do a couple of other
things and see if we can undo multiple mistakes.
| | 02:03 | So we are going to click on this box and
hit Delete on the keyboard. That removes it.
| | 02:07 | Let's delete another one, it's gone,
and we will delete a third one as I-- I
| | 02:13 | thought that these will close up automatically.
| | 02:15 | I guess they are not properly
connected and it doesn't look right.
| | 02:19 | So we need to undo.
| | 02:21 | Now the Undo button allows us, if we
want to click it three times, to undo all
| | 02:24 | three of those steps.
| | 02:26 | Now there is a little drop-down next to it.
| | 02:28 | You can see it right here.
| | 02:29 | You can see we have got three
deletes and we can undo one, two, or three
| | 02:34 | actions all at ones.
| | 02:35 | So I am going to click right
down here on the third one.
| | 02:38 | Look at that, they all come back.
| | 02:40 | Now you may have noticed that the Redo
button just became active and if I click
| | 02:43 | that drop-down, I can undo
the undo that I just did.
| | 02:48 | So the first, second, or third delete,
I could redo all of those things.
| | 02:54 | It's only the first one that I wanted,
so I click on it and only the first
| | 02:58 | deletion is in effect.
| | 03:00 | So in that case I could do something
different, if I wanted to, or I could undo
| | 03:04 | it by bringing it back with
the Undo button. So that's Undo.
| | 03:08 | Keep in mind that you have got that history.
| | 03:10 | You are not limited to just
undoing the last task or the last step.
| | 03:15 | You can undo multiple steps using
that history or the drop-down next to
| | 03:19 | the button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking spelling| 00:02 | Again, as I mentioned in the previous
lesson this is not a word processing
| | 00:06 | application, this is a drawing application.
| | 00:09 | So Visio, although, we're not
creating long documents like we might in a
| | 00:14 | Microsoft Word, we are creating drawings
that contain text and whenever there is
| | 00:18 | text to be entered, well you
know that mistakes can happen.
| | 00:21 | So there is a spelling feature that allows
us to check spelling for an entire diagram.
| | 00:27 | So what we are going to do
is open up another drawing.
| | 00:30 | We will go to the Open button up here,
navigate to the Lesson 11 folder of your
| | 00:34 | Exercise Files, if you need to,
and we will open up Process11a here.
| | 00:39 | Double-click it or one click and
Open brings it up on the screen.
| | 00:42 | All right, so yours may look the
same as mine or you may be seeing a
| | 00:47 | different part of the screen.
| | 00:48 | That's irrelevant right now.
| | 00:49 | What we are going to do is check the
spelling for this entire drawing and we
| | 00:53 | find spelling under the Tools menu.
| | 00:55 | Now just before we run the spell checker
which, by the way, is F7 on your keyboard.
| | 01:01 | Let's check out the Spelling Options.
| | 01:03 | So we give that a click
and the dialog box opens up.
| | 01:06 | You can see that by default we are going
to ignore words that are in upper case.
| | 01:10 | So if we type it all in upper case it
can be a word that's not recognized in the
| | 01:14 | dictionary and it will be skipped over
or in other words that will be skipped
| | 01:19 | over or words that contain
numbers. That's by default.
| | 01:21 | But again, you can check or uncheck
any one of these boxes. It's up to you.
| | 01:26 | Ignore Internet and File Addresses,
in the past this used to be a pane.
| | 01:30 | Every time you came across a www.
something, it would stop there.
| | 01:35 | Same thing went for File
Addresses and Email Addresses.
| | 01:39 | So with this checked off at least
we will be able to ignore those.
| | 01:43 | It is going to flag repeated words,
so if you have used the same word twice
| | 01:46 | like my name is David.
| | 01:50 | It would find that double word is and
is and replace it if you wanted to with a
| | 01:54 | single occurrence of that word.
| | 01:56 | Enforce accented upper case in French.
| | 01:58 | If French doesn't apply to you,
you don't need to enforce that.
| | 02:01 | Suggest from main dictionary only or
custom dictionaries can be included as well.
| | 02:06 | Now by default this is not checked off,
so other dictionaries can and will be
| | 02:10 | used unless you check it off,
then it's just the main dictionary.
| | 02:14 | Something else that's turned on when
correcting spellings in Visio, Check
| | 02:17 | spelling as you type.
| | 02:19 | So what's going to happen is you will
see words appear with a red squiggly
| | 02:22 | underline just like you would in
Microsoft Word indicating that that's a word
| | 02:26 | not recognized in the dictionary, in
that case you have some options, you can
| | 02:30 | run the speller or you can actually
right click on the word and have Spelling
| | 02:34 | Options at your fingertips, I
will show you that in a second.
| | 02:38 | If you prefer, you can hide
spelling errors by clicking this checkbox.
| | 02:42 | So I will just click OK here, those
are our options and now before we run the
| | 02:46 | spell checker, I want you to just
scroll down to the bottom of the drawing and
| | 02:50 | over to the left where it
says created by David Flusse.
| | 02:54 | So if we double-click in there, that it
gets us inside the text box and you an
| | 02:57 | see the word Flusse does
have a squiggly red underline.
| | 03:01 | So I am going to right-click on that
and you can see I have got some suggested
| | 03:05 | replacements and then I have also got
some other options like AutoCorrect.
| | 03:12 | I have got spelling right from here,
because this is a proper name that I
| | 03:16 | probably just want to add to the
dictionary, so it doesn't stop there ever again.
| | 03:20 | It's not something I want to replace
with any of these suggested replacements.
| | 03:24 | So we will leave it as it is for now,
the speller will come to it when we run
| | 03:27 | the spell check from up here on the Tools menu.
| | 03:31 | So I'll click Tools>Spelling>Spelling.
| | 03:34 | All right, so it's found up here in our
title, the word, well it looks like it
| | 03:40 | should be customer, changed to costumer.
| | 03:43 | No that's not what we want, we
actually want customer, don't we?
| | 03:47 | Customer Engagement Workflow.
| | 03:49 | So we click our suggestion, this is the
one we want and then our options are we
| | 03:53 | could ignore that word, no,
we don't want to do that.
| | 03:55 | We don't want to ignore it
every time it shows up that way.
| | 03:58 | Add it to the dictionary?
| | 03:59 | No, I don't think so.
| | 04:00 | Change is what we want to select.
| | 04:02 | So it gets changed and automatically
the speller moves on the next word, which
| | 04:07 | looks like it should be workflow.
| | 04:09 | There is one too many Ls in there and
workfellow, this is the one we want workflow.
| | 04:13 | Change.
| | 04:15 | Something is happening here.
| | 04:17 | The word Staus is not in the
dictionary, so it's not finding this word.
| | 04:24 | It's suggesting we replace it with
the word Stabs. I don't think so.
| | 04:28 | It should be Status.
| | 04:29 | Now if you know for a fact that this
mistake has been made more than once, you
| | 04:34 | can choose to change them all.
| | 04:36 | So every time it finds the
word, Staus, replace it Status.
| | 04:40 | So I am going to choose Change All.
| | 04:42 | So let's get all changed and now we
are down to that one we started with, the
| | 04:47 | word Flusse, it is not
recognized in the dictionary.
| | 04:51 | We don't want to change it to any of
these suggestions, it's a proper name, this
| | 04:55 | would be a perfect one to add to the
dictionary and it will never be treated as
| | 04:59 | a spelling error again.
| | 05:01 | So we would click Add and it looks like
the spell check is complete, so we click
| | 05:05 | OK and we know now that our
diagram has proper spelling.
| | 05:10 | So that's all there is to
checking spelling in a Visio diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Sending DrawingsEmailing a drawing to a mail recipient| 00:01 | All right, we are going to talk about
how easy it is now to share your work
| | 00:05 | in Visio with others.
| | 00:06 | Perhaps you are working on a drawing
for somebody and you want to send it to
| | 00:10 | them for their approval or just
send them the finished products.
| | 00:12 | It's as easy as accessing
email from right within Visio.
| | 00:16 | Another scenario might involve
multiple people working on the same project.
| | 00:20 | And you might want to do your part and
send it off to the next person who does
| | 00:23 | their part and then they would send it
off to the next person and so on until
| | 00:26 | it comes back to you.
| | 00:27 | We call that a routing list and you
choose the recipients who are going to
| | 00:31 | receive the diagram in this case in Visio.
| | 00:34 | So we are going to look at both of
those scenarios starting with the email.
| | 00:36 | Let's go to the Open button first, and
it will open up a diagram in the Lesson
| | 00:41 | 12 of your Exercise Files.
| | 00:42 | Find ProjectPlan12a.
| | 00:45 | You can double-click that or one click
and Open, it will bring up on your screen.
| | 00:49 | All right, so here is a
diagram that we have been working on.
| | 00:53 | Let's say we are finished and we are
ready to send it off to the person who
| | 00:56 | requested it or maybe we call this a
draft and we want to get some input from
| | 01:01 | someone else or have them approve it.
| | 01:03 | We might just want to send it to them via
email and we don't have to exit Visio to do that.
| | 01:08 | We just go up to the File menu up here,
click File, come down to Send To and
| | 01:14 | over to Mail Recipient.
| | 01:15 | Notice that in brackets it says as an
attachment, in other words this document,
| | 01:20 | this diagram is going to be
attached to our email message.
| | 01:23 | So we click on that and our
default email program launches.
| | 01:27 | In my case, it's Microsoft Outlook.
| | 01:28 | So you can see here the subject is
already in there that's the name of this
| | 01:32 | diagram, ProjectPlan12a, it's a .vsd,
a Visio drawing, and down below you can
| | 01:37 | see it's attached here, ProjectPlan12a.
| | 01:40 | And you can even see the size of it.
| | 01:42 | Now the rest is just regular email.
| | 01:44 | I can enter out an email address right
here or I can click the two button and
| | 01:49 | select the person I want to send it to,
if I want to Bcc anybody or Cc anyone, I
| | 01:54 | can use these buttons as well, click OK.
| | 01:57 | This is a whole Outlook lesson that you
can check out at Lynda.com, but for now
| | 02:02 | we are just going to enter a couple
of addresses, maybe put in a message.
| | 02:05 | I am going to say, 'Please review and provide
feedback,' let's say by tomorrow. Here we go.
| | 02:17 | Now all we have to do is hit
the Send button and off it goes.
| | 02:22 | So not much to sending a drawing via
email, we just send it off, Outlook
| | 02:27 | launches in my case, because that's my
default email program, whatever yours
| | 02:30 | is, it will launch.
| | 02:32 | The document, the drawing, whatever
you want to call it will be attached to
| | 02:35 | your email message, and all you do is
choose who you are sending it to and send it off.
| | 02:40 | All right, next we are going to
look at that routing recipient list I
| | 02:43 | was talking about.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Emailing a drawing to a routing recipient| 00:01 | All right, let's talk about another
scenario where you might want to send your
| | 00:05 | drawing off to other people and
this is when you are collaborating.
| | 00:08 | So in our scenario that we are going to
play out here, I have a drawing that I
| | 00:12 | am working on, but I am going
to need input from other people.
| | 00:15 | So I am going to create what's
called a routing recipient list.
| | 00:18 | It's going to go one person
then another, then another.
| | 00:21 | I'd like it to come back to me when
it hits the last person on the list.
| | 00:26 | So I can wrap it up, fine tune it,
and create the finished product.
| | 00:30 | So to create our routing recipient list,
it's similar to sending our drawing via email.
| | 00:36 | Now first of all, we are still
working on ProjectPlan12a up here, you can
| | 00:39 | see that, if you are skipping to
this lesson, go to your Open button,
| | 00:42 | navigate to the Lesson 12 folder of
your Exercise Files and open up this
| | 00:46 | file called ProjectPlan12a.
| | 00:48 | It's the only one in there.
| | 00:49 | Now you are all caught up, we'll go to the
File menu, we will go down to Send To,
| | 00:54 | but this time we are going
to choose Routing Recipient.
| | 00:57 | Now by default I go right to the
Routing Slip dialog box that you see here.
| | 01:02 | You may have to choose a
profile before you get here.
| | 01:05 | Now if you have got multiple people
with multiple email addresses in Outlook on
| | 01:11 | your system, then you would choose the
correct profile, click OK to get to here.
| | 01:15 | I have got the only profile on this
machine, so I've jumped right to the Routing
| | 01:20 | Slip dialog box that you see here.
| | 01:22 | So here is where I choose the people
who are going to receive my drawing and I
| | 01:25 | choose the order here as well.
| | 01:27 | I am going to use the Address button
down below, by default it's showing my
| | 01:31 | Contacts in my Address Book and here
are the people who are going to get it.
| | 01:35 | And Karen Corey selected right now.
| | 01:37 | So I am going to come down here and click
the to button and Karen gets added to the list.
| | 01:41 | I am also going to send it to the
Winston Berry, so with that selected I
| | 01:44 | click the To button.
| | 01:45 | You can see it's creating a list down below.
| | 01:48 | When I am done, I click OK.
| | 01:51 | So here is my list.
| | 01:53 | It's going to go to Karen Corey first
then Winston Berry and if I want I can
| | 01:57 | have it come back to me at the end.
| | 01:59 | We will talk about that in a second,
but what if you want to change the order.
| | 02:02 | If Winston Berry should be first, we can
click on Winston Berry and click the Up
| | 02:06 | arrow to move him up to the top.
| | 02:08 | So we have got an Up and a Down arrow here
to change the order of our recipient list.
| | 02:13 | Okay, we can add more people by clicking
address if we wanted to, but that's it for now.
| | 02:18 | We will go down to the Subject, which
is by default going to be Routing and the
| | 02:22 | name of the diagram that we are routing.
| | 02:24 | We can also add a quick message down below
somewhere to entering a message in an email.
| | 02:29 | I am going to say, 'Please add your
piece and forward to the next person on the
| | 02:39 | list.' Options down below allow me to
send it to one after another, so it's
| | 02:45 | going to go to Winston Berry then
when Winston Berry is done, it will go to
| | 02:49 | Karen Corey or I could send it to
everyone, all at once, then the order doesn't
| | 02:54 | matter, but I do want it
to be one after another.
| | 02:56 | I want it returned to me when done, so I
will make sure there is a checkbox here
| | 03:00 | with a checkmark in it.
| | 03:01 | And I want to track the status.
| | 03:04 | I want to know where it is at any give time.
| | 03:05 | So I am going to click that checkbox as well.
| | 03:08 | Now this button up here labeled Add
Slip is going to create the slip, the
| | 03:12 | routing slip and it's actually
going to send it to those people.
| | 03:16 | This is a send button as well.
| | 03:18 | So when I click Add Slip, boom!
| | 03:20 | Off it goes to the first person on the list.
| | 03:23 | Now here is something
interesting, what if you realize Oh!
| | 03:25 | I missed somebody, somebody is
should be added to that list.
| | 03:28 | You can go to the File menu, when you
come down to Send To, look what it says
| | 03:33 | now, Other Routing Recipient.
| | 03:36 | So me clicking this, it's going to send
it to the next person, but if I need to
| | 03:43 | add someone else, another routing
recipient, I can click here, there is my
| | 03:47 | original list, I click Address, I can
navigate or just type in an email address
| | 03:53 | if I wanted to, but I would add
somebody here, click OK when I am done and they
| | 03:57 | get added to the list and then I would
add the slip again which sends it off.
| | 04:02 | So I am going to hit Cancel here,
because my list perfect just the way it is,
| | 04:06 | but just so you know, if you forgot
somebody, it's never too late.
| | 04:09 | You can always go back and do that.
| | 04:10 | All right so that covers
our routing recipient list.
| | 04:14 | Now you know how to send via email
from the previous lesson and to send to a
| | 04:18 | list of people on a list
called Routing Recipients.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. PrintingSetting paper size and orientation| 00:01 | All right folks, I think there is one
piece of business left to cover before
| | 00:05 | we go deep into creating various diagrams in
Visio and that's your page setup and printing.
| | 00:11 | So we are going to start with page
setup, because there is something very
| | 00:14 | important you need to understand when
working with a drawing page in Visio
| | 00:18 | versus what you print.
| | 00:19 | So we are going to go to our Open button
here and give that a click, navigate to
| | 00:23 | the Lesson13 folder of Exercise
Files and open up FloorPlan13a.
| | 00:29 | You can double-click that or one
click and Open brings it up on the screen.
| | 00:33 | Now by all accounts this looks
like a pretty simple drawing.
| | 00:37 | It fits on one page here.
| | 00:38 | I can see down below, I have only
got one page and the background.
| | 00:42 | Background is made up of the logo and
this title, but everything looks good.
| | 00:47 | It looks like it's going
to print fine, doesn't it?
| | 00:48 | But you got to be careful, because
your drawing page can be a different size
| | 00:53 | from what you are printing on in the printer.
| | 00:55 | Let me show you what I am talking about.
| | 00:56 | We will go up the File menu here and
we are going to come down to Page Setup.
| | 01:02 | Now from Page Setup here in the Page
Setup dialog you can see there is a number
| | 01:06 | of tabs and the first one is
selected which is our Print Setup.
| | 01:09 | So check it out over here.
| | 01:11 | You can see we have got two, what it
looks like two different sheets of paper.
| | 01:15 | One is the Drawing Page and one is
Printer Paper and down below if I look at
| | 01:19 | this the Printer Paper is set to be 8.5x14.
| | 01:22 | That's legal paper in Portrait Mode
whereas my Drawing page is setup to be
| | 01:27 | 8.5x11 on its side Landscape, which is
really 11x8.5.So I am going to see here
| | 01:34 | that perhaps my drawing on the
drawing page might not fit properly on the
| | 01:38 | printer paper and I may
need to adjust accordingly.
| | 01:41 | So there are two different options.
| | 01:42 | I can change my printer
paper or my drawing page.
| | 01:46 | Right now with Print Setup selected,
and the Print Setup tab selected I am
| | 01:50 | adjusting printer paper.
| | 01:51 | If I come down here and change this to
something else, I am going to do that now.
| | 01:55 | I am going to go from Legal here, I am
going to just scroll up to Letter and you
| | 02:00 | can see now I got the same size.
| | 02:02 | Paper, it's just that I need to turn
this on its side, landscape, and now it
| | 02:06 | matches perfectly my drawing page over here.
| | 02:08 | You can see the corners folded up to
show that the printer paper in behind is
| | 02:12 | the exact same size.
| | 02:13 | All right, so if I click OK I am going
to return to my drawing page here and
| | 02:19 | nothing looks different. That's the secret.
| | 02:22 | You got to watch out for this, because
sometimes when everything looks great on
| | 02:26 | screen, it doesn't come out that way on paper.
| | 02:28 | But we know now that because we have
adjusted our printer paper size and the
| | 02:32 | orientation, everything is
going to work out nicely.
| | 02:35 | Let's just go back there for a moment.
| | 02:36 | We will go up to the File here and
down to Page Setup, give that a click and
| | 02:41 | let's go to our Page Size tab now.
| | 02:44 | Now down here, you can see we had a
Pre-defined size which is Standard, Letter
| | 02:49 | 8.5x11 and because it's landscape it
shows up here as 11x8.5, and you can see we
| | 02:55 | get the same diagram here on our Page Size tab.
| | 02:59 | But this is kind of cool.
| | 03:00 | We can set our drawing page to be
the same as our printer paper size.
| | 03:04 | So no matter what we've selected on the
Print Setup tab, this will always ensure
| | 03:09 | that our drawing page is the
same size as what's going to print.
| | 03:13 | So that's a handy little one there to turn on.
| | 03:15 | We will click Apply and that means if
we go back to our Print Setup here and we
| | 03:19 | make a change, our Drawing page is
going to change as well. Let's test it out.
| | 03:23 | Let's go back to that Legal size paper.
| | 03:26 | We will leave it at Landscape, and you
can see already they are both the same size.
| | 03:31 | When I click Apply, in behind you can
see now that I have got a much bigger
| | 03:35 | drawing area and that's because
it's adjusted to match the printer size
| | 03:40 | that I've chosen here.
| | 03:41 | If I switch that back to Letter and we
will leave it at Landscape, and click
| | 03:48 | Apply, everything is adjusted
back in the background here.
| | 03:51 | So when I click OK, I returned to my
Drawing page and I can be confident now
| | 03:56 | that this is going to print properly.
| | 03:58 | So speaking of print, we are going to
dive deep now into the various print
| | 04:01 | options beginning with
our Print Zoom option next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Print Zoom| 00:01 | One other things that I would like to
tell you about under Page Setup just
| | 00:05 | following along in our theme is the
ability to zoom your drawing and it's called
| | 00:09 | Print Zoom, and what that means is if
you need to blow up your drawing you can
| | 00:15 | and will print on multiple pages.
| | 00:16 | If you want to bring it down so it fits
on to a single page you can do that as
| | 00:20 | well using the various zoom levels.
| | 00:22 | Let me show you what I am talking about.
| | 00:24 | So from the previous lesson here
we are working on FloorPlan13a.
| | 00:26 | We are going to open up a different
floor plan now that looks very similar.
| | 00:31 | We will click the Open button and we
will open up FloorPlan13b here in the
| | 00:36 | Lesson 13 folder of your Exercise Files.
| | 00:40 | So let's open that one up.
| | 00:41 | Now at first glance, this looks like
pretty much the same drawing, but if you
| | 00:46 | look at the scale, it's a much bigger
scale and if we go up to the File menu and
| | 00:51 | click on Page Setup, things are going
to look a little bit different here.
| | 00:55 | First of all, in the Print Setup tab
you can see that the printer paper here is
| | 01:00 | smaller than the actual drawing page,
which means that my drawing probably
| | 01:05 | overlaps and will not print
on a single piece of paper.
| | 01:08 | If I go to my Page Size tab here you
can see that it is set up as Ledger which
| | 01:13 | is 17 inches by 11 inches, and if I go back
to my Print Setup this is set up to be 8.5x11.
| | 01:19 | Well, if my printer doesn't take that
large ledger size that 17x11 sheet of
| | 01:25 | paper, I am kind of stuck.
| | 01:27 | But I do have some options under Print Zoom.
| | 01:29 | So one option here is to
just have it fit on one sheet.
| | 01:33 | So one sheet across by one sheet down
and you can see by default, things are
| | 01:38 | getting adjusted here so the drawing
page is actually going to fit now one
| | 01:42 | piece of printer paper.
| | 01:44 | So if was to click Apply here, things
will be adjusted so that I can print on a
| | 01:48 | single sheet of paper.
| | 01:50 | Now let's go back a second here.
| | 01:51 | What if I wanted to zoom into this thing,
so I want to blow it up and put it up
| | 01:55 | on a wall for example?
| | 01:56 | In that case, I would want it to
print on multiple pieces of paper.
| | 02:00 | So let's say I want to change the
zoom level here to 200%, now you can
| | 02:04 | see what's happening.
| | 02:05 | The printer paper is only this big in
my preview thumbnail here which means to
| | 02:10 | fit the drawing page that I have set up,
I am going to need several sheets of
| | 02:14 | paper across and down.
| | 02:16 | It looks like nine full sheets
of printer paper set at 8.5x11.
| | 02:20 | So I would stick those all together
to create the one big drawing and maybe
| | 02:24 | stick it up on a wall for example,
and you can see the various levels.
| | 02:27 | I have got 400% here, here is the
actual size and then I can go down as well.
| | 02:32 | So 50% shows you that now my drawing
page is even smaller than my printer paper,
| | 02:37 | which is set at 8.5x11 Landscape.
| | 02:40 | So you can play around with these
Print Zooms to get exactly what you need.
| | 02:44 | If you wanted to print on a single sheet
of paper, that's a quickest way, fit to
| | 02:47 | one sheet across by one sheet down.
| | 02:50 | Now you could make it fit to one sheet
across by several sheets down or vice
| | 02:55 | versa, but that's totally up to you.
| | 02:57 | Use the Print Zoom though to get it
looking exactly how you need it when it prints
| | 03:01 | out to your printer.
| | 03:03 | Don't forget to click Apply or OK when you
are done and that will save your changes.
| | 03:08 | Now when we go to Print, everything is
going to work out exactly the way we want it.
| | 03:12 | So in the next lesson, let's
check out some of our Print Options.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Print Preview| 00:01 | All right, just before you send a
drawing to the printer, it's a pretty good
| | 00:04 | idea to get a preview of
what it's going to print like.
| | 00:08 | And that's important because we know
from the last lesson that what we see
| | 00:11 | on our Drawing page is not necessarily
what we are going to get on our printed paper.
| | 00:16 | So for example, this drawing may
not print on a single sheet of paper.
| | 00:19 | I may need more than one sheet of
paper for my printer to fit this drawing.
| | 00:24 | So let's check out Print Preview.
| | 00:25 | There is a couple of
different ways to get there.
| | 00:27 | First of all, let's open up another file.
| | 00:29 | We will go to the Open button here so
we are all together from the Lesson13
| | 00:33 | folder of your exercise files.
| | 00:34 | Let's open up FloorPlan13c.
| | 00:35 | Just give that a click and Open.
| | 00:39 | It looks much the same but maybe some
of the print settings are different.
| | 00:43 | To see what this is going to look like
when we send it to the printer, we can
| | 00:46 | click Print Preview from the toolbar right here.
| | 00:49 | We can use the keyboard. It's Ctrl+F2.
| | 00:52 | You can see that in the popup.
| | 00:54 | We can also go to the File menu and you
will find Print Preview there as well.
| | 00:57 | However you get there this is
what you see when you arrive.
| | 01:00 | A preview of what this diagram is
going to print like and you can see because
| | 01:05 | of the size of my Drawing page that it
doesn't all fit on one sheet of paper in
| | 01:09 | my printer, which is using these 8.5 x 11
sheets of paper on it side in Landscape Mode.
| | 01:16 | Okay, let's talk about what we
are looking at here now first.
| | 01:19 | We have got some View buttons
up here to look at a Single Tile.
| | 01:22 | So we have got four
tiles making up this drawing.
| | 01:25 | To look at one tile at a time we use
the Single Tile and then we use the
| | 01:28 | Navigation buttons to move from tile to tile.
| | 01:32 | So you can go back all the way to the
beginning, to the Last Tile, and if we
| | 01:37 | want to see the whole thing again,
well, we can go to Whole Page.
| | 01:41 | That's going to allow us to see our
drawing and the four sheets of paper is
| | 01:44 | going to need to accommodate that drawing.
| | 01:46 | Then we also have Current View,
which is the view in our Drawing page.
| | 01:50 | So when we are working on
this drawing this is what we see.
| | 01:54 | So we now know that we might want to
use our setup and we can access Page Setup
| | 01:58 | right from here to make some
adjustments before we print.
| | 02:03 | We also have some Zoom options here.
| | 02:04 | You can see the Zoom button.
| | 02:06 | Zoom In will zoom into my drawing and
now when I hover around, see when I go in
| | 02:11 | between pages here, my mouse pointer
turns into a Zoom Out button and that will
| | 02:16 | zoom me out to a single tile.
| | 02:18 | You can see the Single
Tile option selected here.
| | 02:21 | I can also zoom out using the Zoom
Out button and you will notice when I
| | 02:26 | hover over each of the tiles that make up
this printout, I have got a Zoom button as well.
| | 02:32 | So I can zoom in to a
specific tile just by clicking it.
| | 02:34 | All right, so I am going to
return to the Current View.
| | 02:39 | I really wish it could
print all on one sheet of paper.
| | 02:41 | So in that case, I might want to go to
my Setup button and make some adjustments
| | 02:46 | here, change the printer paper
to 17 x 11. That would work.
| | 02:50 | If my printer takes that size of paper
and you can see it in here as we scroll
| | 02:55 | through we have got a number of choices.
| | 02:57 | Lots to choose from and there is
our Ledger, 17 inches by 11 inches.
| | 03:03 | You can see now they are both of the same size.
| | 03:05 | If I click Apply and return to my Print
Preview, I am going to go to Page Size now.
| | 03:12 | Make sure that it's the same as the
printer paper, click Apply, click OK, and
| | 03:19 | when I close my Print Preview, look
at my drawing it looks great here.
| | 03:23 | Let's go back to Print Preview. Look at that.
| | 03:27 | It's almost fitting on
one single piece of paper.
| | 03:29 | So now I might need to adjust my Zoom levels.
| | 03:34 | I know I can do that too from the Setup
and if I look to Adjust to, I can select
| | 03:39 | one sheet across one sheet down, click Apply.
| | 03:44 | When I click OK, there is my Print Preview.
| | 03:47 | That's the Single Tile view, the
Whole Page view and the Current View.
| | 03:52 | They are all exactly the same because
what I see on my Drawing page is what I am
| | 03:57 | going to get on my printout.
| | 03:59 | Few things, I am able to get it
exactly the way I wanted to print out.
| | 04:03 | When I've got that, I can click
Close here from the Print Preview.
| | 04:06 | If I am ready to print, I can click
Print here to get the Print dialog or print
| | 04:11 | the page that I see in front of me.
| | 04:13 | We are going to talk about printing next,
so let's close our Print Preview and
| | 04:16 | we will move on to the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing a drawing| 00:01 | Okay, so far we've been spending a
lot of time getting ready to print, so
| | 00:05 | looking at our page setup and
zooming in and making adjustments.
| | 00:09 | Now it's time to actually send our
diagram to the printer and there are a
| | 00:14 | number of print options you need to
know about as well before you send a
| | 00:17 | diagram to your printer.
| | 00:19 | So let's open up a diagram,
so we are all on the same page.
| | 00:22 | We will go to the Open button,
navigate to your Lesson 13 folder of your
| | 00:25 | Exercise Files, and this is the one we want
here FloorPlan13d, give it a click and Open.
| | 00:32 | So this particular diagram
you can see is multiple pages.
| | 00:35 | Page 1, here is Page 2 down here.
| | 00:37 | I've also got a background that I
need to consider when I am printing.
| | 00:41 | I am going to go back to Page 1, right here.
| | 00:43 | There are number of different ways to print.
| | 00:46 | You've got your toolbar, the keyboard,
the menus, but I can tell the place that
| | 00:51 | I like to print from is Print Preview,
because that's where you are going to
| | 00:54 | make your adjustments, see the finished
product the way it's going to print and
| | 00:57 | when you are ready, you can
choose Print right from there.
| | 01:00 | And let's talk about the different options.
| | 01:02 | Here you can see I've got a Print
button up here on the toolbar, this is to
| | 01:05 | print the page you are looking at right now.
| | 01:08 | No questions asked, Boom, off it goes
to the printer and you've got a copy.
| | 01:12 | Print Preview shows up right next to it,
we looked at that in our last lesson.
| | 01:16 | We are going to go back there in a moment.
| | 01:18 | On the File menu, you will also
see that we've got a Print option.
| | 01:22 | This brings up the Print dialog box
where we can choose options before we send
| | 01:26 | it to the printer and Ctrl+P on
the keyboard will do that as well.
| | 01:30 | But like I said, we can access print
from the Print Preview screen as well.
| | 01:35 | So I am going to click Print Preview.
| | 01:36 | So we saw this in the last
lesson this is what it looks like.
| | 01:40 | This is exactly how it's going to print.
| | 01:41 | It all fits nicely on the page,
how about Page 2? Yup, same thing.
| | 01:46 | So it looks like we are ready to print.
| | 01:48 | We can access the Print dialog right from here.
| | 01:51 | There is a Print button, and
notice that Ctrl+P shows up in brackets.
| | 01:54 | It's the exact same Print dialog that we
could have accessed from the File menu.
| | 02:00 | So from here, we've got some options as
well, and including the printer that we
| | 02:05 | are sending this to.
| | 02:06 | If you have got multiple printers or
you are on a network, you can choose your
| | 02:09 | printer from this dropdown.
| | 02:11 | Just find it on the list, give it a
click and it shows up in the Name field here.
| | 02:16 | The Status is Ready.
| | 02:17 | It's an HP DeskJet.
| | 02:19 | It's attached by a USB cable, great!
| | 02:22 | Information that I might want or need.
| | 02:25 | Options over here include
not printing the background.
| | 02:28 | I am going to move this down so you can see
my background is simply a logo and some text.
| | 02:32 | If I don't want that on the print out, I
would click this checkbox to say No Background.
| | 02:38 | I do want the background, so
I am going to deselect that.
| | 02:42 | If I would rather just print in black
and white, I can avoid color by clicking
| | 02:46 | this checkbox Color as black,
and I can print to a file.
| | 02:50 | So if didn't actually want to send
this to the printer, but to a file that's
| | 02:53 | printer ready, I can do that.
| | 02:55 | That way I can email the file, the
printer file and the person doesn't have to
| | 03:00 | have Visio to print what I have created
here, because the file is a print file
| | 03:05 | that they can just send to their printer.
| | 03:07 | All right, print range.
| | 03:10 | Well, by default I am
printing every page in my diagram.
| | 03:13 | All is selected here.
| | 03:15 | If I just want the current page, the
page I am looking at right now Page 1, I
| | 03:20 | would select Current Page.
| | 03:21 | If I want to be able to select the pages,
let's say I've got ten pages in this
| | 03:25 | diagram and I want pages 5-8, I can do that.
| | 03:29 | And also selection, which is not
available right now, means if I have got
| | 03:34 | something in my diagram selected like
one of these cubicles that I want to
| | 03:38 | print, then Selection would be
available, but with nothing selected in the
| | 03:42 | drawing, it is not available.
| | 03:45 | Current View is also an option.
| | 03:47 | That's what you see here in the Print
Preview and it will be sized to fit on one
| | 03:51 | sheet, if this checkbox is checked off.
| | 03:53 | So I am going to go back to All.
| | 03:56 | Over to the right we've also got the
Option a number of copies, just a caution,
| | 04:01 | when you up the number of copies from
one to anything greater than one, you may
| | 04:05 | want to also ensure that Collate is selected.
| | 04:08 | Because right now if I was to choose
three copies, you can see all the pages 1s
| | 04:13 | will come out, then the page 2s and so on.
| | 04:16 | By choosing Collate, I won't have
to adjust those later on manually.
| | 04:21 | I won't have to put them in the right
order to come out page 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3
| | 04:25 | and so on, depending on the
number of copies I have selected.
| | 04:28 | So I am going to bump that down to 1
copy, Collate is not available when it's 1
| | 04:33 | copy and clicking OK will send it my printer.
| | 04:38 | So off it goes to the printer.
| | 04:40 | I can close my Print Preview, go over to
my printer and pick up the printed copy.
| | 04:45 | That's all there is to printing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. General DiagramsCreating a basic diagram| 00:02 | All right, the moment we have all
been waiting for, we are going to start
| | 00:04 | drawing in Visio creating diagrams.
| | 00:08 | So you've got all of the basics,
the fundamentals under you belt.
| | 00:11 | Now it's time to start drawing, and
we are going to create just to get you
| | 00:14 | warmed up a basic drawing to start.
| | 00:17 | So from our dropdown here next to our
New button, give that a click and you will
| | 00:21 | notice that we've got all of our
templates and categories here like Business,
| | 00:25 | Engineering and so on.
| | 00:27 | General contains the one we are going
to start with, the basic diagram and we
| | 00:31 | will start in US units here.
| | 00:33 | But I want to show you another way to get
there, and that's through Getting Started.
| | 00:36 | And we talked about this a long time ago,
but under getting started you can see
| | 00:40 | I have got those same categories here
and if I go to General for example, there
| | 00:45 | is my basic diagram.
| | 00:46 | What I like about this screen under the
Getting Started option is that when you
| | 00:51 | click on one of these different basic
drawings here, and we are going to start
| | 00:55 | with the basic one up here under General.
| | 00:57 | You get a description of what
you might use this diagram for.
| | 01:01 | So here under Basic Diagram
Template, it contains two-dimensional
| | 01:05 | geometric shapes and directional
lines for feedback loops and for
| | 01:08 | functional decomposition.
| | 01:11 | You've got hierarchical data structure,
data flow block, and data block diagrams
| | 01:16 | that you would create with the basic diagram.
| | 01:18 | So we can double-click it or we could
click once and then click Create and
| | 01:22 | we've got our new screen here with our blank
drawing page ready to create our first drawing.
| | 01:28 | So that's just one way to get to it,
through Getting Started of course, from
| | 01:31 | the dropdown up here.
| | 01:33 | We could have just went to General
and then to basic diagram, same thing.
| | 01:38 | But if you need help with understanding
what kinds of diagrams, you would create
| | 01:42 | with these templates.
| | 01:44 | It's very handy to go to Getting Started.
| | 01:46 | So we have started our new drawing here.
| | 01:47 | I am just going to click out
here to deselect that menu.
| | 01:50 | And I am going to start with a background.
| | 01:52 | So I am going to go up to my
background stencil and I am going to
| | 01:55 | choose Background Steel.
| | 01:57 | You can choose whatever you want.
| | 01:58 | I am going to pop that one right there.
| | 01:59 | It doesn't fit until I let go, and then it
just snaps into place, so it fills my page.
| | 02:04 | All right, next I am going to click down
here on the Borders and Titles stencil,
| | 02:10 | and I am going to choose
this contemporary border here.
| | 02:12 | I am going to drag it on to my page.
| | 02:14 | Again it doesn't fit until I let
go of it, then it adjusts itself.
| | 02:19 | Now I would change the title up here just by
double-clicking Title, so it's highlighted.
| | 02:23 | And I am going to type in Training Program.
| | 02:29 | The date shows up in there, the
page number down at the bottom.
| | 02:32 | I am going to click out here to deselect.
| | 02:34 | Now it's time to start adding our
basic shapes, so I go down to the Shapes
| | 02:38 | stencil and I am going to add
a square, a four-sided square.
| | 02:42 | You can see it snaps into the middle here
when I reach the middle and I am going to let go.
| | 02:46 | Now with it selected I am
just simply going to type text.
| | 02:49 | I am going to type in Needs Analysis.
| | 02:53 | All right, it's selected.
| | 02:55 | The word Needs Analysis is inside.
| | 02:58 | When I click outside to selected box,
I zoom back out where I can see the
| | 03:02 | layout of my entire page.
| | 03:03 | All right, let's drag another square in there.
| | 03:06 | We are going to line it up right underneath.
| | 03:08 | It snaps into position, release and I am
going to type in Design. Click outside.
| | 03:18 | Let's do another one, another square,
and I am going to move it down here
| | 03:24 | underneath, try and get that to line up,
and I am going to type in Delivery,
| | 03:31 | click outside, I zoom back out.
| | 03:33 | And I am just going to put in this
rounded rectangle here, because it's the last
| | 03:37 | step in this process, and I am going to
narrow it down too, so we can size it.
| | 03:43 | We learned all about sizing out
graphics in a previous lesson.
| | 03:47 | And with it still selected I can now type,
I am going to type in Evaluation, good.
| | 03:54 | All right, so there is my boxes.
| | 03:56 | Now I just need to connect them.
| | 03:58 | You will notice here
that I have got some arrows.
| | 04:00 | Now these are just shapes.
| | 04:02 | So for example, I have got this fancy
arrow, there are some double arrows in
| | 04:06 | there, arrows with tails.
| | 04:09 | Now when I take those and I
drag them onto my drawing page.
| | 04:12 | I want you to see that they can connect
different boxes, when I hover over the
| | 04:17 | different connection points, you can see
that it's going to glue to a connection point.
| | 04:23 | So if I let go, that's connected.
| | 04:25 | If I move this, you can see I can rotate
it down till it's connected to the next one.
| | 04:32 | Now with this already here, I don't
need to go back and get another one.
| | 04:35 | If I want to use this again, Ctrl+D,
another shortcut we learned a few lessons ago.
| | 04:39 | I am going to move it down until
I see those two connection points.
| | 04:44 | Ctrl+D duplicates it again.
| | 04:48 | I am going to drag it down to the other side.
| | 04:49 | And notice that I don't have a
connection point in the corner for this shape.
| | 04:54 | So I can do, if I wanted to, a shape-to-shape.
| | 04:56 | Now you know with this one, you go
inside the shape that is going to be
| | 05:00 | connected from the shape to a
shape if I wanted to do that.
| | 05:04 | So I am going to do that with it
inside and the whole box selected.
| | 05:08 | It goes to the nearest connection point.
| | 05:11 | I am going to click-and-drag
this down, right there, boom!
| | 05:16 | And now although there wasn't any
connection point midway through this box,
| | 05:19 | there appears to be one now, just
because I did a shape to a connection
| | 05:24 | point kind of connection.
| | 05:25 | I deselect by clicking out here.
| | 05:28 | So there is a basic diagram.
| | 05:30 | Now obviously if I want to zoom in,
this is just 50% level, zoom in to 100%,
| | 05:35 | it's easier to read, but I don't get a
fuel for the entire layout of my diagram.
| | 05:42 | So that's just a simple basic diagram.
| | 05:44 | Obviously, as we move through the
lessons now, we are going to get a little bit
| | 05:48 | more complicated, we are going to
get a little more intricate with our
| | 05:51 | connections and so on, but we will just
simply come up here to save our changes,
| | 05:56 | if that's what we wanted and then
close up the drawing when we are done.
| | 05:59 | All right let's move on now to a block diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a block diagram| 00:01 | All right, in the previous lesson we
created this basic diagram and we found the
| | 00:05 | basic diagram template in the General
category of templates along with a block
| | 00:11 | diagram, and that's what
we are going to create next.
| | 00:13 | And we use a block diagram to create
the same kind of diagram as a basic
| | 00:17 | diagram, but with a little more
pizzazz you are going to see that the shapes
| | 00:20 | look a little bit different.
| | 00:22 | So let's go up to our New button
here, we'll click on the New button
| | 00:26 | dropdown, let's go down to General
and we'll go over to Block Diagram and
| | 00:32 | we'll use US units.
| | 00:33 | All right, so again, we start with a blank page.
| | 00:38 | If you look over here at the blocks, you
can see that they are a little bit different.
| | 00:41 | They've got a bit of shadow
to them or a 3D look to them.
| | 00:45 | If we go to the blocks raised, even
more so with three-dimensional look to
| | 00:49 | those, but if we go to Borders and we
go to Titles here, you can see they are
| | 00:54 | the same ones, same thing with the backgrounds.
| | 00:58 | So let's bring a background in
first, I'd like to do that and we are
| | 01:01 | bringing the background in.
| | 01:02 | It creates a background tab down below.
| | 01:04 | I am using Background geometric here.
| | 01:06 | We will go down to Borders and Titles.
| | 01:09 | I kind of like this one called Border Triangles.
| | 01:12 | I am going to drag the
over and it lines the sides.
| | 01:15 | It kind of gives it a bit of a border.
| | 01:17 | Let's add a title as well.
| | 01:19 | I am going to go over here to this
title block contemporary, and I am going to
| | 01:25 | just move it up here near the top.
| | 01:26 | I am going to double-click on Title,
so that just the word Title is selected,
| | 01:31 | and I am going to type in
Budget Flow, how about that?
| | 01:36 | So I will deselect by clicking outside
the title and now I got the basics, I got
| | 01:40 | my drawing area here now,
where I am going to add my shapes.
| | 01:44 | So I am going to go down to Blocks, down below
and open up that stencil just by clicking on it.
| | 01:49 | Then I am going to start with a regular box.
| | 01:52 | I am going to drag that onto the
drawing page, and I am going to make it a
| | 01:57 | little bit bigger so it's
easier to read what we put in here.
| | 02:01 | With it selected, we know we can just
type and the text is going to show up.
| | 02:04 | So I am going to type in Gather
Historical Data, and when I deselect you can see
| | 02:14 | that I still can't read, the box
is larger, but the text is not.
| | 02:17 | And if you look up here on our
formatting toolbar I am using Arial, 8 points.
| | 02:21 | Well, I am pretty sure that if I go
to 14 points that that's going to fit.
| | 02:25 | So let's double-click
inside with the text highlighted.
| | 02:29 | Let's change it to 14 points.
| | 02:32 | That looks good, we'll deselect by
clicking outside and now it's readable
| | 02:36 | from our full page view.
| | 02:38 | Okay, let's create another one.
| | 02:41 | I am going to bring the Diamond in
this time and I am going to align it up
| | 02:45 | here, because I am going to size it up a
little bit bigger when it lines up with the center.
| | 02:50 | I am going to simply with it selected
type in Enter Forecast Data, and you can
| | 03:01 | see I've got a typo there with the red
squigly, I can right-click and choose the
| | 03:05 | correct spelling of forecast, easy as that.
| | 03:07 | I am going to highlight this text and
make it a little bigger, I don't know if
| | 03:12 | 14 points is going to fit
on one line, but that's okay.
| | 03:14 | If it's on to, deselect to zoom out.
| | 03:19 | And let's add one more shape here, but
this time we will go down to Block raised
| | 03:23 | here, and let's choose our square block.
| | 03:26 | Try to get it down to
the bottom. Let's size it.
| | 03:30 | There is a good size, right there and make sure
it's lined up, centered with our other shapes.
| | 03:36 | And just like the other shapes,
although this one is raised, we can just simply
| | 03:39 | type in there 'Finalize Budget.'
I am going to highlight that text.
| | 03:50 | Again, it should be bigger, 14
points works, deselect to zoom out.
| | 03:55 | Now I am going to connect and I just going
to move over my Autoconnect buttons here.
| | 04:00 | You can see when I highlight it,
I just click, that's connected.
| | 04:03 | I am going to come down here,
click and it's connected there as well.
| | 04:09 | So there is my block diagram, very
similar to the basic diagram, but the
| | 04:15 | blocks and the arrows and the
different shapes I can choose from have more of
| | 04:19 | a 3D effect to them.
| | 04:20 | Of course I can come in here
and I can add my own effects.
| | 04:23 | I am going to highlight these two here
and give them a bit of a shadow perhaps.
| | 04:28 | So I am going to go up to Format on the
menu bar, down to Shadow and I am going
| | 04:33 | to have it go down into the right, so
the preview right now you can see the
| | 04:37 | Style is selected as None.
| | 04:39 | I'd like it to go down into
the right. That looks good.
| | 04:45 | I am going to click Apply to see what that
looks like in behind, because the color is blue.
| | 04:50 | It doesn't look right, so I
am going to change it to gray.
| | 04:54 | That's probably a good
color right there. Click Apply.
| | 04:57 | It allows me to see that, very good,
click OK, deselect to see the end result.
| | 05:03 | So there is my block diagram.
| | 05:05 | Now next we're going to take it a
step further and we're going to add some
| | 05:09 | perspective to our block diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a block diagram with perspective| 00:01 | All right, so we just finished
creating our Budget Flow here, a very simple
| | 00:04 | block diagram, but we are going to
take it a step further and add some
| | 00:08 | perspective to this and some more 3D
effects and we are going to create a block
| | 00:12 | diagram with perspective.
| | 00:15 | So instead of starting from scratch with
the background and the title and so on,
| | 00:19 | go to your Open button, give that a
click, and navigate to your Lesson14 folder
| | 00:24 | of your exercise files.
| | 00:25 | There is our BlockDiagram,
give that a click and Open.
| | 00:30 | So, here you can see we have got
the same background and we have got a
| | 00:34 | border and a title here.
| | 00:35 | If you look at the Background Stencil,
it's all of the same ones, Borders and
| | 00:39 | Titles, again the same ones.
| | 00:41 | When we come down low to the Stencil
labeled Blocks With Perspective, you can
| | 00:45 | see that this is a little bit different,
and in fact, on our drawing page here,
| | 00:49 | we have also got a VP.
| | 00:51 | It stands for Vanishing Point.
| | 00:53 | So I am going to move this
right up here to the top center.
| | 00:58 | That's going to be my Vanishing Point.
| | 01:00 | Watch what happens now
when we bring some blocks in.
| | 01:02 | I am going to bring this block over here,
down to the bottom of my page, align
| | 01:07 | it up in the center if I can, right
there, good, and you can see it's taking on
| | 01:12 | the Vanishing Point's perspective.
| | 01:15 | So if I bring up another block on top of
that, align it up centered, look at that.
| | 01:21 | You can see it's a little bit less
of a slant to it just because I am
| | 01:25 | approaching my Vanishing Point.
| | 01:27 | I am going to move that down a little
bit, good, and we will bring in one more.
| | 01:31 | I am going to bring in, let's just do
the same one, the block up near the top,
| | 01:37 | centered, slide it over a little
bit, and down right there, good.
| | 01:43 | So you can see what's happening now,
my blocks have that Vanishing Point
| | 01:48 | perspective, and if my move this, you
can see what happens to each of my blocks.
| | 01:53 | So I've just got a different effect.
| | 01:54 | Now just like any other block, if it's a--
I am going to move it to the center here.
| | 01:59 | You can see what's happening,
right to the center of this shape.
| | 02:02 | That's kind of cool.
| | 02:03 | You don't even see the 3D
effects of the middle block.
| | 02:07 | I am going to leave it right there,
and I am going to start up here.
| | 02:09 | With these blocks selected, I am
going to do the exact same thing.
| | 02:14 | I am going to type in my
text, Gather Historical Data.
| | 02:19 | Again, I can format that if I
wanted to with different fonts and sizes.
| | 02:24 | You know how to do that
now from previous lessons.
| | 02:27 | I am going to click on this box.
| | 02:29 | Again I would type text, I am
going to type in Forecasting this time,
| | 02:36 | double-click it and bump
that up to 14 points as well.
| | 02:41 | I am going to move down
to my lower one down here.
| | 02:44 | So I don't have to click outside the
box to zoom out, I can click right on the
| | 02:48 | next one, and I am going to type in here
Finalize Budget, highlight that, and 14 points, good.
| | 03:01 | Let's zoom out to see our
whole page from the Zoom dropdown.
| | 03:05 | You can see that's a whole lot
different when we have a Vanishing Point.
| | 03:08 | So we can adjust that so we get it
exactly where we want it, add our arrows in
| | 03:13 | now, and if I wanted to, I could use
some down arrows here, I am going to drag
| | 03:17 | that across, and I want to make sure that
it goes from one to the next. Look at that.
| | 03:22 | It's adjusted automatically for me,
Ctrl+D on the keyboard to duplicate, and
| | 03:27 | drag it down, so it goes from one, now
at this box, up above, highlighted with
| | 03:32 | the arrows, I can let go.
| | 03:34 | You can see it's not perfect, so I can drag
this down until it is a little bit better.
| | 03:41 | Click the arrow to connect
it, so they are connected.
| | 03:44 | When I release, you can
see a totally different look.
| | 03:48 | This is a block diagram
with some perspective now.
| | 03:51 | So if I don't like those, they don't make
sense, I can delete them by clicking them.
| | 03:54 | Hit Delete to remove them.
| | 03:58 | And if I wanted to, I could just go to
the box, click the arrow, and you can see
| | 04:02 | how it draws a connection because
it's using the connection points here.
| | 04:07 | Same thing here, I click,
draws a line down to the next one.
| | 04:11 | If they are not perfectly lined up,
you can adjust them until they are.
| | 04:14 | We can move the connection points if we want.
| | 04:24 | Move this one down here.
| | 04:27 | That might make better sense.
| | 04:29 | So you got the idea, we can delete
connection points and draw them ourselves,
| | 04:34 | right from here, down to there, and release.
| | 04:38 | Now, we have got our block
diagram with perspective.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Business DiagramsCreating an organizational chart| 00:01 | All right, let's focus for a
little while on business type drawings.
| | 00:06 | So business type drawings that you
will find in that category when searching
| | 00:09 | through the templates are going to include
things like org charts and graphs or pie charts.
| | 00:14 | You are going to see brainstorming
diagrams, even the new pivot diagram that
| | 00:18 | I want to show you.
| | 00:19 | We will save that a little bit
later, right now, let's start with
| | 00:22 | organizational charts.
| | 00:24 | There is a couple of
different to create an org chart.
| | 00:26 | Now you can do it manually by adding the
shapes and adding the various pieces of
| | 00:31 | data that go inside those shapes, or if
you have already got it somewhere, such
| | 00:35 | as a text file or in an Excel spreadsheet
for example, you can use that data to
| | 00:41 | create the org chart for you.
| | 00:43 | So let's go up to our New button here
and we'll click on the dropdown, come down
| | 00:49 | to Business, and we are
going to start with org chart.
| | 00:52 | Now you can see down here we have got
Metric and US units for an Organization
| | 00:56 | Chart, but we have also got
this Organization Chart Wizard.
| | 01:00 | So we will just start with
Organization Chart (US units), give it a click.
| | 01:05 | That opens up a blank page for us.
| | 01:07 | You can see the Organization Chart
toolbar is opened and floating for us.
| | 01:12 | Over here on the left you can see
all of the various org chart shapes.
| | 01:16 | I want to put an Executive in here
and you can see that there is a little
| | 01:21 | dialog that pops up that says, To connect shapes,
just drop them on top of the superior shape.
| | 01:26 | I don't need to see that ever again,
so I just click that checkbox and OK.
| | 01:32 | So let's say I wanted to
place a Manager under this person.
| | 01:36 | I simply click-and-drag right
on top of the Executive box.
| | 01:40 | You can see how it's drawn for me.
| | 01:42 | Now if this guy is going to have
multiple managers, I also have multiple shapes.
| | 01:45 | You can see Multiple shapes and I
have got this Three positions as well.
| | 01:50 | So what I am going to do is actually
come up here where it says Multiple shapes.
| | 01:54 | I am going to drag that and
drop it on top of the Executive.
| | 01:57 | It's going to be Managers and I want to
add two more managers, so I change the
| | 02:01 | number up here for Number
of shapes and I click OK.
| | 02:04 | So you can see two more have been
added and it's drawn perfectly for me.
| | 02:09 | Now each of these managers are
going to have some staff as well.
| | 02:13 | I can use Multiple shapes again or I
can use Staff if I wanted to, and just
| | 02:18 | click-and-drag and release on top of the box.
| | 02:21 | You can see now, it's hard to see
but we will zoom in a little bit to see
| | 02:25 | what got created for us.
| | 02:27 | You can see the Name and
Title would go in there.
| | 02:29 | Now if I wanted again,
Multiple shapes, I could do that too.
| | 02:32 | Click-and-drag Multiple
shapes right inside there.
| | 02:35 | Again, I have got choices of the
Managers, Positions, Consultants, Vacancies, I
| | 02:40 | have got some other choices
down here including Staff.
| | 02:43 | So if I wanted to add four or five
more staff, I could by clicking OK.
| | 02:47 | You can see how they all get added.
| | 02:49 | Now there is room for them to spread out here.
| | 02:51 | That's why you see them like that, but
if I go over here and add some staff to
| | 02:56 | this guy in the middle and release.
| | 02:58 | Let's say he is going to have three staff.
| | 03:00 | I click down here on Staff,
leave it at 3, click OK.
| | 03:04 | You can see how that's kind
of rearranged right on top.
| | 03:08 | So it's starting to get messy, but look at
our Organization Chart toolbox here or toolbar.
| | 03:12 | I am going to drag it up here with
the rest of the toolbars right there.
| | 03:16 | The first button you can see is Re-layout.
| | 03:19 | So when I click that,
everything gets rearranged.
| | 03:22 | So I am going to zoom out, so
you can see the entire page.
| | 03:25 | You can see how that's kind of squished over
to the right now because of all of the staff.
| | 03:29 | Now, of course, I can move these
around myself, just by clicking on a shape I
| | 03:33 | can click-and-drag and move it.
| | 03:34 | It stays connected.
| | 03:36 | So if I wanted to manually move these
around so I can make some more room for
| | 03:40 | this guy, just move it over here
a little bit. You got the idea.
| | 03:45 | So there is a lot of manual work
involved doing things that way if you
| | 03:49 | wanted to, but you can't.
| | 03:51 | Now before we go into creating all of
the data that goes into these shapes and
| | 03:55 | creating a background and stuff, I am just
going to close this up without saving it.
| | 04:01 | Look at the other way we
can create an org chart.
| | 04:03 | So we go up to our New dropdown button
again, down to the Business category,
| | 04:08 | but this time I want you to go to
Organization Chart Wizard and we'll use US units again.
| | 04:14 | So in this case, a dialog box opens up.
| | 04:16 | You can see it's the same stencils over
here, but now I am going to follow along
| | 04:20 | just answering some prompts.
| | 04:22 | So I want to create my org chart from,
I can add the information that's already
| | 04:26 | stored in a file or a database.
| | 04:28 | You can see down below the types,
include text files, Excel files, Exchange
| | 04:33 | Server, even ODBC-compliant database
files, or if I wanted to I could enter that
| | 04:39 | data using the wizard.
| | 04:41 | So I am going to go back up here.
| | 04:43 | We do have a sample file for you to use.
| | 04:45 | So we are going to choose
Information that's already stored.
| | 04:48 | We'll hit the Next button.
| | 04:49 | So now we have got to choose where is
that stored, what kind of a file is it?
| | 04:52 | It's an Excel file, so this
middle one is perfect. I click Next.
| | 04:58 | Now we have got to locate it and you
can see I have already done this, but
| | 05:00 | you will hit the Browse button,
navigate to your Lesson15 folder of your
| | 05:04 | exercise files because that's where
you are going to find OrgData15a, give
| | 05:09 | that a click and click Open.
| | 05:10 | It shows up in here, the
language is English, perfect.
| | 05:14 | I click Next and on the next screen
here, I am going to be prompted for some
| | 05:20 | information to choose the columns,
which are fields in my data file containing
| | 05:24 | information that defines the organization.
| | 05:27 | So I have got a Name field, so Name
matches up with Name. That's perfect.
| | 05:32 | These are the other columns that I have
in my spreadsheet Position, Supervisor,
| | 05:36 | Department, Phone and E-Mail.
| | 05:38 | So I want to match Name up with Name.
| | 05:40 | Reports to, I want to match up with Supervisor.
| | 05:43 | So the person's supervisor is in this
third column and that's the Reports to.
| | 05:48 | Do I want the First name?
| | 05:50 | Well, if I look at the dropdown, I
don't have First name all by itself.
| | 05:54 | So I am going to leave that at <none>.
| | 05:56 | Now I am going to click Next.
| | 05:58 | All right, so now we get to choose the
columns from our data file that we want
| | 06:04 | to display in our org chart.
| | 06:06 | You can see over here I have already got
Name, Position, Department, and E-Mail.
| | 06:11 | Over here is kind of a
sample of what that looks like.
| | 06:13 | Now I can remove the ones I don't want.
| | 06:17 | So if I wanted just the name, you could
see that it shows up kind of like that.
| | 06:21 | I do want the Department showing up,
so I am going to select Department.
| | 06:26 | I don't need the Supervisor showing up, why?
| | 06:28 | Because there is going to be a line
drawn to the Supervisor, so that's fine, but
| | 06:32 | maybe the E-Mail would be nice to have in there.
| | 06:35 | You think Position. I think so.
| | 06:37 | Position needs to be in there.
| | 06:39 | We'll add that and I don't
think it belongs at the bottom.
| | 06:42 | It probably belongs under the Name.
| | 06:43 | So with it selected here, we can
move it up and down through the list.
| | 06:48 | So that's a good order right there.
| | 06:50 | So once you have decided what's
going to display, we hit the Next button.
| | 06:53 | Now it's Choose the columns, which are
the fields, from our data file that we
| | 06:57 | want to add to the org chart
shapes as shape data fields.
| | 07:01 | So this is a way that we
can go in and edit Shape Data.
| | 07:04 | So we can have them all
added, like you see here.
| | 07:07 | We can remove them and not use Shape
Data, but I am going to use the Name
| | 07:13 | and the Supervisor. That's all I need.
| | 07:16 | So if you want to add those or remove
what's there already, you can go ahead and
| | 07:20 | do that and when you have
got what I have got, hit Next.
| | 07:22 | Now you can see that our org chart data
is ready to be created but there is too
| | 07:27 | many employees to fit on a
single page of our drawing.
| | 07:31 | So now we can specify how much of the
organization to display on each page.
| | 07:35 | So if you want to do the
specifying, you can do it.
| | 07:38 | I want to specify how much
of my organization to display.
| | 07:42 | If you do that, you can
see this is not available.
| | 07:45 | I want the wizard to automatically break
my org chart across various pages as needed.
| | 07:52 | The Name at the top of the page, I can
choose from my list of names in my spreadsheet.
| | 07:57 | You can see they are all here.
| | 07:59 | Now if you know who the top executive
is, and if I come up here, it's this
| | 08:04 | guy David Johnston.
| | 08:05 | I just know that because I'm familiar
with the spreadsheet, or I can just let
| | 08:09 | Visio figure out who the top
executive is and work its way down from there.
| | 08:13 | So if I wanted to go to one of the,
maybe the VPs, for example, and just draw my
| | 08:17 | chart from there, I could.
| | 08:19 | I am going to leave it at <Top Executive>.
| | 08:21 | Do we want to Hyperlink
employee shapes across pages?
| | 08:24 | You bet, so they are always connected
and Synchronize employee shapes across
| | 08:28 | pages as well, so it will
always stay synchronized.
| | 08:32 | Now when I hit Finish, watch what happens here.
| | 08:34 | I have got six entries that
are not in the organization.
| | 08:37 | In other words, in my spreadsheet
they are not really connected to anyone.
| | 08:41 | Do I want to include them in my drawing?
| | 08:43 | If I say Yes, they will be by themselves,
probably on a page by themselves, or
| | 08:47 | you can say No, we don't need to add
those people, we just want the people who
| | 08:50 | are part of the organization.
| | 08:52 | So No, I don't want to
include them in my drawing.
| | 08:55 | I click No and it just takes a moment
for Visio to figure out where all of these
| | 08:59 | shapes are going on how many pages as well.
| | 09:02 | By default, you can see I am
at the last page here, Page 5.
| | 09:06 | So it took five pages to fit everything.
| | 09:08 | If I go back to Page 1 by clicking the
Page 1 tab, you can see there is a lot
| | 09:12 | of information here.
| | 09:14 | I can see all that laid
out according to my choices.
| | 09:17 | So at the top here, and we just zoom in
a little bit, I am going to go in to 75%.
| | 09:22 | You can see that is David Johnston,
who is a President & CEO, Office of the
| | 09:26 | President, there is the email, and
each one of these people has their name,
| | 09:30 | their title, the department, and
email showing up in their org chart box.
| | 09:36 | Now with our toolbar, and yours may
not be moved up to the top like mine is,
| | 09:39 | if you didn't do that.
| | 09:40 | We can float our toolbars just by
clicking and dragging them around.
| | 09:43 | I am going to float it back down here.
| | 09:46 | If I wanted to, I can re-
layout my entire org chart.
| | 09:50 | So that will come in handy, if we decide
to move some boxes around, for example.
| | 09:53 | Now we also have some different layouts.
| | 09:56 | Horizontal Layout is what we are
seeing right now. It's the default.
| | 09:59 | If we want to go to a Vertical Layout, that
would look different, so would the Side by Side.
| | 10:05 | So Vertical Layout, for example,
we choose where we want to align it.
| | 10:07 | We want to, let's have Staff Align on the Left.
| | 10:11 | When I click that, you can see it's
totally changed the look of my org chart.
| | 10:15 | Probably, doesn't make sense that way.
| | 10:18 | Clicking Re-layout is going to relay
it using the currently selected layout.
| | 10:23 | So I am going to go back
to Horizontal and do Center.
| | 10:28 | There it is, filling the entire page.
| | 10:30 | As I go to Page 2, you can see that
I have got Diana Edwards here, who is
| | 10:36 | the Creative Director.
| | 10:38 | I go back to Page 1 and just zoom out a
little bit, so I can see the whole page.
| | 10:43 | There is going to be a link
to the Creative Director here.
| | 10:48 | So everything is synchronized,
everything is hyperlinked across multiple pages.
| | 10:53 | It's the quickest way, if you've
already got the data stored somewhere, such
| | 10:56 | as an Excel worksheet.
| | 10:58 | Now we could just spice it up, if we wanted to.
| | 11:00 | We are done with this.
| | 11:01 | We can close it up and just go to our stencils.
| | 11:04 | If we wanted to add a background,
for example, I am going to go to
| | 11:08 | Background world and just drop it
there because this is an organization that
| | 11:14 | stretches across the world.
| | 11:16 | If I wanted to a add borders and titles,
I come to the Borders and Titles here
| | 11:21 | and I am going to put in no borders,
but maybe a title would be good.
| | 11:25 | So here is a Title block
contemporary, for example.
| | 11:28 | I could bring right down here, and of
course, to edit this, just double-click
| | 11:33 | right on the text itself.
| | 11:35 | Only Title needs to be changed, so I double-
click on it and I am going to say XYZ Inc.
| | 11:45 | There is the date, so my
org chart is as if this date.
| | 11:48 | I click outside to see the end result.
| | 11:50 | So there is our org chart.
| | 11:52 | You can do it manually, all by
yourself, adding shapes, connecting them and
| | 11:55 | so on, or if you use the wizard and some data
already stored, you can get a nice quick result.
| | 12:01 | Of course, we will have some editing
and some adjusting to do, we may need to
| | 12:04 | adjust font sizes and block sizes, so
that everything fits properly, but you get
| | 12:09 | a huge head start by using the wizard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a pie chart| 00:01 | Another kind of diagram you can create
in Visio that's based on the Business
| | 00:06 | category of the templates that we looked at
in the previous lesson is charts and graphs.
| | 00:11 | Now there are many different kinds of
charts and graphs that you can create in
| | 00:14 | Visio, like bar graphs, pie charts,
line graphs, all kinds of cool things but
| | 00:19 | way too many to cover in one single title.
| | 00:22 | So we are going to focus in on one.
| | 00:24 | We are going to look at the pie chart.
| | 00:25 | So that's where we going to create a
next and instead of creating one from
| | 00:29 | scratch and you would do that by
going up to your New dropdown, down to
| | 00:32 | Business, and selecting Charts and Graphs.
| | 00:35 | That would give you the right stencils
for creating any one of those charts or
| | 00:38 | graphs, I just mentioned.
| | 00:40 | So instead of doing that, I
have got a head start for you.
| | 00:42 | We are going to go to the Open button,
select Pie15b from the Lesson15 folder of
| | 00:49 | your exercise files.
| | 00:50 | With that selected, click Open.
| | 00:52 | You can see it's just a
background and a title, Sales by Region.
| | 00:56 | Now because it's from the Charts and
Graphs template, you can see that the
| | 01:00 | stencil includes Charting Shapes and I
have got Bar graphs, Pie charts, grids,
| | 01:06 | Line graphs, and so on.
| | 01:08 | The Pie chart is the one that we are
going to drag on to our drawing page.
| | 01:12 | So click, drag it over.
| | 01:13 | You can see the size and the default
by default is 10 Slices and that's the
| | 01:20 | maximum too, by the way.
| | 01:21 | Each one of them equal in size.
| | 01:23 | So I am going to change that first
of all because it's Sales by Region,
| | 01:27 | remember, we are working on.
| | 01:28 | We are going to do three
regions, so we select 3 Slices.
| | 01:31 | When I click OK and before I define
those slices, I am going to click OK to show
| | 01:36 | you that I now have three
equally sized slices in my pie.
| | 01:40 | The color coding may not be
exactly what I am looking for.
| | 01:42 | We'll worry about that a little bit later.
| | 01:44 | Right now, that we need to back to shape data.
| | 01:47 | So your entire pie needs to be
selected before you go up to the Data menu or
| | 01:52 | right-click and select Shape
Data from the Data option here.
| | 01:57 | So this gets us back to our
Shape Data dialog, 3 Slices.
| | 02:02 | Let's define those now.
| | 02:04 | So the Label that we see at the top
for the very first label, which is our
| | 02:08 | entire pie, is Slices.
| | 02:10 | I am going to type in Sales here
and it's a Fixed List, we have got 3
| | 02:16 | pie slices, perfect.
| | 02:20 | So Pie 1, when we click on it down
here in the Properties section is where we
| | 02:24 | go to re-label that.
| | 02:25 | So our first region is going to be
North America, I am going to type in NA.
| | 02:29 | It is by default, a number and a percentage.
| | 02:33 | So I can change that, if I wanted to.
| | 02:35 | I could put in Currency, I could put in
Strings, Boolean equations, all kinds of
| | 02:41 | cool things here but I am
going to leave it at Number.
| | 02:44 | I want to leave the percentages in there.
| | 02:46 | I can also choose the format.
| | 02:48 | So it could be units, whole
numbers, floating percentages.
| | 02:52 | You can see I can add the
units if I wanted to as well.
| | 02:55 | So lots of different choices.
| | 02:56 | I am not going to select anything, I
am going to leave the default just as is
| | 03:00 | and all I am going to do is I am
going to change the labels in here.
| | 03:03 | SA and Pie 3 will be Europe, Middle
East and Asia or what we call EMEA.
| | 03:13 | So when I click OK, look what happens.
| | 03:16 | Entry must be a number.
| | 03:18 | So by default, you can see
what's happening to the values here.
| | 03:21 | So I am going to click OK.
| | 03:22 | I have to put in the actual numbers,
so I can't just leave it at 33% here.
| | 03:28 | So the number for North America, I am
going to put in as 45% and I don't need to
| | 03:33 | put the percent sign in.
| | 03:35 | That will happen for me.
| | 03:36 | South America, I need to put in a
value here, I am going to put in 30.
| | 03:41 | So that leads, you got it.
| | 03:43 | You can put in 25% to equal 100. Click OK.
| | 03:50 | That works.
| | 03:50 | Click OK to see the end results.
| | 03:53 | So there is my pie with
those new values in there.
| | 03:57 | I am going to size this up,
so it's easier to look at.
| | 03:59 | I click and drag the borders.
| | 04:02 | I am going to change the text size.
| | 04:04 | With the entire pie selected, I can
come up here to my formatting tool bar and
| | 04:08 | choose a larger size font.
| | 04:10 | That looks good there.
| | 04:12 | Okay, how about the colors?
| | 04:13 | Well, I can right-click and you can
see there is a number of options when the
| | 04:16 | entire pie is selected.
| | 04:18 | I can go to Format, format the
Text, the Line, there is the Fill.
| | 04:23 | Now when I click on Fill, you are
going to see the Fill color is showing up
| | 04:27 | as white, why is that?
| | 04:29 | Because I have chosen the entire pie.
| | 04:32 | So if I hit Cancel now and click
inside the pie on a specific slice and
| | 04:37 | right-click, go to Format, go to Fill.
| | 04:41 | You can see now that color is showing up.
| | 04:44 | So I don't mind that blue.
| | 04:46 | I am going to leave it as it is, but
it's the greens that I want to change.
| | 04:49 | So I am going to click on this
slice, right-click, Format > Fill.
| | 04:54 | I am going to change that to a red.
| | 04:58 | You can see I can work with Styles
and Colors, and so on for the Shadow as
| | 05:01 | well, if I wanted to.
| | 05:03 | I am going to click Apply
and then OK. There it is.
| | 05:07 | How about this slice now?
| | 05:08 | Let's change it to a different color.
| | 05:10 | Click once, right-click, Format > Fill
and we can choose from our Color dropdown.
| | 05:16 | I am going to choose a brighter green.
| | 05:19 | So I am going to come down here
and select this green here, and OK.
| | 05:23 | Okay, so there is my new look of pie.
| | 05:27 | All right, let's right-click again on
our pie and look at the Set Slice Sizes.
| | 05:34 | If I wanted to change any of those values,
this is the quick way to get to that shape data.
| | 05:39 | So I can change these
numbers quickly if I wanted to.
| | 05:42 | I can also click Define to get
back to this view that I saw earlier.
| | 05:46 | Okay, I am going to click Cancel and
Cancel because my numbers are right, I am
| | 05:52 | going to leave them as it is.
| | 05:53 | I am going to right-click and I am going to
go down to Format, and let's go over to Text.
| | 06:01 | So by default, we are using the text
that we saw up on our formatting tool bar.
| | 06:05 | That's what we are seeing here, Arial.
| | 06:07 | You can see we have got some other
options including Color, some of the general
| | 06:12 | options, like Case, Position.
| | 06:14 | So the Position can be Normal,
Superscript or Subscript.
| | 06:18 | This would be good for numbers,
like squares and some of the elements
| | 06:21 | for example, like H2O.
| | 06:23 | If you needed you a superscript or a
subscript, that's where you go to get it.
| | 06:27 | Underlining, Strikethrough, even
Transparency, if you wanted to.
| | 06:31 | We have got a Character tab, a Paragraph
tab, Text Block, Tabs and Bullets if we
| | 06:38 | are using those as well, which we are not.
| | 06:40 | So I just want to let you know that you
can format your text from there or you
| | 06:44 | can do it right from here as well.
| | 06:46 | For example, if we want everything bolded,
we can click the Bold button and with
| | 06:50 | one piece selected, only
one is going to be bolded.
| | 06:53 | So with the entire pie selected, you
just come out and back in, we can apply
| | 06:58 | some of these changes,
bolding, underlining, etcetera.
| | 07:02 | All right, so there is simple pie chart.
| | 07:06 | Now, of course, we want to add more
to this, so that we have labels, for
| | 07:10 | example, we could bring in some text
labels to represent North America, South
| | 07:14 | America, we could do a
legend as well, if we wanted to.
| | 07:18 | Give this whole thing a title.
| | 07:20 | I am going to type in North America.
| | 07:25 | Now I will just click the Text
tool because my pie is selected.
| | 07:30 | You can see I am able to now to
attach this to the pie, Middle East/Asia.
| | 07:43 | There we go and I will just click on my
mouse Pointer tool here to come back and
| | 07:48 | that's connected to the pie.
| | 07:50 | So if I click down below, you can see I
can size it, I can move it as well, but
| | 07:54 | if it's attached to the pie,
I got to live with that.
| | 07:57 | All right, so if I size my pie
down, what happens to my text?
| | 08:01 | You can see it adjusts itself, so
it's always connected. Kind of cool.
| | 08:07 | If I wanted to go further, of course,
now, I could put labels on each of the
| | 08:10 | pies, I could create a legend, if I
wanted to using some of the different
| | 08:15 | shapes, borders and titles, and even
some of the tools up here on my standard
| | 08:21 | and formatting tool bar.
| | 08:22 | So that covers the pie chart.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a brainstorming diagram| 00:02 | Another type of drawing that we'll
find under the business category of our
| | 00:06 | templates is a brainstorming diagram,
and a brainstorming diagram is a great way
| | 00:11 | for you to generate ideas and use
some creativity in solving problems.
| | 00:16 | It can help you develop a system of
related ideas, or even information like new
| | 00:21 | business strategies, book outlines,
meeting minutes, travel plans, you name it.
| | 00:26 | Now a brainstorming diagram will show the
inter-relationships among topics in a hierarchy.
| | 00:31 | So you can think of it as a graphical
illustration of a text outline for example.
| | 00:36 | So let's create one from scratch.
| | 00:38 | We'll go up to our new button here, and
on the drop-down, go down to Business,
| | 00:43 | and then over to Brainstorming
Diagram (US Units) is what I am selecting.
| | 00:48 | All right, so here's our blank page.
| | 00:51 | You can see I have got a
brainstorming toolbar here. It's floating.
| | 00:55 | Down below, I have got the outline
window as well at my disposal, because when
| | 01:00 | we create a brainstorming diagram,
it kind of follows the outline format.
| | 01:05 | I am just going to click the Push Pin
down here to turn on auto hide so it's out
| | 01:09 | of my way when I am not using it.
| | 01:11 | So over here under the stencils, you
can aside from backgrounds, borders and
| | 01:16 | legend shapes etcetera, we do have
the brainstorming shapes not much here.
| | 01:20 | So what I am going to do is just
drag a main topic out onto my page.
| | 01:25 | Now the main topic shows up by
default in the shape that you see here.
| | 01:29 | If I right-click on the shape, you can
see that I can do a number of things,
| | 01:33 | like add sub-topics.
| | 01:34 | Add a bunch of sub-topics, change
the shape, or move it to a new page.
| | 01:41 | Now I am only going to keep this to one
page to keep it simple, but I do want to
| | 01:44 | change the topic shape, and you
can see there are some choices here.
| | 01:48 | We've got Oval, Cloud, Rectangle and Starburst.
| | 01:52 | I am going to choose Starburst, and
click OK, show you what that looks like.
| | 01:56 | We'll just size it up, so
it's a little bit easier to see.
| | 01:59 | So there is our main topic.
| | 02:01 | With it selected, all I have
to do is type in, my main topic.
| | 02:05 | So I am going to type in, Video Tutorials.
| | 02:07 | Okay, so we're going to work on video
tutorials, and now our brainstorming
| | 02:19 | session is going to be all about how
we can get these out to the public.
| | 02:23 | So what I need to do is add some sub-topics.
| | 02:25 | Now I do have different shapes over
here like topic, multiple topic, and then I
| | 02:30 | have got a couple of connectors, a
dynamic connector and an association line.
| | 02:35 | I have also got this toolbar
up here, Auto Arrange Topics.
| | 02:38 | Once we've got whole bunch out there,
we can have them automatically arranged
| | 02:41 | for us, Add a Main topic, Add sub-topics,
and you can see Peer Topics as well,
| | 02:47 | and there's our Multiple Sub-topics too.
| | 02:50 | So we can do it from here, or from our toolbar.
| | 02:53 | So with this selected, I am going to go
up to my toolbar and click Add Multiple
| | 02:57 | Sub-topics, and I just simply type them in here.
| | 03:00 | So how are we going to get our
video tutorials out to the public?
| | 03:04 | Well, we're going to do some advertising.
| | 03:08 | We'll probably do some marketing,
we'll do some information up on the Web, so
| | 03:19 | put webpage, and that's it for now.
| | 03:22 | That's all we can come up for now.
| | 03:23 | So once we've got them in there, we
click OK and you can see they just got added
| | 03:27 | using the particular style I
have selected for this main topic.
| | 03:32 | So if I zoom-in, it will be a little
bit easier for you to see, and I have got
| | 03:36 | my three different
choices and they are connected.
| | 03:39 | So if I move this over, you can
see it stays connected, got that
| | 03:43 | dynamic connection perfect.
| | 03:45 | Now if I wanted to, I could add sub-topics
to the various sub-topics like
| | 03:50 | Marketing for example, or Advertising.
| | 03:53 | So where do I want to advertise?
| | 03:54 | Well, multiple locations, so I am
going to add Multiple Sub-topics.
| | 03:58 | This time I will just drag this over
right on top of Advertising, and you can
| | 04:03 | see the same dialog box shows up.
| | 04:05 | So advertising, we're going to do in Magazines,
the Web, let's do flyers, and how about TV?
| | 04:21 | All right, so I will click OK.
| | 04:24 | Now look what's happened, it's placed right
on top and it's looking a little bit messy.
| | 04:28 | I am going to zoom out to the full page,
and here is a good time for us to use
| | 04:33 | our Auto Arrange Topics.
| | 04:35 | We'd give that a click.
| | 04:36 | You can see what's happened.
| | 04:38 | Everything has got re-arranged nicely.
| | 04:40 | The only thing is if you look at TV,
Web, Flyers and Magazines, they are not
| | 04:45 | really connected to advertising.
| | 04:48 | So here's where we might want to use
our Dynamic Connector, and if I drag that
| | 04:52 | down and when I see Magazines
highlighted in red, I can now drag that up to
| | 04:57 | advertising, I am going
to drag it to the end here.
| | 04:59 | I am going to move Flyers over, so a
lot of things can be done manually, but
| | 05:05 | you can also do them using some of the
automation built-in, touch that there,
| | 05:11 | these guys, I am going to move down as
well, and connect, and I am going to use
| | 05:20 | the connection points to do the connecting, and
let's do the one more, we've got TV over here.
| | 05:26 | So we can do the connecting first, and
then do the moving around if we prefer.
| | 05:33 | Okay, so I am going to select
everything now and the easiest way to do that is
| | 05:38 | from the keyboard Ctrl+A,
gives me a nice marquee select.
| | 05:43 | I am going to move this over here,
deselect by clicking outside the selected area.
| | 05:49 | Now if I wanted to, I
could add some backgrounds.
| | 05:52 | I am going to add-- I like this
one here called Backgrounds Clouds.
| | 05:55 | If I wanted to add some titles and
borders, I could do that now as well.
| | 06:01 | Here's a small border.
| | 06:03 | You can see that that's good for a title and
any additional information I want to list here.
| | 06:08 | So if I wanted to, double-click, Video
Tutorials, and down below if I wanted to
| | 06:18 | add some more information, I could.
| | 06:20 | I think you've got the idea.
| | 06:22 | So there's the beginnings of
a good brainstorming diagram.
| | 06:25 | Just keep in mind you can
have multiple main topics.
| | 06:27 | Once you've added main topics, it's
very easy to add sub-topics to those.
| | 06:32 | You can do it from the toolbar, or you
can do it from your brainstorming shapes.
| | 06:35 | The other option, don't forget we've
got our outline window here, and you can
| | 06:38 | see what's been created for us.
| | 06:40 | Here's our main topic, there's
sub-topics, sub-topics under them as well.
| | 06:45 | So the outline is being created.
| | 06:47 | If for example, we want to take out TV,
we can highlight it here, hit the Delete
| | 06:51 | key on the keyboard and you can
see it's removed from our drawing.
| | 06:55 | So that covers brainstorming diagrams.
| | 06:57 | Have fun experimenting with the
different options, and the different tools when
| | 07:02 | it comes to creating a brainstorming diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a pivot diagram| 00:01 | All right, there's a new kind of diagram you
can create in Visio now called the Pivot Diagram.
| | 00:07 | And a Pivot Diagram, if you are
familiar with pivot tables in Microsoft
| | 00:11 | Excel, is quite similar.
| | 00:13 | It's a way to visually represent data.
| | 00:16 | That data can exist in an Excel
worksheet, or a database, or elsewhere.
| | 00:21 | But if you want to be able to show that
data in a visual representation using a
| | 00:26 | Tree, and then being able to
manipulate how you visualize that information,
| | 00:31 | you'll know what I am talking about.
| | 00:32 | So we're going to create a pivot diagram
now based on some data that exists in a
| | 00:37 | Microsoft Excel worksheet.
| | 00:38 | So I want to show you that
data before we bring it in.
| | 00:41 | So I've got Excel open here, and I have
got my sales figures open here, just a
| | 00:46 | very simple worksheet, which you
can see I have got a title at the top.
| | 00:50 | Then I have got three columns,
Account Execs, Products, and Sales.
| | 00:55 | Under the Account Exec, you can see I
have really only got three different
| | 00:59 | Account Execs, but I have got 12 rows
of data altogether in this worksheet.
| | 01:03 | And then I have got some different
products, three different products, and
| | 01:07 | then some sales figures.
| | 01:08 | So we're going to be working with
categories, we're going to be working with
| | 01:11 | data and something called nodes.
| | 01:14 | And if you look at this worksheet the
way it's laid out, you can think of the
| | 01:18 | categories as these column headers.
| | 01:20 | So we've got Account Execs,
we've got Products and Sales, three
| | 01:23 | different categories.
| | 01:25 | There's data in each of those, and if
we look down the left hand side where
| | 01:29 | we've got three occurrences of the
word John, three Stevens, three Nancy's,
| | 01:34 | those could be considered nodes.
| | 01:36 | So keep that in mind as we
create our pivot diagram.
| | 01:39 | So we're going to switch over to Visio.
| | 01:42 | Before we do, I am going to close up
this worksheet, because I can't have it
| | 01:45 | open while I am working in Visio and
creating a pivot diagram from that data,
| | 01:50 | just keep that in mind too.
| | 01:51 | And we're going to go up to our new drop-
down, down to Business, and we're going
| | 01:56 | to go over to pivot diagram
US Units, give that a click.
| | 01:59 | Now as soon as we do, you can see
there's a dialog shows up called the data
| | 02:04 | selector, and we're going to go through
a number of steps to select our data and
| | 02:08 | create our pivot diagram.
| | 02:10 | So what data do we want to use?
| | 02:12 | Is it in an Excel Workbook, a Database,
SharePoint Services, some other kind of
| | 02:16 | database, or Data Source?
| | 02:19 | We would make our selection by clicking
the appropriate Radio button, and as we
| | 02:23 | saw ours is a Microsoft Excel workbook.
| | 02:26 | So with that selected, we click Next.
| | 02:28 | Now we need to go find it.
| | 02:30 | So we can all click on the Browse
button here, navigate to the Lesson 15 folder
| | 02:36 | of your exercise files, there's Sales 2006.
| | 02:40 | So that's the one you want selected
when you click open, and now appears in the
| | 02:43 | field, we can click Next. All right.
| | 02:47 | That little area in the worksheet that
contain the Account reps, the products
| | 02:52 | and the sales figures, well, I actually
save that area into an actual range and
| | 02:58 | called it Sales_Splits.
| | 02:59 | You can see that here.
| | 03:00 | The other option is to use the entire
sheet, and if we do that then we have to
| | 03:05 | make sure we select the right rows and
columns later on, so we don't include
| | 03:09 | titles and so on that don't count.
| | 03:11 | Now in my range called Sales_Splits I
did have on that first row in the range
| | 03:16 | some data, and those were the column headings.
| | 03:19 | So I want to make sure that that's
selected, and those will become my categories.
| | 03:24 | All right, I click Next, and here's
where I choose my columns and rows.
| | 03:29 | So because I have got a range, all
columns and all data for the rows is what I
| | 03:34 | really want, but I can select columns
by clicking the select columns, and you
| | 03:38 | can see that the column names appear
here because they were column headings.
| | 03:42 | They're all selected.
| | 03:43 | I can choose which columns I want to
include in this pivot diagram with them all
| | 03:48 | selected that's exactly what I am going to get.
| | 03:50 | Same thing goes for the rows.
| | 03:52 | So if I wanted to select any rows that
shouldn't be included, I can do that from
| | 03:56 | here, and you can see I have got a
drop-down for Sorting, I can then look for
| | 04:01 | just the Johns, just the Nancy's etcetera.
| | 04:06 | But I do want all, so I am going
to leave it at all, and click OK.
| | 04:10 | Now I can click Next.
| | 04:12 | My data has been successfully imported
according to this message, means when I
| | 04:17 | click Finish, I will have a drawing on my page.
| | 04:21 | It's not going to look like much at first.
| | 04:23 | You can see the title up here is Sales_Splits.
| | 04:25 | Now I can change that.
| | 04:27 | It's just using my range name.
| | 04:29 | So I am going to start by zooming in.
| | 04:32 | Let's zoom into 100%, and I am just going
to move up and over, so you can see that.
| | 04:39 | I don't like that underscore that I
needed when I named my range, so I am
| | 04:43 | going to take that out, and I am going to
add 2006 to the end, good. (Sales Splits 2006).
| | 04:51 | So there's my title.
| | 04:52 | Now you can see there's one single
node, one box here called Total, that's
| | 04:58 | totaling up all of my sales, and then
over here I have got some information.
| | 05:02 | So the data source name, you can
see the name of the Excel's file.
| | 05:05 | You can see the name of the range
Sales_Split, last updated, date and time and
| | 05:11 | no filters has been used.
| | 05:12 | So that's the information you may
or may not want to keep on your page.
| | 05:16 | You may want to move it as well.
| | 05:18 | You can do that if you want it down
in the bottom left corner for example.
| | 05:21 | You might want to just drag
it down there and release.
| | 05:24 | Let's go back to our node right now.
| | 05:27 | I am going to click right here on my
sales, making sure that it's selected.
| | 05:31 | I have some additional categories over
here, I have got the Account Execs and
| | 05:36 | the Products and down
below under Add Total, Sales.
| | 05:40 | So there are my three categories
that we saw were the actual columns.
| | 05:44 | Now sales is being shown here but just the sum.
| | 05:47 | So if I go up and say I want the
Account Execs showing up as well, I can click
| | 05:52 | on Account Exec, and each of them
now shows up labeled Account Executive
| | 05:56 | underneath the total sales.
| | 05:58 | So you can see each of their sales as
well, because Sales is selected right here.
| | 06:02 | All right, perfect.
| | 06:05 | If I wanted to show the products now,
clicking Product right now will show the
| | 06:08 | products under each one of these
boxes, because all of them are selected.
| | 06:12 | If I only wanted to see the product
breakdown for John, then I would deselect
| | 06:16 | and just click on John before
clicking product. There we go.
| | 06:20 | So John's $5.3 million is made up of
sales under Accessories, Paper and Toner,
| | 06:28 | and there's those figures there.
| | 06:29 | Now if I want to collapse that I can go
back up to John and you'll notice we've
| | 06:33 | got a pivot diagram toolbar showing
up, and if I click pivot diagram, the
| | 06:37 | drop-down, I have got Sort, Promote, and
there it is, Collapse to close that up.
| | 06:45 | Now if I wanted it for all three of them,
I can select all three of them using
| | 06:49 | Ctrl on the keyboard, select
all three boxes, go to product.
| | 06:53 | What's going to happen is
this is going to spread out now.
| | 06:55 | I need to zoom out to see the entire
page that the product breakdown is being
| | 06:59 | shown for each and every
one of my Account Execs.
| | 07:03 | All right, let's go back up to
Sales here up to the very top.
| | 07:07 | We'll go to Pivot Diagram, click the
drop-down, and choose Collapse, and
| | 07:12 | everything is collapsed.
| | 07:13 | So with our Sales selected, if we go to
Product, that's what we're going to see
| | 07:16 | now on the next row, instead of our sales reps.
| | 07:19 | Let's zoom in to get a good look at that.
| | 07:23 | Slide over, and you can see that now
I have got my breakdown by product, as
| | 07:28 | opposed to sales rep.
| | 07:30 | So that's the beauty of a pivot diagram.
| | 07:32 | We can pick and choose exactly what
data is going to be shown, and how.
| | 07:37 | Now if things don't fit like this total
sales number, we can adjust those boxes.
| | 07:42 | This is moved back into place when I
started collapsing and expanding. That's okay.
| | 07:48 | Again, if I don't even want that, I can
click on it, and hit Delete to remove it.
| | 07:52 | How about if we collapse this branch here?
| | 07:55 | So I am going to go up to pivot diagram,
choose collapse, and I want to add my
| | 08:00 | Account Execs, just add a little bit of
pizzazz with all three of them selected.
| | 08:04 | Let's add actual icon or shape next to
them, and under Departments, we're going
| | 08:10 | to scroll down here to Sales, click on
Sales icon, OK, and each one of them gets
| | 08:17 | a little Sales Icon next to their name.
| | 08:20 | So that looks a little bit different.
| | 08:22 | Obviously there's more you
can do with pivot diagrams.
| | 08:25 | I encourage you to go in and explore,
try working with some other Excel
| | 08:30 | worksheets, or other data sources for
that matter, and play around with the
| | 08:34 | different views, and have
fun working with pivot tables.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. FlowchartsCreating a basic flowchart| 00:01 | It's time now to check out the flow
charting capabilities in Visio 2007, and
| | 00:06 | we're going to start with the basic
flowchart, but don't let that name flow
| | 00:09 | you, because you can get quite
advanced with what you can do in a basic
| | 00:13 | flowchart template.
| | 00:15 | Now what do we use flowcharts for?
| | 00:17 | Well, the basic flowchart template to
be precise is going to be useful for
| | 00:21 | showing items or steps that are in the process.
| | 00:25 | Now we'd use a basic flowchart to
capture perhaps a bird's-eye view of an entire
| | 00:30 | process that already exists.
| | 00:32 | We could use it to identify the
critical points, or bottlenecks, or even the
| | 00:36 | problem areas in a process.
| | 00:38 | We can use a basic flowchart to document the
ideal flow of a process from start to finish.
| | 00:44 | So what we desire in a process, and of
course, we can use it to design a brand
| | 00:49 | new work process if we wanted to.
| | 00:52 | All right, so let's go up to our new
button drop-down up here. Click that.
| | 00:57 | Move down to flowchart.
| | 01:00 | You can see it's got its
own category, and there it is.
| | 01:02 | Basic flowchart right over here.
| | 01:04 | We'll use the US Units one.
| | 01:07 | So this opens up our page and if you've
used Visio in the past version 2003 for
| | 01:11 | example, not a whole lot has changed here.
| | 01:14 | You're not going to see much different.
| | 01:16 | What we're going to do though to create
our flowchart is to move left to right.
| | 01:20 | So it'd be good if we flipped our page
on the side here, so we're looking at
| | 01:24 | it in Landscape Mode.
| | 01:25 | So let's go up to File, and then down to
Page Setup, and let's change it to Landscape.
| | 01:31 | Now, that's the Print Setup,
check the Page Size here.
| | 01:35 | Same as printer paper, that's what
you want to see before you click OK.
| | 01:39 | All right, so let's start
with our basic process here.
| | 01:43 | We're going to take the process shape
and just drag it onto our page, and we
| | 01:49 | should zoom into this.
| | 01:50 | We can use our zoom drop-down, and go to
100%, and because our shape is selected
| | 01:56 | here, all we have to do is
type in what we want to do.
| | 01:59 | So let's say we want to get the flow for
implementing a new customer with our software.
| | 02:04 | So I am going to call it
Customer Implementation.
| | 02:10 | You'll notice how it wraps
around to fit inside the box.
| | 02:12 | Now we click outside the box and
you can see that is now complete.
| | 02:16 | Of course there's a lot of formatting
and spicing up we can do after the fact,
| | 02:20 | but let's just get our flow in here.
| | 02:22 | So this is our customer implementation.
| | 02:24 | The very first thing that
happens is there's a document.
| | 02:27 | So we're going to drag the document
shape out here, and you can see it's lined
| | 02:31 | up with the center of my customer
implementation box when I see that line going across.
| | 02:37 | That's where I want it right there.
| | 02:39 | I am going to let go, and I am just
going to type Customer Fills Checklist, okay.
| | 02:48 | So once that's done, then they are
going to spend time with a project adviser.
| | 02:54 | So in that case, come over to the
left hand side here, and we'll just
| | 02:59 | grab another process.
| | 03:02 | Make sure that that's lined up horizontally.
| | 03:04 | We'll let go and let's
just type PA Review, okay.
| | 03:14 | So once the PA has reviewed the
checklist, two things can happen.
| | 03:18 | It can move on to the next step, which is
training, or it could go back to that checklist.
| | 03:22 | So what we need is a decision here.
| | 03:24 | So I am going to drag the decision
shape over right there, and inside that
| | 03:30 | we'll type 'Ready For Training.' And
we'll put a question mark on that, because
| | 03:38 | it is a decision box.
| | 03:40 | We'll click outside of it.
| | 03:41 | Now if they are not ready for
training, we want them to go back to the PA
| | 03:44 | Review, or maybe all the way back
to the Checklist for that matter.
| | 03:48 | If they are ready for training, we're
going to have them move on, and we're
| | 03:51 | gong to move them on to the actual
training that takes place, which is a
| | 03:55 | predefined process.
| | 03:56 | So we're going to drag that shape in here.
| | 03:58 | I am going to move it underneath, and
let go, and I am going to type in training.
| | 04:04 | Good.
| | 04:04 | All right, once they have had their
training, they're going to implement.
| | 04:10 | So we'll put in another process here.
| | 04:12 | I am going to put it down below, and I
am just going to zoom out to 75% now, so
| | 04:17 | I can see more of my drawing page.
| | 04:19 | With it selected, I am going to type in
Implement, and in Brackets I am going to
| | 04:26 | type Go Live and that will
signify the end of the entire process.
| | 04:33 | We'll put a terminator at the end, and
there's where we'll actually close process.
| | 04:43 | Okay, I click outside.
| | 04:45 | I zoom back out to my original level.
| | 04:47 | So you can see I have got a lot of
space here, and now it's time to connect
| | 04:50 | these things together, and we can
use our Connector tool, we know that.
| | 04:53 | But we also know now from a previous
lesson that if we hover over a shape, we
| | 04:57 | see those automatic arrows show up.
| | 05:00 | So we can move to an arrow, and you can
see it's going to automatically connect
| | 05:03 | to a neighboring shape.
| | 05:05 | So we just click that,
move over to the next one.
| | 05:09 | As we hover over the arrow,
that's the one we want to connect to.
| | 05:13 | PA Review is going to
connect to, Ready For Training?
| | 05:16 | All right, ready for training, and if they are,
they are going to go down to their training.
| | 05:22 | I will just keep doing that right till the end.
| | 05:25 | The only one that's going to be missing
now is if they are not ready for training.
| | 05:30 | So we wanted to loop back to
the Customer Fills Checklist.
| | 05:33 | So for that one we will need a connector.
| | 05:35 | Now we can come down here to the
Dynamic Connector tool if we wanted to, or we
| | 05:40 | could use our Connector tool from
up here on our Standard toolbar.
| | 05:43 | I am just going to drag this one from
my stencil over to the connector up here.
| | 05:48 | Now you can see the
direction that the arrow is pointing.
| | 05:51 | So the arrow should really go to
here, Customer Fills Checklist.
| | 05:56 | Now so this connection point that we
want to drag over to, Ready For Training,
| | 06:01 | right there, and release.
| | 06:03 | So when we deselect, you can see the
direction that it's going in is back to the
| | 06:08 | Customer Fills Checklist step in
this flowchart. So there it is.
| | 06:13 | We've got our process defined.
| | 06:15 | We've got a decision box.
| | 06:16 | Now it's just a matter of making it look nice.
| | 06:19 | Now remember we've got theme.
| | 06:20 | So we can go up to the Theme button up
here, give that a click, and try some
| | 06:24 | different themes to see if we can
get a color combination that we like.
| | 06:28 | So there's many to choose from.
| | 06:32 | There are some darker ones.
| | 06:33 | I didn't include backgrounds.
| | 06:35 | So no background shape detected.
| | 06:38 | Then you have to drag the shape onto
your drawing page for this to work.
| | 06:42 | So keep that in mind too.
| | 06:44 | Same thing for anything
that's got a shaded background.
| | 06:46 | All right, so let's go to our backgrounds.
| | 06:49 | Let's just choose a solid background,
we'll drag it right onto our page
| | 06:52 | and release, and you can see now I have
taken on that background called Office Light.
| | 06:58 | I come over here.
| | 06:59 | This one is going to work now.
| | 07:00 | That's pretty hard to look at.
| | 07:02 | So we just try some of these
until we find one that we like.
| | 07:05 | There's the one I like right there.
| | 07:07 | I am going to zoom back to see the
entire page and at this point I'll probably
| | 07:11 | add in some other things.
| | 07:12 | So some borders and titles for example.
| | 07:14 | I am going to come down here, and I am
going to put in these border triangles, I
| | 07:19 | like those, drag it onto my page and
release, put them in the right area, and
| | 07:24 | now all we need is our title.
| | 07:26 | So you can see down below I have got some
title blocks and I go to this no pad style.
| | 07:31 | Actually I like this retro one.
| | 07:32 | I'll drag that up here, and release,
double-click inside and then double-click
| | 07:37 | on the word Title to highlight it,
and we type in our actual title.
| | 07:41 | So for this I will type in,
Customer Implementation.
| | 07:46 | See how it expands to take in all of
our text, and we deselect by clicking
| | 07:50 | outside, and there's our basic flowchart.
| | 07:52 | So not much to it obviously, there's
more you can do with the various shapes.
| | 07:56 | You've got some arrow shapes as well on
the stencil if you wanted to be a little
| | 08:00 | more graphical, as opposed
to just using the Connectors.
| | 08:03 | So play around, experiment, and create
all of the flowcharts your hearts desire.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a workflow diagram| 00:01 | Similar to working in a flowchart like
we did in the previous lesson, a workflow
| | 00:06 | diagram will have steps in a
process perhaps, there will be a flow in a
| | 00:11 | direction, there may be decisions to
be made, but the shapes that we use in a
| | 00:16 | workflow diagram are very different
where we are going to work through
| | 00:18 | departments and people and we might have
steps that need to take place and those
| | 00:23 | steps may involve
approvals, rejections and so on.
| | 00:26 | So we are going to look
at a workflow diagram next.
| | 00:29 | First thing I am going to do is to just
close up my Theme pane here, I don't need that.
| | 00:33 | I am going to go up to my New dropdown
and under Flowchart, down at the bottom
| | 00:38 | you are going to find workflow
diagram, so give that a click.
| | 00:41 | So here is our blank drawing page.
| | 00:44 | We can get fancy with backgrounds
and borders and titles after the fact.
| | 00:48 | Right now, we need to look over here
at the left hand side, at the various
| | 00:51 | stencils to see that our shapes
are quite different from a Flowchart.
| | 00:55 | So we do have Backgrounds, Borders and Titles.
| | 00:57 | We have also got Arrow Shapes.
| | 00:59 | So if you click on that, you can see
some three-dimensional and shadowed
| | 01:02 | arrows that might be used.
| | 01:04 | But we have got a Department now,
a department stencil that includes
| | 01:08 | various departments in a company
like Accounting, a Copy Center, Design,
| | 01:12 | Facilities, etcetera.
| | 01:14 | Now down at the bottom, you can see
we have got workflow objects as well.
| | 01:18 | These are objects that might appear
in our workflow like Mail, the Product,
| | 01:22 | Users, Spreadsheets, CD
ROMs and that kind of thing.
| | 01:27 | Workflow Steps is where we are going to
have Meetings, Presentations, Approvals,
| | 01:33 | and Rejections, hopefully
in agreement at the end.
| | 01:35 | So keep in mind, we have got all of
those as we go back to Department.
| | 01:39 | That's where we are going to
start with our workflow diagram.
| | 01:43 | So our scenario might be that we have
got this great idea and we want to see if
| | 01:47 | we can turn it into a product
that we can sell in our company.
| | 01:52 | So the very first thing we need to do
is probably involve the Design team.
| | 01:56 | So let's grab the Design shape here
and we will just drop it in near the
| | 02:00 | top left hand side.
| | 02:03 | So once a Design people look at it, it
may then need to go to Engineering where
| | 02:08 | they might put together a prototype.
| | 02:10 | So it will go down to Engineering.
| | 02:12 | So from there, we will have an idea
with the prototype, how much it is going to
| | 02:16 | cost, and we might need to go to the
Board of directors for an approval.
| | 02:21 | So we take the Board of directors out
here, I am going to put them over here to
| | 02:24 | the right hand side.
| | 02:26 | If everything is okay, it will move on,
if it is not, it is going to have to go
| | 02:29 | back to the drawing board, back to the Design.
| | 02:31 | So from here, Board of
directors approves things.
| | 02:34 | Then it will actually go into another
design phase where it is actually created.
| | 02:39 | So I am going to grab Design here and
this will be our initial design, this will
| | 02:45 | be our actual design.
| | 02:47 | From the design, we are
going to end up with a product.
| | 02:49 | So I am going to go down to my Workflow
Objects and I am going to bring in my Product.
| | 02:55 | There it is.
| | 02:58 | The Product now is going to have to
go through marketing so let's go up to
| | 03:01 | our Departments again.
| | 03:03 | Let's find Marketing, there they are.
| | 03:05 | So it's going to go over to marketing, great.
| | 03:09 | Marketing is going to send it down to
Manufacturing and then it is going to be ready to go.
| | 03:16 | So hopefully, we will just have to package it.
| | 03:20 | After Manufacturing, we will bring in
Packaging, and then off it goes to the world to buy.
| | 03:29 | All right, so here is our process.
| | 03:30 | Now we just need to connect things.
| | 03:32 | Now again, because these are
actual shapes, we can use our
| | 03:35 | automatic connections.
| | 03:36 | You can see when we hover over an
object like this, like this Design shape,
| | 03:41 | it has got the arrows.
| | 03:42 | We do want it to go down to the
neighboring shape with a connection.
| | 03:45 | So down it comes down to our
Engineering and it is going to go over to the
| | 03:49 | neighboring shape, which
is our Board of directors.
| | 03:52 | If it is approved by the
Board of directors, guess what?
| | 03:55 | It is going to go down to
the second design phase.
| | 03:59 | They create the Product.
| | 04:01 | The Product is going to go over to
Marketing and all the way down to
| | 04:07 | our Packaging, like so.
| | 04:09 | The only thing missing is we need a
connector that is going to go back to the
| | 04:12 | Design process, back to the
drawing board if it is not approved.
| | 04:16 | So let's go get a connector.
| | 04:18 | We can go to our Connector tool up here.
| | 04:20 | Or if we wanted to, we could go down
to check out some of our shapes under
| | 04:24 | Workflow Steps and there
is our Dynamic connector.
| | 04:27 | So it is up to you.
| | 04:28 | I like to come down here, just drag my
Dynamic connector, look at the arrow.
| | 04:32 | You can see the direction it is going.
| | 04:34 | So it has got to come
back to this guy right here.
| | 04:36 | Once that is highlighted, I let go, and
then I drag the starting point back to
| | 04:41 | my Board of directors.
| | 04:42 | When it is highlighted, I let go
and it is a Dynamic connection.
| | 04:46 | Of course, you know what that means.
| | 04:48 | It means that it is going to flow back
and if I move my shapes around, they will
| | 04:53 | always stay connected.
| | 04:55 | So there is my basic diagram.
| | 04:57 | I may need to add some things
like text, for example, to this.
| | 05:00 | This would be a No
decision, so I could type in No.
| | 05:03 | See how it is a separator there and this
is a Yes, so I am going to type in Yes.
| | 05:10 | When I deselect by clicking outside, I
zoom back out so I can see the full flow.
| | 05:15 | Now if I wanted to, I could add text to these.
| | 05:18 | If I didn't want to just look at
the shape, if for example I had to say
| | 05:21 | Engineering, I can type Engineering.
| | 05:25 | Same thing here for a Design
and in this case, a Design Step 1.
| | 05:33 | So I can come down here
and type in, Design Step 2.
| | 05:40 | This is the Board, I am just going to
type in Board and I am going to scroll
| | 05:44 | down with my Scrollbar.
| | 05:46 | This is the Product.
| | 05:48 | I am going to type in, Finished Product.
| | 05:53 | Over here I'll just deselect that.
| | 05:55 | When we hover our shape over here, we
know Marketing has got to get involved,
| | 05:59 | so we type them in.
| | 06:02 | Then it comes down here to Manufacturing.
| | 06:04 | Make sure we spell that right.
| | 06:11 | And then off it goes to Packaging.
| | 06:13 | Okay, let's zoom out to our full page.
| | 06:21 | See what that looks like.
| | 06:22 | All we need now is probably a title.
| | 06:24 | I am going to add in a title from my
Borders and Titles, everybody knows I like
| | 06:30 | this Title block retro,
and enter right up there.
| | 06:35 | You will notice that's getting
a little bit close to my shapes.
| | 06:38 | In fact, this guy is getting overlapped.
| | 06:40 | So what I am going to do is
actually move everything down by doing a
| | 06:43 | marquee-select, everything
but my title is selected.
| | 06:47 | When I see the four-sided arrow, I
can now just push it down a little bit.
| | 06:51 | That's a good spot there.
| | 06:52 | Come back to my title, double-click to
get inside, double-click the word Title
| | 06:56 | and type right over that, New
Product Release. There we go.
| | 07:04 | All right, maybe a
background will make it look sharp.
| | 07:08 | Let's go to our steel
background, drag it in and release.
| | 07:12 | That looks cool, I kind of like it.
| | 07:14 | There is a little bit of adjusting
still to do with some of the text, but you
| | 07:17 | know how to do that from previous
lessons when we covered the basics.
| | 07:21 | So that covers a workflow diagram.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a cross-functional flowchart| 00:01 | All right, we are going to go a step
further from the regular flowchart and
| | 00:04 | create something called a
Cross Functional flowchart.
| | 00:07 | Now these flowcharts are a little bit different.
| | 00:10 | They portray relationships,
interactions and workflows for an organization or
| | 00:15 | process but they are particularly useful
for portraying two characteristics at once.
| | 00:20 | So you have got the steps in a specific process.
| | 00:22 | You know how the departments or
functions involved in the process interact and
| | 00:26 | when you start a Cross Functional
flowchart, Visio prompts you for the number
| | 00:29 | and the orientation of the bands and
then adds the bands to the page so that we
| | 00:34 | can drag the flowchart shapes into them.
| | 00:36 | Once you add a shape to a functional
band in a flowchart like this, Visio
| | 00:40 | considers the shape and
the band to be a single unit.
| | 00:44 | That means that if you move or delete a
functional band, the shapes in it will go away too.
| | 00:49 | So we are going to create a Cross
Functional flowchart building on a scenario of
| | 00:53 | implementing a brand new
customer with our product.
| | 00:56 | So we are going to go up to the New
button dropdown here and from the Flowchart
| | 01:01 | category here, we are going to
select Cross Functional Flowchart.
| | 01:05 | So the first thing we see is a
dialog prompting us to choose the band
| | 01:09 | orientation as well as the number of bands.
| | 01:12 | You can see here on the left hand
side selected by default is Horizontal.
| | 01:16 | So with these Horizontal bands that
you see, the flowchart actually moves
| | 01:20 | vertically down and across
through this functional flowchart.
| | 01:24 | If we were to choose Vertical, the
vertical bands mean that the flowchart
| | 01:28 | actually moves left to
right in a horizontal fashion.
| | 01:31 | So I am going to go back to Horizontal and
now I am going to select the number of bands.
| | 01:35 | So in our scenario, where we are
implementing a new customer, various
| | 01:38 | departments will get involved.
| | 01:39 | Let's say there are three different
departments involved in getting a customer
| | 01:44 | up and running on our software.
| | 01:45 | Well, if there are three different
departments involved, we are going to need three bands.
| | 01:50 | So we are going to up that to three by
clicking the Up Arrow or you can type in
| | 01:53 | the number if you need to.
| | 01:55 | Let's include a title bar
that's going to go across the top.
| | 01:57 | It won't be counted as one of those bands.
| | 02:00 | So we will click OK.
| | 02:00 | All right, so here is the beginnings of
our Cross Functional Flowchart and you
| | 02:05 | can see up the top we have got Process
Name and you can see here that I have got
| | 02:09 | one of my functions already highlighted
or selected, which means I can actually
| | 02:13 | just type in the name of the department here.
| | 02:15 | So we have got three departments
getting involved and we will put them in the
| | 02:18 | order where our actual process will begin.
| | 02:21 | So let's say it starts with Sales.
| | 02:23 | I am just going to type in Sales.
| | 02:25 | You can see how we get zoomed in here.
| | 02:26 | We type it in horizontally but because
the bands are going horizontal, when we
| | 02:31 | click outside of this selected area,
the title is going to be inserted
| | 02:35 | vertically here to fit nicely.
| | 02:37 | Let's go down to the next function, we
will just click on it and after Sales
| | 02:41 | gets involved, then we have an Advisor
assigned to the customer, click outside of there.
| | 02:48 | It looks good.
| | 02:49 | Then the very last thing
that happens is Training.
| | 02:52 | The Training department is also involved.
| | 02:54 | Now I said the very last thing that
happens is Training, not necessarily, the
| | 02:58 | last department we need here is
Training but as we move through the various
| | 03:03 | bands in our flowchart, we could go
back and forth from Sales to the Advisor
| | 03:07 | back to Sales, maybe down to Training and back.
| | 03:09 | You will see that I mean now
as we start to add our shape.
| | 03:12 | But first let's give this a name.
| | 03:13 | I am going to click up here where it
says Process Name and I am going to
| | 03:17 | double-click right there.
| | 03:19 | I am going to type in Customer Implementation.
| | 03:22 | I will click outside the
selected area to deselect.
| | 03:28 | Now we can fancy this up with some
backgrounds and schemes and so on and choose
| | 03:33 | some color themes, for example, but for
now we will just get the information in.
| | 03:37 | So over here on our stencils, you can
see that Cross Functional Flowchart shapes
| | 03:41 | here include the functional band and separators.
| | 03:44 | Now we have got everything we need from
that initial dialog box we saw, but if
| | 03:49 | for some reason, you came up with
another department that needs to get involved,
| | 03:53 | you can easily add another functional
band just by clicking and dragging it in
| | 03:57 | and inserting it where it belongs.
| | 03:59 | But we don't need one, we have got the
three that we do need, so we are going to
| | 04:03 | go up to our basic flowchart shapes now.
| | 04:05 | The other stencil contains Arrow
Shapes and you can see some of those
| | 04:09 | three-dimensional type
arrows with shadows and stuff.
| | 04:11 | But we are going to go to our basic
flowchart shapes and we are going to use
| | 04:14 | some automatic
connections or dynamic connections.
| | 04:17 | All right, so let's start with a process here.
| | 04:20 | We will click this box and drag it in
and let's say Sales is the first person
| | 04:25 | involved with the customer and
this is going to be Sale Finalized.
| | 04:32 | We will click outside.
| | 04:36 | See how it zooms back to see what it looks like?
| | 04:38 | After the sale is finalized, they are
introduced to the Advisor, so we are
| | 04:43 | going to bring this second box in and that's
the salesperson who is responsible for doing that.
| | 04:50 | Introduce Advisor, good.
| | 04:53 | I will click outside to zoom out.
| | 04:56 | Then the Advisor is going to get
involved, so in this case, what is the
| | 05:01 | Advisor going to do?
| | 05:03 | The Advisor is going to Begin Implementation.
| | 05:06 | I am going to press Enter here
to get it on to a separate line.
| | 05:13 | I am going to actually hit Enter twice
and it is going to be Fill Checklist.
| | 05:18 | Okay, so the beginning of the
implementation involves a checklist.
| | 05:25 | You can see I am just using one
single basic shape, but you have got all of
| | 05:28 | these shapes to choose from.
| | 05:30 | I am going to continue to
use my Process shape here.
| | 05:33 | After they fill out the checklist, actually
let's drop that here and put in a decision.
| | 05:40 | So I will drop a decision box in here.
| | 05:41 | All right, so the decision is going
to be once they have filled out the
| | 05:46 | checklist, if it is complete, do
they move on to Training or not.
| | 05:51 | So Complete Checklist, I will
deselect and if they do, they move onto the
| | 06:02 | initial training, so just
try and line that up, good.
| | 06:07 | So Customer Training, deselect, I am
just going to move this over a little bit
| | 06:13 | too so it is lined up nicely.
| | 06:16 | All right, after the Training, then
it is going to go back to the project
| | 06:19 | advisor or the Advisor here who is
going to follow up on the implementation.
| | 06:25 | So I am going to do that, call it Follow-up.
| | 06:29 | I think you have got the idea
now and we will click outside here.
| | 06:34 | The last thing that's going to happen
is there will be a certificate or some
| | 06:38 | kind of document indicating
that they have implemented.
| | 06:41 | So that will also be a
responsibility of the Advisor.
| | 06:45 | Okay, so Certificate of Completion, good.
| | 06:52 | All right, so there is our shapes.
| | 06:54 | Now we've just got to get them all connected.
| | 06:56 | Now we can use our Connector tool up
here, we know we can do that just by
| | 07:00 | clicking, come down here
and connect shape to shape.
| | 07:03 | I am going to click that to deselect.
| | 07:05 | Actually I am going to go to my mouse
pointer here and we also know that when we
| | 07:09 | click on a shape that sometimes, if
you were working in some of the previous
| | 07:13 | lessons, you would notice that we will
get the automatic connector showing up.
| | 07:17 | Notice what happens in a Cross
Functional Flowchart, because we are going across
| | 07:21 | bands and so on, we
don't get to see any of that.
| | 07:24 | So we need to go to our Connector tool or
we have got the Dynamic connector down here.
| | 07:29 | We can click and drag that in.
| | 07:30 | You can see the arrow, so we just move
it so that it is selecting the correct
| | 07:35 | point right there on our Sale Finalized.
| | 07:38 | And now we need to move that over to here.
| | 07:41 | When it highlights in red, we know it
is connected or glued to that connection
| | 07:45 | point and we have got our first connection.
| | 07:48 | Now we want to go from here down to
our Advisor, same thing, there we are
| | 07:55 | connected, drag the other
end and that's connected.
| | 07:59 | Continuing on, I am going
to go from here to here.
| | 08:04 | Now we have got a decision here.
| | 08:06 | If the checklist is completed, they
are coming back down to their Training.
| | 08:11 | So let's add that in first, but we've
got to keep in mind here that if they
| | 08:15 | do not complete the checklist, that it
has got to go back to the beginning of
| | 08:20 | the implementation.
| | 08:22 | So we need another connector here.
| | 08:24 | It is going to go from-- let's try and
get that lined up, come over here and it
| | 08:33 | is going to go back to here.
| | 08:35 | Okay, it is kind of hard to see because
it is running along the band but it is
| | 08:40 | there and that's a decision.
| | 08:42 | So in this case, if the checklist is
complete, this is a Yes going down to Training.
| | 08:48 | From Training it is going to go back
to Follow-up, which is the Advisor here.
| | 08:53 | So connect to that point.
| | 08:54 | And then from there, last one, just for
the sake of time, we will connect these
| | 08:59 | two to the end of the process.
| | 09:02 | So here is our Cross Functional chart.
| | 09:03 | Let's add some text now.
| | 09:05 | I would like to add some text to this connector.
| | 09:07 | So with that connector selected,
just type in the word, Yes.
| | 09:11 | See how we are zoomed in here.
| | 09:12 | Release and look at that.
| | 09:14 | We've got the word Yes there
indicating that if the checklist is completed it
| | 09:20 | can move on to Training.
| | 09:21 | Now we are going to click
on this one and type in No.
| | 09:24 | So the opposite, and we will deselect.
| | 09:27 | All right, so there is our Cross
Functional Flowchart, very simple, there is a
| | 09:32 | lot more we can do obviously, with some
of these other shapes and some of these
| | 09:36 | other connectors, but I
think you have got the idea.
| | 09:39 | Next, we would try to make it look good,
maybe with a theme, so we could click
| | 09:43 | our Theme button here and select from
one of the themes to give it some color.
| | 09:49 | If you don't have a background and
you select a theme that has a colored
| | 09:52 | background, you need to click OK here
when you see that dialog and bring a
| | 09:56 | background into your actual drawing.
| | 09:59 | Now you will notice that if we go to our
Arrow Shapes, there is nothing there as
| | 10:04 | in the way of backgrounds.
| | 10:05 | Same thing goes for our Basic Flowchart
Shapes and our Cross Functional, same thing.
| | 10:11 | So in that case, we would want to go
up to the File menu, come down to Shapes
| | 10:15 | and over here, if we go down to Visio
Extras for example, you can see there
| | 10:19 | is all kinds of stuff, Borders and
Titles, Backgrounds, there is our
| | 10:23 | backgrounds right there. We click on that.
| | 10:25 | We have seen this before on previous lessons.
| | 10:28 | Now at least we have got something that
we can drag, Background city, if I drag
| | 10:32 | that over there, click OK. There we go.
| | 10:39 | So we have added a bit of spice to it
and now the actual theme is able to put
| | 10:43 | that color in the background.
| | 10:45 | So you can see as we select some of
the other ones, they do have backgrounds.
| | 10:49 | It works so long as we have got one added.
| | 10:52 | All right, so that covers a Cross
Functional Flowchart, congratulations!
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
17. Maps and Floor PlansCreating a directional map| 00:01 | All right, we are going to work with
directional maps now and in Visio, it is
| | 00:05 | quite easy to create a directional map.
| | 00:07 | You see them all the time by the way, if
you use MapQuest or Google Maps, for example.
| | 00:11 | You know how it easy it is punch in a location
or some directions and have a map drawn for you.
| | 00:17 | Well, you can do the exact same
thing maybe even better in Visio.
| | 00:21 | Of course, it is going to take a little
bit of effort on your part, but in the
| | 00:24 | end, you will have a nice directional map.
| | 00:26 | Let's use a scenario where we want to
create a map that shows directions to our
| | 00:31 | location in whatever city and we want to
include direction say from the airport,
| | 00:37 | train station etcetera.
| | 00:38 | So what we are going to do is go to
our New button and click the dropdown.
| | 00:41 | We will go to Maps and Floor Plans and
right up here, you will see Directional
| | 00:46 | Map and we will use US
units. Give that a click.
| | 00:50 | It opens up our Drawing page and
you can see we have got a number of
| | 00:53 | stencils over here that are opened,
by default, including Road Shapes,
| | 00:57 | Transportation Shapes.
| | 00:59 | If we click on that, you can see
there is a lot of different signs we might
| | 01:02 | see on the Roadways.
| | 01:04 | Same thing goes for Recreation Shapes
and we have got Metro Shapes, so if you
| | 01:09 | have got a subway or an LRT of
some kind, we might want to show that.
| | 01:13 | We have got Landmark Shapes as well.
| | 01:15 | There is our Airport, Buildings and so on.
| | 01:19 | So we might be using the Train
station and the Airport as landmarks so that
| | 01:23 | people can get from those
locations to our location.
| | 01:26 | All right, so let's go
back down to Road Shapes here.
| | 01:29 | So we know we have got some major
roads and we are going to start with this
| | 01:33 | Road square right here.
| | 01:34 | I am going to just click it
and drag it on to the page.
| | 01:37 | So not much to begin with, but
let's say this is a highway that runs
| | 01:40 | North-South, so we can drag the
end-piece here, the end connection point
| | 01:45 | to rotate this piece.
| | 01:47 | Now hovering over that connection point,
we can also click and drag to increase
| | 01:53 | its length and I want it to go
almost the full length of the page.
| | 01:58 | Now we are going to put in
another one, now notice that we have got
| | 02:01 | some intersections here.
| | 02:02 | We have got some Interchanges,
Roundabouts, there is a 3-way and a 4-way, we
| | 02:07 | have got corners and so on.
| | 02:09 | Let's put in one of these
Cloverleaf interchanges.
| | 02:12 | We're going to put it in right here.
| | 02:13 | Now you can see that the connection
points will snap into place when we are
| | 02:17 | right on top of that highlight.
| | 02:19 | So we're going to put it
right there, up near the top.
| | 02:22 | Good, now it is just a matter of adding
some more roads here so we are going to
| | 02:25 | get the Road square and I want
that connection point to snap in.
| | 02:29 | You can see when it is glued it turns red.
| | 02:32 | We can let go, and we will just
extend the length of this one by clicking
| | 02:35 | and dragging as well.
| | 02:38 | So up here is where the Airport is.
| | 02:40 | We are going to have the
Train station down here somewhere.
| | 02:43 | We might need a Railroad track in there too,
so I am going to drag this right over here.
| | 02:48 | I am going to put it there and just
like a piece of road, we can rotate it.
| | 02:52 | I am going to lengthen it while I do
that and I am going to have it go just like
| | 02:57 | so and you can see what
happens when I stretch it too far.
| | 03:02 | I would run out of rails.
| | 03:04 | So I am going to knock
that back down right to there.
| | 03:09 | I am going to move it slightly up and
I am going to add another one to it.
| | 03:14 | So right there when it's glued, I am
going to straighten that out, snaps into
| | 03:19 | position for me and right there
is where I am going to let go.
| | 03:23 | Okay, so there is my Railroad.
| | 03:26 | Obviously, there are going to be rail
crossings at these roads, unless there are
| | 03:30 | underpasses or overpasses,
but we can indicate that.
| | 03:33 | Next, we are going to put in our
location, so first of all, before we do that,
| | 03:38 | let's put in some road signs.
| | 03:39 | This is going to be an
Interstate right there, and because it is
| | 03:43 | highlighted, look at this.
| | 03:44 | We can type in which interstate it is.
| | 03:47 | So I am going to type in 81 and I am
going to click outside of that to lock it in.
| | 03:52 | So there is Interstate 81 and I
am going to drag another one here.
| | 03:57 | Actually, I am going to bring in a US
route right there and I am going to type 101.
| | 04:01 | Good!
| | 04:04 | I know in real life those probably
don't connect, but you got the idea.
| | 04:08 | So we have got our roadways.
| | 04:09 | Now we got our major roadways,
we got our intersection here.
| | 04:13 | Let's put in our landmarks.
| | 04:14 | So I am going to go up to my
Landmark Shapes and I am going to scroll up
| | 04:18 | probably at the top and drag the
Airport in right up here, good.
| | 04:23 | There is my Airport.
| | 04:24 | In fact, I am going to just put it on a tilt,
I am going to rotate it slightly. There we go.
| | 04:30 | Train station is going to be down here.
| | 04:31 | There is my Train station Landmark Shape,
I am going to bring it right down here
| | 04:36 | at the bottom of the railway. Good.
| | 04:40 | Obviously, that rail continues on, but
this is important that we only show the
| | 04:44 | area that we need because we are going
to put our location in here somewhere.
| | 04:48 | So that's going to be our building.
| | 04:50 | Now we can look through the various
shapes here in our Landmark Shapes and find
| | 04:55 | one that closely
represents what we are looking for.
| | 04:58 | Here it is back at the top.
| | 04:59 | Let's use Building.
| | 05:01 | We will use Building 2, so we are
not a high-rise. We're a low-rise.
| | 05:04 | We will bring that in and
we will put it right there.
| | 05:08 | What we will do is we will just
type in the name of our company with
| | 05:12 | it selected, XYZ Inc.
| | 05:16 | and deselect by clicking outside.
| | 05:18 | If we zoom in, I just want to
zoom in so you could see that.
| | 05:21 | It does show up underneath the Building.
| | 05:23 | All right, I am going to zoom back out to 50%.
| | 05:27 | That shows me my entire page.
| | 05:29 | Now we need those smaller roads that get us
from the interstates and highways to our location.
| | 05:35 | So we can go back to our Road Shapes
here and you will notice that we some
| | 05:39 | Thin roads here as well.
| | 05:41 | So I am going to drag the Thin road in and I am
going to drag it out in front of the Building.
| | 05:47 | I am going to click and drag all the
way past the Interstate and release.
| | 05:54 | I am going to do another one, so let's
grab another Thin road and we are going
| | 05:59 | to go from here, straight down, and
we are going to have a curve over that
| | 06:07 | railway track so let's
bring in a bit of a curve.
| | 06:10 | Now you can see we have got Curve 1,
Curve 2, curved in different ways.
| | 06:14 | What we don't see down here
is a curve for our Thin road.
| | 06:19 | So we might want to
consider using something different.
| | 06:21 | Watch what happens when I bring
in Curve 1 here and connect it.
| | 06:25 | You can see it doesn't really look
like the others and I can size this in
| | 06:31 | different directions to get it going
right where I need and I am thinking now
| | 06:35 | that this Thin road needs to go.
| | 06:38 | Now we can remove anything just by
clicking it and hitting Delete on the keyboard.
| | 06:43 | So we are going to take
our Square road again here.
| | 06:45 | I am going to add it to that connection
point, drag it straight through, like so.
| | 06:52 | Now of course, with this selected, we
can simply type in the name of the highway
| | 06:56 | if we wanted to and show up there
or we can use some of our symbols.
| | 07:00 | But that's good right there.
| | 07:01 | All right, one more Thin road is going to do it.
| | 07:04 | I am going to put it right here, drag
this end up and I am going to have it just
| | 07:11 | connect right at the road
so it is going to stop there.
| | 07:13 | Okay, so now it is just a matter
of labeling those if we wanted to.
| | 07:18 | We can add some Transportation Shapes
if we needed to add in some signs like,
| | 07:22 | for example, we want people to come to
the Stop sign and then continue through,
| | 07:27 | so put a 3-way stop there.
| | 07:29 | You can see we have got the Airport
symbol down here as well if we needed it.
| | 07:33 | Here are some rail crossings.
| | 07:34 | So I think we are going to need one in there.
| | 07:36 | Then I am just going to put it
right where the Thin road is.
| | 07:40 | That's going to indicate to me looking
at this that the railroad probably goes
| | 07:44 | under the highway or over it.
| | 07:45 | There is no real crossing there.
| | 07:48 | We wouldn't need another one so I am
going to deselect by clicking, looks good.
| | 07:53 | I think I have got everything I need so far.
| | 07:56 | Maybe it would be good though to
show North, South, East and West.
| | 08:00 | So some kind of compass.
| | 08:01 | So you can see that here in our
Transportation Shapes, we have got the various
| | 08:05 | signs and stoplights and so on
that we might see on the road.
| | 08:10 | Now I am going to drag Parking just
while I see it here to the other side of the
| | 08:13 | Building so people know
that's where they have to park.
| | 08:16 | We can size that by the way, make it
bigger by clicking and dragging those
| | 08:19 | handles and we will leave it over there.
| | 08:21 | Okay, so back to what I was talking about.
| | 08:24 | We need something to show the orientation here.
| | 08:27 | We are not going to find it under Recreation.
| | 08:29 | If we go to Metro Shapes, obviously not
there as well, but if we come down here,
| | 08:34 | you can see that we have got a compass
kind of shape down here. It says North.
| | 08:40 | We are going to point that in the
Northern direction and we can rotate that
| | 08:44 | until we hit North and deselect.
| | 08:50 | All right, so the only thing left to
do would be to put in a title, maybe we
| | 08:54 | would want to put in some written
directions, we could add a text box by
| | 08:58 | clicking up here and creating a text box.
| | 09:01 | We could type in the directions if we wanted to.
| | 09:03 | We know how to create and add text
boxes now, so go back to that lesson if
| | 09:07 | you don't know how and you want to
change the orientation and the location of
| | 09:13 | your flashing cursor.
| | 09:14 | If you want to get it so that the
justification is Left instead of Centered, go
| | 09:20 | back to that lesson covering text
boxes, because it is quite simple.
| | 09:24 | I am going to go back up to my Pointer tool
here and just leave out the text box for now.
| | 09:29 | You know how to do all that stuff.
| | 09:31 | Obviously, if you wanted to add a
background for effect, you don't have
| | 09:35 | backgrounds to choose from in
the stencils that are given to you.
| | 09:38 | So again, it would be up
to File, down to Shapes.
| | 09:42 | Over here under Visio Extras is where
you are going to find your Backgrounds and
| | 09:47 | with that stencil open, you
could pick any background you want.
| | 09:50 | I am going to choose expedition, see
what that looks like, and that's kind of
| | 09:55 | cool, got the world map in behind.
| | 09:57 | Notice there is also that little guy down
there, so it might not be the best background.
| | 10:02 | We will go to the Background tab,
click on it and Delete to remove it.
| | 10:06 | Go back to Page 1 to see what that looks like.
| | 10:09 | So experiment with Backgrounds, you
can also work with some of the color
| | 10:12 | schemes found under the Theme button up here
until you get it looking exactly the way you want.
| | 10:18 | So have fun creating some directional maps!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a 3D directional map| 00:02 | All right, continuing on our theme of
Directional Maps, we are going to zoom
| | 00:06 | into an area and create what's called
a 3D Directional Map, and I say zoom in
| | 00:10 | because you wouldn't use a 3D
Directional Map to create what we did in the last
| | 00:14 | lesson here on my page.
| | 00:16 | But maybe to focus in on a smaller area,
you would, so people get an idea of
| | 00:20 | the buildings, and where there might be
crosswalks and bridges and that kind of stuff.
| | 00:26 | So that's what we are going to do, we
will have a little bit of fun with this one.
| | 00:28 | Let's go to our New button drop-down up
here, we will go down to Maps and Floor
| | 00:33 | Plans and we will go to Directional
Maps but this time the 3D one in US units.
| | 00:39 | So look what we get here, we get one
single stencil that contains all of our shapes.
| | 00:43 | You can see we have got some different
road shapes and they have perspective to
| | 00:46 | them, since we are going to be working in 3D.
| | 00:48 | We have got some bridges
and rivers, cars, trains.
| | 00:53 | We have got some trees here.
| | 00:54 | Looks like some blocks representing
the different kinds of buildings we might
| | 00:57 | want in our 3D Directional Map
as well, including an airport.
| | 01:01 | All right, let's start with the airport.
| | 01:04 | So on our blank page here and I think,
I might want to turn this on its side.
| | 01:08 | So let's go up to File and then,
Page Setup, and we will go in
| | 01:12 | Landscape Orientation.
| | 01:14 | So we are going to change it to
Landscape, and we will click OK.
| | 01:17 | All right, so we will start with our airport.
| | 01:20 | Let's drag it up here into the
top right hand corner here. Good.
| | 01:25 | Just like that.
| | 01:26 | So our airport is out there in the
top right hand corner, now we are going
| | 01:29 | to build into our little town that we are
going to create in this area of our drawing page.
| | 01:34 | So I am going to scroll back up, and
I think I will start with some roads.
| | 01:38 | So Road 3 here, you can see small
piece of road that I am just going to drag
| | 01:43 | in here and release.
| | 01:45 | Now it's got some perspective to it,
and you will see that perspective when
| | 01:49 | we start adding to it.
| | 01:50 | Now I am going to do a Ctrl+D, that's
for Duplicate, and I am going to attach
| | 01:55 | the two ends together like so.
| | 01:57 | If we start using the handles to
increase the length of our road, we are
| | 02:02 | actually going to change the size as well.
| | 02:04 | So for example, if I click and drag
this way, you can see how it's getting
| | 02:07 | wider as it gets longer.
| | 02:10 | So I want to leave them all of the
same size, Ctrl+D again gives me a third
| | 02:14 | piece, and right at the end of this
third piece is where I am going to put in a
| | 02:17 | crosswalk, so we do have a crosswalk here
and you can see that it is a different size.
| | 02:23 | So when I drag it in here, I need to
drag the corner until I get the right size
| | 02:29 | to hook it up with my current road.
| | 02:31 | So when I deselect, you can see
that's almost perfect, but not quite right.
| | 02:36 | So I can fiddle around with
that until you get the right size.
| | 02:39 | Let me drag the borders down here across,
and let's move it into position here,
| | 02:48 | there that looks good.
| | 02:49 | So you can see how it's
taking on that 3D effect.
| | 02:52 | So now to put another piece of road on
either side of this and continue on, we
| | 02:56 | could use one of the pieces we already
have, Ctrl+D on the keyboard, we know
| | 03:00 | it's Duplicate, and
attach that to the end there.
| | 03:03 | Now to get some pieces of road over
here and here, if we look at our road
| | 03:07 | pieces, it doesn't quite look like we
have got anything that's going to work, so
| | 03:11 | we actually have to take another Road
3 here, or duplicate this using Ctrl+D,
| | 03:16 | and then, we are going to rotate it.
| | 03:18 | So there are different ways to rotate.
| | 03:20 | We can move this around like so.
| | 03:23 | That's not going to work, is it?
| | 03:24 | So both of the ends don't match up.
| | 03:27 | Now if I was to just bring this over to
this side, it doesn't match up there either.
| | 03:33 | So here is where those Flip
buttons really come in handy.
| | 03:36 | Now we have got the Rotate buttons, but we
have also got Flip Vertical and Flip Horizontal.
| | 03:41 | If I flip horizontal, and then, rotate
this back, you will see that it actually
| | 03:45 | is going to line up now, and
I can extend my road there.
| | 03:49 | That's the piece I want to duplicate,
Ctrl+D to move down to this side and
| | 03:54 | attach there and a sign sort
of kind of snaps into position.
| | 03:57 | All right, so you've got the idea with roads,
now what if we have a river in there too?
| | 04:02 | So we are going to have our river that
runs along our airport here, and we need
| | 04:06 | to connect this road to the airport.
| | 04:10 | So I am going to drag the corner until I
get the right size, try and line it up,
| | 04:15 | I need to go a little bit
bigger still. Let's try that.
| | 04:22 | Not bad, we are getting close.
| | 04:24 | Maybe just a smidgen bigger, and of course,
it moves it on us too, so there we go.
| | 04:31 | Now our airport is going to need to
move or scale down a little bit, I am going
| | 04:35 | to scale it down, sort of still up in
the top right corner, people got the idea.
| | 04:40 | It's along the river here.
| | 04:42 | We can extend that river too
using some of our river shapes.
| | 04:46 | So obviously that's not the right
size, I am going to increase the size.
| | 04:51 | I will try that, see if it matches up.
| | 04:53 | That's pretty close, just scale it
down slightly, and try to touch that right
| | 05:03 | there, oh not quite.
| | 05:05 | So you can see it takes a
little bit of fiddling around.
| | 05:09 | If I deselect, it's just a
little bit off center here.
| | 05:12 | I am going to drag that up,
just a bit, and try that.
| | 05:19 | Now it doesn't have to be perfect,
because we are going to be putting in some
| | 05:22 | buildings and stuff.
| | 05:23 | You can try it down on this side,
and see it doesn't want to snap very
| | 05:27 | nicely into position.
| | 05:28 | So there is a little trick,
when things don't snap properly.
| | 05:37 | We right-click, go down to Format here,
go down to Protection, and you can see
| | 05:44 | we have got Aspect Ratio selected here,
so automatically when we change the
| | 05:50 | size, we are changing the Aspect Ratio.
| | 05:52 | We are going to deselect, click OK,
and now, I can actually drag the bottom
| | 05:56 | up, and you can see it's not affecting the
width as well as the height at the same time.
| | 06:02 | I mean that's something to play around with.
| | 06:04 | Your river doesn't have to be perfect.
| | 06:06 | Once you have got it pretty close, I am
going to drag this end in here a little
| | 06:10 | bit, so it fits on my page and
duplicate that and add it to the other end.
| | 06:19 | There we go, right there.
| | 06:20 | All right, it's coming along.
| | 06:24 | So let's throw some buildings in now
where they belong, just so people know
| | 06:28 | where they are, and help them get oriented.
| | 06:30 | I am going to scroll down into my
Shapes, and I know that one of these
| | 06:33 | corners is a gas station.
| | 06:35 | So I am going to click and drag the
gas station right in there, perfect.
| | 06:40 | So you have got the gas station on
the corner, good spot for it, and we
| | 06:43 | have also got a store that we are
going to put in here but we want it
| | 06:46 | facing the proper direction.
| | 06:49 | So if we rotate it, look what
happens. That doesn't work.
| | 06:52 | It's as if it's turning on its side.
| | 06:54 | What we really want to do is
again use our Flip Options.
| | 06:58 | So there is a flip, there is a flip
upside down, not the one we want, and with
| | 07:04 | it flipped, let's just
move it over here. Perfect.
| | 07:09 | All right, let's add some buildings now,
we have got blocks and you can see we
| | 07:14 | have got different shaped
blocks, Block1 through 7.
| | 07:18 | Block 7 here has a roof on it.
| | 07:20 | So I am going to move it here.
| | 07:22 | I am going to rotate it, flip it, and
size it up a little bit, and we move it
| | 07:34 | over here on our road.
| | 07:39 | Now here is where the fun comes in,
Ctrl+D to Duplicate, slide it into
| | 07:45 | position, Ctrl+D, so we don't have to do all
of that flipping and rotating, we just add them.
| | 07:52 | Ctrl+D, I am going to come to the other
side of the street, again, and you can
| | 08:02 | see that they can overlap each other,
and overlap the road as well, gives us our
| | 08:06 | 3D effect, and let's add some cars now.
| | 08:11 | So we have got some cars here
facing different directions.
| | 08:14 | Car 3 would go in this direction here,
Car 4 would be going over here, same
| | 08:23 | thing for Car 2, we are pulling it
behind, obviously, traffic there, and
| | 08:29 | let's add another one.
| | 08:30 | Let's go to Car 5 going
in the opposite direction.
| | 08:33 | All right, maybe some trees out here on
the other side of the river to indicate
| | 08:41 | there are no buildings.
| | 08:43 | I can just keep dragging them or I
could do my Ctrl+D to add a whole bunch, and
| | 08:48 | we can size them so they are different sizes.
| | 08:51 | Move them around, duplicate those.
| | 08:55 | You have got the idea.
| | 08:56 | All right, so there is the
beginnings of our 3D Directional Map.
| | 09:01 | Of course we could continue to add more
roads, more buildings, more cars etcetera.
| | 09:06 | We can add a background just to
review one more time, we can go up to the
| | 09:10 | File menu down to Shapes, and open up
another one of those stencils from Visio Extras.
| | 09:16 | Let's go up to Backgrounds, and you
can see we have got some different ones.
| | 09:20 | I would choose a solid background
here, and probably change its color.
| | 09:24 | So if we wanted to, we could use
Themes, or we could go to the Fill Color
| | 09:27 | drop-down here and just choose something light.
| | 09:30 | We need to make sure it's selected
first, there it is. Let's try that.
| | 09:37 | Let's see what that looks like.
| | 09:39 | We will go back to Page 1. Kind of neat.
| | 09:41 | I am not quite sure that that's light
enough, so I am going to go back, and
| | 09:46 | choose something just a little
bit lighter, with it selected.
| | 09:52 | That's the one, good.
| | 09:53 | I will go back to Page 1 and you have
got the idea, we are moving right along
| | 09:58 | with our 3D Directional Map.
| | 10:00 | So have some fun playing around with
the various shapes, remember, you can
| | 10:03 | always add backgrounds.
| | 10:04 | You can go get titles as well, if you
want to give this a title, and don't
| | 10:07 | forget you can go into some of the other
Directional Maps, Stencils as well. It's the same way.
| | 10:12 | From the File menu, go down to Shapes,
coming through Maps and Floor Plans for
| | 10:17 | example, and under Maps, we could go
get some of those shapes we saw earlier on
| | 10:22 | in our regular Directional Map, if we
wanted to but we have got Metro Shapes,
| | 10:26 | there are Recreation Shapes and so on.
| | 10:29 | So if we wanted for example, one of
those Compass type things, you can choose
| | 10:34 | our Landmarks here, bring that in to
where it needs to go, rotate it in the
| | 10:40 | right direction, and you have got your map.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a floor plan| 00:01 | I want you to think of the last time
you went to a busy shopping mall, brand
| | 00:05 | new and you have never been there before
and you are looking for a specific retailer.
| | 00:10 | You probably went to one of those big
directories where you get an alphabetical
| | 00:13 | listing or a categorical listing of
all the retailers, but then to find where
| | 00:17 | they are located you probably looked at
a floor plan, and that's the scenario we
| | 00:22 | are going to use here as we
investigate floor plans in Visio, and it's pretty
| | 00:26 | easy to create them.
| | 00:27 | We will go up to our New button drop-
down up here and go down to Maps and Floor
| | 00:31 | Plans and we will come across to Floor Plans.
| | 00:34 | Notice we also have Hope Plan and
Office Layouts that are very similar, we
| | 00:38 | are going to look at Home Plans next, but
right now we will choose Floor Plan (US Units).
| | 00:43 | So right away you can see on my blank
page here that I am in Landscape Mode and
| | 00:49 | I have got many, many stencils to choose from.
| | 00:52 | Here we've got, Walls, Shell and
Structure, and you can see where we have got
| | 00:55 | exterior walls and various
spaces and doors and so on.
| | 00:59 | Well, we've also got a Points of Interest.
| | 01:02 | If we click on that stencil,
you can see You are here.
| | 01:05 | That might come in handy,
couple of different symbols for that.
| | 01:08 | Telephone, Fire extinguisher, Cash
machines, Washrooms, you name it, it's all here.
| | 01:15 | How about Electrical and Telecom?
| | 01:16 | So if we wanted to floor plan this going
to detail some of this information, not
| | 01:21 | necessarily used by shoppers but maybe
by building people, we've got all of that
| | 01:26 | at our finger-tips as well.
| | 01:28 | Drawing tools and Shapes for
vertical measures, ellipses, arcs and so on.
| | 01:33 | We have Dimensioning tools as
well to give us measurements.
| | 01:37 | Building Core where we've got
staircases, you can see we've got stalls for
| | 01:41 | washrooms and handrails and
escalators and all kinds of cool things.
| | 01:45 | And then we've got annotations here
for calling out certain pieces of text or
| | 01:50 | listing in a table format, various
pieces of information that we might need and
| | 01:55 | we are going to use one of these
symbols down here, one of the North symbols to
| | 01:59 | show North, East, South, and West.
| | 02:00 | So let's go back down to Walls, Shell
and Structure, and let's go to-- how
| | 02:06 | about a T-shaped room?
| | 02:08 | I am going to click-and-drag this
one over, right up here in the top left
| | 02:11 | corner and release.
| | 02:13 | So you can see which direction my T is.
| | 02:15 | I am going to de-select it, so you can
see that it's a little bit off-centered.
| | 02:18 | I am going to click on it to
select it and just rotate it this way.
| | 02:25 | All right, next I am going to size it.
| | 02:27 | Now as I click-and-drag, you can see I
am getting bigger in width and height.
| | 02:32 | So I am going to go to this size here.
| | 02:35 | Now I am going to use these little yellow
diamonds to adjust the shape of my room.
| | 02:39 | So I use the green handles for
adjusting the actual size, but now to adjust the
| | 02:45 | shape, I am going to need to
use these little guys here.
| | 02:48 | So you can see as I move across I am
changing the shape of my T, I am going to
| | 02:53 | move this one across as well, and
I am going to just drag this way.
| | 03:01 | And we are almost going to fill the
page here, and now I am going to go to
| | 03:04 | this guy here and pull it back a little bit,
same thing on this side, we will just pull it back.
| | 03:11 | How about we line it up?
| | 03:12 | So it's perfect and symmetrical on each side.
| | 03:16 | Okay, so there is my Floor Plan, I've
got my exterior walls, now I need a way
| | 03:21 | in, so we need some doors.
| | 03:23 | Well, I am going to use the revolving
door for the front, I am going to bring
| | 03:26 | that up over here, and as soon as I
see that red node up here, I know that
| | 03:32 | it's going to be glued to my exterior wall, I am
going to put it right there, somewhat centered.
| | 03:38 | I can also put in some doors on either
side, I am going to drag a door over and
| | 03:41 | I am going to just drop it
right there and see what happens.
| | 03:45 | Good, it's glued to the geometry.
| | 03:48 | I am going to duplicate that, Ctrl+D,
gives me a duplicate with the four-sided arrow.
| | 03:54 | I am going to pull one
over here on the other side.
| | 03:57 | Not everyone likes to use the revolving door.
| | 03:59 | I am going to put some double
doors down here and down here as well.
| | 04:09 | Okay, maybe we should add a double door up here.
| | 04:14 | Now maybe those doors should be opening
inwards, we can rotate it around till we
| | 04:19 | get it flipped upside down. That's good.
| | 04:22 | That's the one we want to duplicate,
Ctrl+D on the keyboard to duplicate, when
| | 04:26 | we get the four-sided arrow we can move
that in and lock it into position, right
| | 04:32 | around there, it's good.
| | 04:34 | Okay, if it flips around on you, no worries.
| | 04:36 | You can just rotate it back down like so.
| | 04:39 | Okay, so this guy needs to be
rotated inwards I think, and we will be all
| | 04:44 | set with our doors.
| | 04:46 | Okay, I think now we need to put in
some of the shops, so what we are going to
| | 04:50 | do is create some hallways, some
shops and maybe some escalators.
| | 04:54 | Let's go to our Building Core
here and let's put in our escalators.
| | 04:59 | So we are going to go right here and
you can see when I de-select that it comes
| | 05:04 | in a certain size but we can click
right on it and look at the direction.
| | 05:09 | It's going up from left to right.
| | 05:11 | So de-select by clicking outside of it.
| | 05:14 | So knowing this is going up, and I am
going to click on it one more time here
| | 05:17 | and just make it a little longer.
| | 05:20 | We are going to duplicate that.
| | 05:22 | Ctrl+D for Duplicate and I am going to
just rotate that around, the opposite
| | 05:27 | direction and move it in
side-by-side, there we go.
| | 05:33 | Okay, so we've got our
escalators here going up and down.
| | 05:37 | Next, and this is going to be our
ground floor, we are going to put in some of
| | 05:40 | the other shops, which are going to be rooms.
| | 05:43 | So as we go through some of these
tools here, I am going to go back down to
| | 05:46 | Walls, Shell and Structure and so on.
| | 05:49 | You can see that I can put in
spaces using some of these shapes.
| | 05:52 | I have got Slab down here that might
work too, but I think Shape is probably
| | 05:58 | what I am looking for or Space rather.
| | 06:00 | I am going to click-and-drag that and I
am going to put it right in the corner
| | 06:03 | here and I am going to size it up, like so.
| | 06:07 | Now I am going to duplicate it, Ctrl+D,
I am going to move that one in right
| | 06:12 | beside, Ctrl+D again, pull in that,
and one more, and that fits pretty well,
| | 06:26 | close to the edge and now I am just
going to drag the corner down here until it
| | 06:30 | snaps into position.
| | 06:32 | Let's go vertically, good.
| | 06:37 | Right, each of those is going
to have to have its own door.
| | 06:39 | Let's just do one right now.
| | 06:41 | I am going to do one of these opposing
doors, and I am just going to knock it
| | 06:45 | right in there and you can see when
I release it knows to glue it to the
| | 06:49 | geometry or in this case our Space.
| | 06:52 | So just keep in mind we probably want
to duplicate those, the four-sided arrow,
| | 06:57 | drop it in place, once it's
glued you can do the same thing.
| | 07:01 | Oh, what the heck, let's put
the other two in there, oh, no.
| | 07:05 | There I accidentally
moved something and sized it.
| | 07:09 | Ctrl+Z on the keyboard is Undo.
| | 07:11 | I want the four-sided arrow to lock it
into place and another Ctrl+D.Okay, so
| | 07:20 | there are some shops.
| | 07:22 | Now we are going to put a
couple in here, a couple of spaces.
| | 07:24 | I am going to size that up a little bit,
one more, slide a little closer to the
| | 07:37 | doors, and duplicate that, there we go.
| | 07:47 | One more duplicate, move it into the
corner here, this is a premium spot, that's
| | 07:53 | a little bit bigger than the others,
and I think you've got the idea.
| | 07:58 | All right, let's go to our points of interest.
| | 08:03 | So we want to put in-- if we were
going to be placing this floor plan at our
| | 08:07 | entrance, we could put the star right
there, and of course, we might want to
| | 08:13 | size it to be a little bit bigger than what
it's showing up as by default. Okay, good.
| | 08:22 | And when I de-select it, it
doesn't really say you are here.
| | 08:24 | So I can with it selected type, 'You
are here.' Clicking outside the selected
| | 08:33 | shape zooms me back out.
| | 08:35 | Let's go into our Washrooms now.
| | 08:40 | So we want to mark our washrooms.
| | 08:41 | We are going to have washrooms here.
| | 08:44 | I am going to size that up as well.
| | 08:48 | I am just clicking-and-dragging
the handles to get a good size.
| | 08:54 | I am going to duplicate that.
| | 08:55 | Okay, we are going to have another have.
| | 08:59 | Let's put one we are on this side in the corner.
| | 09:02 | And we will move back down
by the doors. There we go.
| | 09:08 | All right, so if we wanted some more
spaces in there, we could go back down to
| | 09:13 | our walls, shells and our structures,
and maybe now we could put in some funny
| | 09:18 | shapes in here, put in some shops like that.
| | 09:21 | I am going to duplicate,
and here's a little trick.
| | 09:25 | Let's marquee-select that and do a
Ctrl+D. Now we are duplicating both.
| | 09:30 | That's a good time-saver.
| | 09:32 | Lock it into position, like
so, and you've got the idea.
| | 09:38 | Right, so there are the
beginnings of our floor plan.
| | 09:40 | I am going to put in one more space
right here, make it a Premium Space.
| | 09:44 | I like it, and one last space right in here.
| | 09:52 | All right, so obviously each of these
spaces if I used to zoom in on them I am
| | 10:04 | going to just type-in the name of the
space, so in this case I am going to
| | 10:07 | type-in my favorite store, Sony
Store, there is our square footage.
| | 10:15 | You can see it's an Office, and the
square footage is calculated by the size and
| | 10:20 | the drawing scale in our drawing.
| | 10:24 | So simply clicking on the shape
and typing in your text labels it
| | 10:28 | appropriately, keeping in mind that
each one of these, if we zoom in, is going
| | 10:32 | to show us our square footage.
| | 10:36 | So I am going to scroll up, and you
can see as I scroll over each one of them
| | 10:41 | has their own square footage.
| | 10:43 | Scrolling down, and as we click on an item
and enter our text, we can label our stores.
| | 10:56 | Let's zoom back out to the full
page to look at the finished product.
| | 11:00 | So there is an example of a floor plan.
| | 11:02 | Keep in mind there are many, many more
shapes in a number of stencils over here
| | 11:06 | on the left-hand side, so have
fun experimenting with those.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a home plan| 00:01 | Unlike most other guys I have got a
basement in my house that I would love to
| | 00:05 | one day convert into a home theater.
| | 00:07 | So in that case I might want to use
Visio to create what we would call a Home
| | 00:11 | Plan, very similar to the Floor Plan
like we did in the last lesson and what
| | 00:15 | you see here on my drawing page,
but a Home Plan gives you a number of
| | 00:20 | different stencils that will allow
you to choose from shapes that you might
| | 00:23 | want to use in your home.
| | 00:24 | So let's go up to our New button
drop-down here, we will go down to Maps and
| | 00:29 | Floor Plans and this time we
are going to choose Home Plan.
| | 00:33 | Give that one a click, we will get our
blank drawing page, but if we look over
| | 00:38 | here at the stencils aside from our
Walls, Shell, and Structure, we have got
| | 00:42 | some different stencils showing
up here like Garden Accessories.
| | 00:46 | This would be better for outside than in.
| | 00:48 | We can add Furniture.
| | 00:49 | We have got Electrical and Telecom just
like we did in the regular Floor Plan,
| | 00:54 | we have got our Drawing tools and
Shapes and Dimensioning tools as well, but
| | 00:59 | then we've got Cabinets, Building Core
for stairs and that kind of stuff, Bath
| | 01:04 | and Kitchen, Appliances, and then
we have got our Annotations as well.
| | 01:08 | So let's start down at the bottom I
have Walls, Shells, and Structure.
| | 01:13 | First thing I am going to do though is
go up to File>Page Setup and make sure we
| | 01:17 | are using a good drawing scale.
| | 01:19 | Click the Drawing Scale tab here and
see that we are using a Pre-defined Scale
| | 01:23 | where a quarter inch on our
screen is going to equal one foot.
| | 01:27 | That means our page size allows us
for 144 feet across by 96 feet down.
| | 01:33 | So if that's just the right
amount, we would leave it as is.
| | 01:37 | If it's too much, we might want to
increase our scale or if it's not enough we
| | 01:41 | can decrease the scale as well.
| | 01:43 | So we can use some of the predefined ones
or we can use a custom scale if we wanted to.
| | 01:48 | Under the Pre-defined ones, if we click
the drop-down, you can see we can move
| | 01:52 | it to 3/8 and you can see now we have
got little less feet and I think we are
| | 01:58 | getting closer now, I am going to go to
1/2, perfect, 72 feet by 48 feet, when I
| | 02:04 | click OK, you can see my rulers have changed.
| | 02:07 | I have got 75 feet across and it
looks like almost 50 feet going upwards.
| | 02:11 | All right so now it's time to just
start putting in our shapes and we are going
| | 02:16 | to start with the Room and the Room
shape that I am going to use as is an L
| | 02:19 | Shape, because this is going to follow
the foundation in my house and I am going
| | 02:24 | to just click and drag till
I get the dimensions right.
| | 02:26 | I am going to come down and across.
| | 02:29 | Now if I look down below on my status bar I can
see the width and the height as I created here.
| | 02:34 | So I am going to come down, I am going
to use the yellow diamonds to change the
| | 02:39 | shape here, I am going to move that up
a little bit as well, move that across,
| | 02:44 | drag the whole thing over, so my width
I am going to have it 50 feet, perfect.
| | 02:54 | This I am going to adjust.
| | 02:55 | Now if I zoom in you will notice as I
scroll down here that I also see the
| | 03:02 | measurements on my walls, as I scroll
across here, look at that. That's a piece.
| | 03:09 | I have got 10 feet there.
| | 03:11 | It looks like 8 feet, 9 and
5/8 inches going that way.
| | 03:15 | So I might want to just bump that down a
little bit to right there, 8 feet and 5/8 inches.
| | 03:25 | Good I am going to zoom back out so
I can see the whole page, perfect.
| | 03:29 | There is the shape of my
foundation and that's my basement.
| | 03:32 | This is what I have to work with.
| | 03:34 | So I want to make sure I have some
storage, I like to have my theater area, of
| | 03:38 | course, and I would like
to have a work out area.
| | 03:41 | So we have got to work that around the stairs.
| | 03:44 | So we are going to go to our Building
Core stencil and we are going to put
| | 03:47 | in our Stairs and there is a staircase
coming out, right about there in our basement.
| | 03:53 | Good.
| | 03:56 | All right, so I think what we should
do next is decide where we are going to
| | 04:00 | block off the theater versus the
workout area versus our storage area.
| | 04:06 | So we might need some walls.
| | 04:07 | I am going to come down to Walls, Shell,
and Structure and I am going to put
| | 04:11 | in some walls here.
| | 04:12 | So I am going to drag the Wall shape
and I am going to attach it right there to
| | 04:17 | one of my stairs come out.
| | 04:18 | And in fact the stairs, you can see
the direction there going needs to be,
| | 04:25 | rotated around and moved into
position right there. Good.
| | 04:32 | So we are coming out down here.
| | 04:35 | Next I am going to just drag that so
it connects all the way over here to
| | 04:40 | that wall and my stairs.
| | 04:43 | I am going to close that off down here
with another wall piece, right there,
| | 04:51 | drag it down, 90 degrees, perfect.
| | 04:57 | Couple of doors I am going to put a
double door in here, make it easier for
| | 05:00 | storage and I am going to have the
doors open, get away, click-and-drag.
| | 05:08 | Let's put a single door over here, all
we have to do is be on top of the wall.
| | 05:11 | When we release you can see how it
locks into place, just slide it over a
| | 05:15 | little bit, right there. Good.
| | 05:19 | So there is our storage area and in
here we might have some things like hot
| | 05:23 | water heater and furnace for example,
so we can find some of those shapes as
| | 05:27 | well in the various stencils over here.
| | 05:31 | On this side here, I think
I'd like to put in a bar.
| | 05:34 | So let's go to Furniture and see what we get.
| | 05:36 | You can see we have got some Seating,
we have got some Tables including Games
| | 05:42 | Tables, Beds, I don't see anything
here that looks like a bar except that I
| | 05:47 | could use the Book Case shape if I wanted to.
| | 05:50 | So I am going to drag that out here,
I am going to attach it right there.
| | 05:54 | I am going to drag it across and widen it.
| | 05:58 | So this will be perfect, we can put a
little fridge back there, we have got our
| | 06:03 | bar and we are going to put in our
theater up against this wall here.
| | 06:08 | So let's go over to our Wall, Shell,
and Structure and let's build in a wall.
| | 06:16 | Now the wall that I am going to put in
is actually going to be a floating one
| | 06:19 | and it's going to go vertically like so.
| | 06:25 | So the entrance to the
theater will be via here and here.
| | 06:30 | This area is where we will our
workout area and we will also have maybe a
| | 06:34 | games table for example.
| | 06:37 | So back we go to our Furniture, I like
that Ping Pong Table idea, I am going to
| | 06:44 | put that right in there, and my
theater is going to come in here.
| | 06:50 | Now I know from previous lessons that
I can find some of the equipment I am
| | 06:54 | needing for a theater in some of the
other stencils, so I am going to go up to
| | 06:58 | File, and down to Shapes.
| | 07:02 | Let's come over to Maps and Floor
Plans over here and we are going to go to
| | 07:08 | Building Plan and in here for some of
our office accessories and I am going to
| | 07:14 | come down here down below.
| | 07:16 | You can see there is more.
| | 07:17 | We have got Office Furniture, ah!
| | 07:19 | There it is, Office Equipment.
| | 07:21 | So we open up that one.
| | 07:23 | You can see we have got a
Projector screen and a Projector, perfect.
| | 07:27 | So I am going to bring that in,
obviously turn it this way and maybe we will
| | 07:34 | just actually put it back where it was,
I had made a change, I am going to
| | 07:38 | put on this wall here.
| | 07:41 | And I think it needs to be bigger.
| | 07:46 | That's perfect.
| | 07:48 | Now we can put in our projector and
our projector is going to be mounted
| | 07:52 | probably on the ceiling
back in this area here. Good.
| | 07:58 | Now we can go back to
Furniture and figure out our Seating.
| | 08:01 | So if I scroll up, you can see I have
got Love Seats, Sofas, Lounge Chairs,
| | 08:06 | Chairs, Recliners, aha!
| | 08:09 | That's what I like right there,
facing the right direction.
| | 08:15 | And I am going to duplicate that with a
Ctrl+D, slide it into there, and another
| | 08:22 | one and I think we are
going to need a table in there.
| | 08:27 | So let's put in a Rectangular
table, just rotate it around.
| | 08:32 | That looks good right
there and there is our theater.
| | 08:39 | All right so we have got our games area,
maybe a workout area as well, a bar, we
| | 08:45 | can put various equipment back here,
same thing goes for a storage area, where
| | 08:49 | we might want to put shelves and so on.
| | 08:52 | So let's go into our Cabinets over here.
| | 08:55 | I am just going to scroll down to see what
kind of cabinets we have got. All right.
| | 08:59 | There is a Wall Corner Cabinet, I am
going to put that in there and couple of
| | 09:09 | more cabinets locked in just like so
and let's see if we can find some of those
| | 09:18 | items that we would find in
our storage area in a basement.
| | 09:22 | So if I go to Appliances for example, I
am going to see some of the things that
| | 09:26 | I might want to use in other areas of
my basement, but down here I've got my
| | 09:31 | Water heater, and I am
going to put that down there.
| | 09:34 | Look at that I have got a TV down here as
well, Vending machine that's kind of cool.
| | 09:39 | But I am going to leave the
Water heater right there where it is.
| | 09:41 | Washer/Dryer is not going to go in there.
| | 09:44 | I am going to scroll up I am going to
put a Microwave in here, right there,
| | 09:51 | rotate it around, and of course, if I
want to zoom in to that to see what that's
| | 09:57 | going to look like, I am going to go to
75%, come down and over, and I will move
| | 10:03 | that back there, on the bar.
| | 10:09 | All right, it looks good,
back into our storage area.
| | 10:13 | There is our hot Water heater.
| | 10:14 | What else do we need?
| | 10:17 | We need a Vending machine for sure.
| | 10:20 | That's going to come in here, I am going
to zoom out, see my whole page, put the
| | 10:25 | Vending machine right there and flip it around.
| | 10:29 | All right I think you have got the idea,
we've got Furniture, we have got Games,
| | 10:35 | we have got Appliances, look at all of
these different stencils you can play
| | 10:39 | around with if you are going to put a
bathroom down there, you have got the Bath
| | 10:42 | and Kitchen stencil.
| | 10:44 | So all kinds of cool things you can
use there, and of course if you wanted to
| | 10:48 | look good you are going to add some text to it.
| | 10:50 | I am going to click my text
box here, just click at the top.
| | 10:54 | I am going to change this right off the
bat to 18 points, My Dream Basement. Good.
| | 11:03 | Now I am going to size that.
| | 11:05 | I am going to go back to my Pointer tool,
and we are going to drag that out and
| | 11:13 | I think I am going to bump up the
size to 30 points. There we go.
| | 11:18 | My dream basement right ther |
|
|
